DVP Ss Manual

DVP-PLC Application Manual【Program】
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
Preface-The Background and Functions of PLC ...................................................... 1-1
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram........................................................ 1-1
1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram ... 1-2
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-4
1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram .................................................................. 1-8
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure ......................... 1-11
1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 1-14
1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program........................................................ 1-16
Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function

2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number .............................................................. 2-1
2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H] ................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y] .............. 2-9
2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M] ........................................... 2-11
2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S] ................................................. 2-12
2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T] ......................................................... 2-13
2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]...................................................... 2-16
2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F] ........................................................ 2-28
2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29
2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics .................................................. 2-30
2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] ........................................ 2-30
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register ................................................... 2-33
2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions.................................... 2-53
2.12 Fault Code Information ................................................................................... 2-83
Chapter 3 Basic Commands

3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command .................................. 3-1
3.2 Basic Commands Explanations ......................................................................... 3-3
Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands

4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET] ................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ...................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation .................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program .............................................. 4-7
4.5 Categories of Procedures ................................................................................. 4-8
4.6 IST command .................................................................................................. 4-18
Chapter 5 Application Commands

5.1 Summary of Parameters ................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Application Command Structure ........................................................................ 5-6
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values ............................................................................. 5-11
5.4 Index register E, F ........................................................................................... 5-14
5.5 Index for Commands ........................................................................................ 5-16
Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49........................................... 6-1

Chapter 7 Application Commands API 50-99........................................... 7-1
Chapter 8 Application Commands API 100-149 ....................................... 8-1
Chapter 9 Application Commands API 150-199 ....................................... 9-1
Chapter 10 Application Commands API 215-246 ..................................... 10-1
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
Preface----The Background and Functions of PLC

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is one of electronic equipments. It was called “Sequence Controller”
before. It was named “Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)” by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacture Association)
in 1978 and defined as electronic equipment. The operation of PLC is in the following:
Step 1. Read the external input signal, such as the status of keypad, sensor, switch and pulse.
Step 2. Using microprocessor to execute the calculations of logic, sequence, timer, counter and formula according to
the status and the value of the input signal read in the step 1 and pre-write programs saved inner to get the
corresponding output signal, such as open or close of relay, operation of controlled machine or procedure to control
automatic machine or procedure of manufacture. PLC also can be used to maintain and adjust of production program
by editing or modifying the peripheral equipments (personal computer/handheld programming panel). The common
program language of PLC is ladder diagram.
There are stronger functions in PLC with the development and application requirements of electronic technology,
such as position control, network and etc. Output/Input signals are DI (Digital Input), AI (Analog Input), PI (Pulse
Input), DO (Digital Output), AO (Analog Output) and PO (Pulse Output). Thus PLC plays an important role in the
feature industry.
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is an automatic control diagram language that developed during World War II. At first, it just has
basic components, such as A contact (normally open), B contact (normally close), output coil, timer counter and etc.
(The power panel is made up of these basic components) It has more functions, differential contact, latched coil and
the application commands, add, minus, multiply and divide calculation, that traditional power panel can’t make since
PLC is developed.
The working principles of the traditional Ladder Diagram and the PLC Ladder Diagram are similar to each other;
the only difference is that the symbols for the traditional ladder diagram are expressed in the format that are close to
its original substance, while those for the PLC ladder diagram employ the symbols that are more explicit when being
used in computers or data sheets. In the Ladder Diagram Logics, it could be divided into the Combination Logics
and the Sequential Logics, and is described as follows:
1. Combination Logics:
The following example is the combination logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram
separately.
Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram
X0 Y0 X0
Y0
X1 Y1 X1
Y1
X2 X4 Y2 X2 X4
Y2
X3 X3
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1

Example 1: Circuit 1 utilizes one X0 (NO: Normally Open) switch, which is normally known as the “A” switch or
contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the OFF condition at regular time (not pressed); the
output point Y0 is thus in OFF condition. However, once the switch motion (the button is pressed) is
conducted, the contact will be ON, and the output point Y0 will be in ON condition.
Example 2: Similarly, Circuit 2 utilizes the X1 (NC: Normally Close) switch, which is normally known as the “B” switch
or contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the ON condition at regular time; the output point
Y0 is thus in ON condition. While the switch motion is conducted (which is in the OFF condition), the
output point Y0 is in OFF condition.
Example 3: This is an example of combination logics output, which has more than one input equipment. The output
point Y2 will be in ON condition when X2 is in OFF condition or X3 and X4 are in ON condition.
2. Sequential logics:
The sequential logics are a type of circuit that possesses the “Draw-Back” structure, which is to draw back the
circuit’s output result and has it serve as the input condition. Thus, under the same input condition, different
output results will be generated in accordance with previous conditions and motions with different orders.
The following example is the sequential logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram
separately.
Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram
X5 X6 Y3
X5 X6
Y3
Y3 Y3
When the above circuit is just supplied with power, although the X6 switch is ON, the X5 switch is still OFF, thus,
the output relay Y3 will be in OFF condition; output of the relay will only be ON after X5 is ON. Once the output relay
Y3 is in ON condition, there will be a feedback signal containing the ON condition from Y3 to connect in parallel with
the A contact of X5; this circuit is thus also known as the self-latched circuit. The circuit motion is showed in the
following chart:
Device status
X5 X6 Y3
Step
1 N N OFF
2 Y N ON
3 N N ON
4 N Y OFF
5 N N OFF
N: is in OFF condition Y: is in ON condition

From above chart, you can find that the same input may get different result. For example, in the step 1 and 3, the
status of X5 and X6 are in OFF condition but Y3 is in OFF condition in step 1 and in ON condition in step3. That is due
to the self-latched circuit feedback input. In this example, it explains with contact A, contact B and output coil. The
usage of other equipments is the same with this. Please refer to the chapter 3 for the detail.
1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram
1-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual

Although the working principles are in accordance with each other for the traditional ladder diagram and the PLC
ladder diagram, PLC is indeed utilizing the microcomputer chip (MCU) to simulate the motion of the traditional ladder
diagram, which is to use the scan method to look over one by one the conditions of all input devices and output coils,
and afterwards, with the conditions in consideration, to calculate and generate the same output result as that of the
traditional ladder diagram based on the logics of the combination status of the ladder diagram. However, since that
there is only one MCU, the only way to examine the circuits is to look it over one after another within the ladder
diagram program, then calculate the output result in compliance with the program and the input/output status, and
finally, output the results to the external interface; thereafter, start over with the readout of the input status, the
calculation, output, and repeatedly go over the above-mentioned motions again; the time needed to complete the
whole set of cyclic motion is called one Scan Time. The scan time will become longer in accordance with the
increment of the program. With this scan time, it will incur repeated input detections, and thus, result in delay in the
output responses; and the longer the delay time, the greater the error towards the control, and what’s worse, is that
the condition might be unqualified for the control requests. By then, PLC (with faster Scan Time) would be chosen to
do the job; the scan speed is thus an essential specification to PLC. Thanks to the advanced technique of ASIC (IC
with specific functions) within the microcomputer, PLC of the present has made greater progress in the scan speed,
and what follows is the scanning chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Program.
Read input state from outside
X0 X1
Start Y0
Y0
Calculate the result by ladder
diagram algorithm (it doesn’t sent X10
M100 X3
to the outer output point but the Execute in cycles
Y1
inner equipment will output :
immediately.) :
X100 M505
Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
In addition to the difference of scan time, PLC ladder diagram and traditional ladder diagram also has difference
in “reverse current”. In the following chart of traditional ladder diagram, if X0, X1, X4 and X6 are in ON condition and
the others are in OFF condition, output point Y0 will be in ON condition as shown as dotted line in the following
diagram. But in the PLC ladder diagram will have error in the peripheral equipment—WPLSoft due to scan method of
MCU is from up to down and from left to right.

Reverse current of traditional ladder diagram Reverse current of PLC ladder diagram
X0 X1 X2 Y0 X0 X1 X2 Y0
Y0
X3 a X4 X5 X3 a X4 X5
b b
X6 X6
There is a fault in the 3rd row of ladder diagram.
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made
up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder
diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of
electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical
equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has
the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it.
In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the
coil is OFF. You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a).
Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Close,
NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words
makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/ subtraction or shift, you could use
byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also
value of counting time and times.
In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the
corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC: (Refer to Chapter 2 for detail)
Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input
point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input
Input relay
signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of
input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via HPP. The contacts (contact a, b) can be
used unlimitedly. If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and
can’t be used with other functions.
Equipment indication method: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,…. The symbol of equipment is X
and the number uses octal. There are numeric indications of input point on MPU and
expansion unit.

Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output
point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of
Output relay
other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external
load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the
corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…. . The symbol of equipment is Y and the
number uses octal. There are numeric indications of output point on MPU and expansion
unit.
Internal relay The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in PLC. Its
function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the
corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other
internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output
directly, it should output with output point.
Equipment indication: M0, M1,…, M4, M5. The symbol of equipment is M and the number
uses decimal number system.
STEP DVP PLC provides input method for controlling program of step actions. It is very easy to
write control program by using the conversion of control step S of command STL. If there is no
step program in the program, step point S could be used as internal relay M or alarm point.
Equipment indication: S0, S1,…S1023. The symbol of equipment is S and the number
uses decimal.
Timer Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its
contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value
of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and
each timer has its timing period. Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open
and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero.
Equipment indication: T0, T1,…,T255. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses
decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period.
Counter Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of
counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter. When coil is form OFF
to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit
and high-speed counter for user to use.
Equipment indication: C0, C1,…,C255. The symbol of equipment is C and the number
uses decimal.

Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and
counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary
number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store
double words.
Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D9,999. The symbol of equipment is D and the number
uses decimal.
File register The file register can be used to store data or parameter when the register that PLC needs is
not enough during handling data and parameter. It can store 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in
each file register. It uses two continuous number of file register to handle double word. There are
1600 file registers for EP series and 10000 file registers for EH series. There is not the real
equipment number for file register, thus it needs to execute READ/WRITE of file register via
commands API147 MEMR, API148 MEMW or the peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft.
Equipment indication: K0~K9,999. There is no equipment symbol and uses decimal

number for number.
Index register Index register E and F are 16-bit data register just the same as general data register. It can
be wrote and read freely and has the function of index indication to use for character device, bit
device and constants.
Equipment indication: E0~E7, F0~F7. The symbols of equipment are E, F and the number
uses decimal.
The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:
Ladder Diagram
Explanation Command Equipment
Structure
Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, S, T, C
Normally close, contact b LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C
Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, S, T, C
Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, S, T, C
Parallel normally close ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C
Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C

Falling-edge trigger
LDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
switch
Rising-edge trigger in
ANDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
serial
Falling-edge trigger in
ANDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
serial

Ladder Diagram
Explanation Command Equipment
Structure
Rising-edge trigger in
ORP X, Y, M, S, T, C
parallel
Falling-edge trigger in
ORF X, Y, M, S, T, C
parallel
Block in serial ANB none
Block in parallel ORB none
MPS
Multiple output MRD none
MPP
Output command of coil
OUT Y, M, S
drive
S Step ladder STL S
Basic command, Application Please refer chapter 3 basic command and

Application command command chapter 5 application command
Inverse logic INV none
Block: The block is the ladder diagram that made up of the serial or parallel calculation of two or above equipments. It
will get the result of parallel block or serial block according to operation character.
Serial block
Parallel block
Divergent line and combinative line: the vertical line is usually a separation for devices. This line is combination line
for the left device (it means that there are at least two columns or above circuit at
the left connect to this vertical line) this line is the divergent line for the right
device (it means that there are at least two rows or above circuit connect to this
line.
1 2
combinative line of block 1 combinative line of block 2

divergent line of block 2

Network: this is the complete network that made up of devices and blocks. The vertical line or continuous line and the
block or device that line can connect to is the same network.
Independent network: Network1
Network2
Incomplete network:
1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram
The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during
the edited of DPLSoft and WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The maximum contacts in a row
are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to
continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be
used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows.
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
00000 Y1
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling,
including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is
the explanation order.
8
7
4 6
5
3
2 5
1
X0 X1 Y1 X4
Y1
M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
X3 M1

The explanation of command order:

1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3
AND M1
ORB
5 LD Y1
AND X4
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram
1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.
LD command
LD command
AND Block OR Block

The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP
and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0 X0
Time Time
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.

AND AND
command command
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR OR OR
command command command

The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.
ANB command
5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORB
command
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to
down or from left to right.
6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs.
The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between
horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the
contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of
ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command
can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”.
MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same
horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can
recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”.
MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because it is the last
item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.

MPS
You can recognize this command by the symbol “└”.
Basically, that is all right to use the above method to
analyze but sometimes compiler will omit the same MPS
outputs as shown at the right.
MRD
MPP
MPP
7. STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This
command helps the programmer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will
be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we can get clear procedure, and original step point will
have the action of “power loss” after each step point S transfer to the next step point. In this way, we could
transfer to our procedure diagram from the left diagram to the PLC structure diagram below.
M1002
M1002 SET S0
initial S0
pulse S
S0 SET S21
S21
S SET S22
S21 S22
e
S S0
S22 RET
8. RET command: you should add RET command after finishing step ladder program and RET command should
add after STL command as shown in the following.
S20
e
S
RET
S20
e
S
RET
Refer to chapter 4 for the structure of step ladder [ STL ] , [ RET ].
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure

Ladder Diagram LD X0 OR
X1 1 block
OR
LD X2
X0 X2 X1 OR M0 2 OR
Y0 block
X1 M0 C0
ORI M1
Serial
SET S0 ANB block
M1 LD M2 AND
3 block
AND Y0
M2 Y0
ORB Serial block
ANI X1 4 ANI Output state will keep on
5 handling according to
OUT Y0
S0 X10 Multiple program scan state
AND C0
S Y10 outputs
SET S0
SET S10 STL S0 Step ladder Start
7
LD X10
OUT Y10 State working item and 8
S10 X11 step point transfer
S Y11 SET S10
STL S10 9 S10 state take out
SET S11 LD X11 10 Take out X11 state
OUT Y11 11 8
SET S12
SET S11 State working item and
SET S13 SET S12 step point transfer
SET S13
S11 X12 STL S11 12 S11 state take out
S Y12 LD X12 13 Take out X12 state
14
OUT Y12 State working item and
SET S20
SET S20 step point transfer
S20 S12 S13 X13
STL S20
S S S STL S12 Simultaneous
S0 15 divergence
STL S13
RET State working item End of step ladder
LD X13
OUT S0 and step point transfer
X0
CNT C0 K10 RET Return
LD S0
17
C0 X1 CNT C0K10
M0
LD C0 18 Read C0
X1
M1 MPS
M2 AND X1
M2
OUT M0
RST C0 MRD
Multiple
ANI X1
outputs
END OUT M1
MPP
ANI M2
OUT M2
END Program End
Syntax Fuzzy Structure
The analytic process of correct ladder diagram should be from left to right or from up to down. But there are some
exceptions as shown in the following.
Example 1: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.

X0 X2 X4
Good method Bad method
X1 X3 X5 LD X0 LD X0
OR X1 OR X1
LD X2 LD X2
OR X3 OR X3
ANB LD X4
LD X4 OR X5
OR X5 ANB
ANB ANB
The results for the above two programs to convert to ladder diagram are the same. Why one is better than the
other? That is due to operation of MPU. The operation of the program in the left side is one block merges to another
one. Although the length of the program at the right side is the same as the left one, the operation of the program in
the right side is merged at the last. (command ANB is used to merge, it can’t use more than 8 continuous times). In
this program, it just needs to use continuous two times of command ANB and MPU allows that. But when the program
needs to use more than continuous 8 times of command ANB, MPU won’t allow. So the best method is to merge once
the block is established and in this way the logic of programmer will be in order.
Example 2: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.
X0 Good method Bad method
X1 LD X0 LD X0
OR X1 LD X1
OR X2 LD X2
X2 OR X3 LD X3
ORB
X3 ORB
ORB
The difference is very clear in these two programs. In the bad method, the more program code it needs and the
operation memory of MPU also needs to increase. So that is better to decode in the order of the definition.
The error figures of ladder diagram
When editing ladder diagram, you can use all ladder symbols to make up all kinds of figures. When drawing
ladder diagram, you should start from left power line and end with the right power line (the right power line will be
omitted when using DPLSoft ladder diagram) due to the principle for PLC to handle figure program is from up to down
and from left to right (it is drew from left to right and draw the next new row after finishing drawing a row). They are the
common error figure in the following.
It can’t do OR operation upward.

There is reverse power flow during the circuit that

is from input to output signal.
reverse flow power

The correct is output from right upper corner.
If you want to merge or edit, the order should be

from left upper corner to right lower corner. The
block of dot line should move up.
It can’t do parallel operation with empty device.
Empty device can’t do operation with other device.
There is no device in the middle block.
The device in series should be arranged in parallel

with the block that it connects in series.
.
The position of Label P should be in the first row of
the complete network.
The block that is connected in series should be

arranged in parallel with the upper horizontal line.
1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram
To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ANB when series block and parallel block
connect in series.

X0 X1 Command
LD X0
X2
LD X1
OR X2
ANB
X1 X0 Command
LD X1
X2 OR X2
AND X0
To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ORB when single equipment and block are
connected in parallel.
T0 Command
LD T0
X1 X2 LD X1
AND X2
ORB
X1 X2 Command
LD X1
T0
AND X2
OR T0
In figure a of ladder diagram, it does not illegal due to the reverse power flow. In figure a, the upper block is
shorter than lower block, you could make it legal by switching them.
command
X0
LD X0
X1 X2 OR X1
AND X2
X3 X4 LD X3
AND X4
Fig. a
ORB
command
X3 X4
LD X3
X1 X2 AND X4
LD X1
X0 OR X0
AND X2
Fig. b
ORB

You can omit commands MPS, MPP when the multiple outputs in the same horizontal line don’t need to operate
with other input device.
X0 command
Y1 MPS
AND X0
Y0 OUT Y1
MPP
OUT Y0
command
Y0
OUT Y0
X0 AND X0
Y1 OUT Y1
Correct the circuit of reverse flow power
In the following examples, the figure at the left is the ladder diagram that is draw by our definition but there is
reverse flow power in it. Therefore, we correct it and show it at the right side.
Example 1:
X0 X1 X2
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
X3 X4 X5 X10
X6 X7 X10 LOOP1
X6 X7 X5
reverse flow power X10 LOOP1
Example 2:
X0 X1 X2
X0 X1 X2
X3 X4 X5
X3 X4 X5
X6 X7 X10 LOOP1
X6
reverse flow power

X3 X7 X10
reverse flow power

X6
X0 X1 X2 LOOP1
X0 X1 X4 X7 X10
X3 X4 X5
LOOP 2
X6 X7 X10
1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program

Start, Stop and Latching
In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch.
Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are several latching circuits in the
following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally Y1 X2

Y1
contact X2＝Off, and Y1=On are set at the same time, if
X1
X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls priority of
stop.
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally X1 X2

Y1
contact X2 ＝ Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and
Y1
latching) are valid at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start.
Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands
The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made up Top priority of stop
of RST and SET command. X1

SET Y1
It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind
X2
SET command. When executing PLC from up to down, The RST Y1
coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at
Top priority of start
the same time, therefore it calls priority of stop.
X2
It is top priority of start when SET command is set after RST Y1
RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is X1
ON so it calls top priority of start. SET Y1
Example 4: latched
Auxiliary relay M512 is latched at the right side. (refer to X1

PLC user manual) the circuit at the right side will be latched SET M512
X2
when power is on and it will be also latched once the power
RST M512
loss and power on again. Therefore the latched is continuous.
M512
Y1
The common control circuit

Example 5: condition control
X1 X3
X1
Y1
X3
Y1
X2
X2 X4 Y1 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Y2
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched
circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series.
Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
Example 6: Interlock control
X1 X3 Y2 X1
Y1
X3
Y1
X2
X4
X2 X4 Y1 Y1
Y2 Y2
Y2
The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2.
Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won’t act. (This is called interlock.)
Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2 won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of
ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
Example 7: Sequential Control
X1 X3 Y2
If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be
Y1
an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left
Y1
side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after
X2 X4 Y1 acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential.
Y2
Y2
Example 8: Oscillating Circuit
The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT

Y1 Y1
Y1
T T
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1
normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1.
In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON.
Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF and output 0. Scan repeatedly, the period of oscillating circuit is nT+ΔT.
X0 Y1
TMR T0 Kn X0
T0
Y1 Y1
nT T
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next
scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal
number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 9: Blinking Circuit
X0 T2
TMR T1 Kn1 X0
T1 n2 T
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1
Y1 n1 T
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two
timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer
(clock period)
Example 10: Triggered Circuit
X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1

In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of ΔT (a
scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF and normally close M0
and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once
a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This
circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a
period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
Example 11: Delay Circuit
X0
TMR T10 K1000 X0
T10
Y1 Y1
TB = 0.1 sec 100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close
contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delay 100 seconds once input X0 is OFF
and T10 is ON. Please refer to timing chart above.
Example 12: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is
ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
X0
TMR T5 K50 X0
5
T5 T6 seconds
Y4 T5
Y4
Y0
Y4 X0
TMR T6 K30 T6
3
seconds
Example13: Extend Timer Circuit
X0 In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is

TMR T11 Kn1
close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is
T11
clock period.
TMR T12 Kn2
T12
Y1
Example 14: The method of enlarge counter range

X13 The range of 16-bit counter is 0~32,767. If using

CNT C5 Kn1
two counters as figure in left side, the counter range
C5
CNT C6 Kn2 can be enlarge to n1*n2. When counter C5 attains n1,
counter C6 will counts one time and reset itself. Then
RST C5
X14 counter C6 will count the pulse of X13. When counter
RST C6 C6 attains n2, the pulse of X13 will be n1*n2.
C6
Y1
Example 15: Traffic light control (by using step ladder command)
Traffic light control

Yellow Green Green
Red light
Vertical light light blink light
Light Vertical
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y2
light
Horizontal
Y10 Y11 Y12 Y12
light
Horizontal Light Time 35 Sec 5 Sec 25 Sec 5 Sec

Light
Timing chart:
Vertical
Light
Red Y0
Yellow Y1
Green Y2
25 Sec
Horizontal 5 Sec 5 Sec
Light
Red Y10
Yellow Y11
Green Y12
25 Sec
5 Sec 5 Sec

SFC Figure: Ladder Diagram:

M1002
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S0
SET S0
S20 Y0 S30 Y12 S0
S SET S20
TMR T0 K350 TMR T10 K250
T0 T10
Y2
SET S30
S21 S31 TMR T11 K50
M1013
S20
TMR T1 K250 Y12 S Y0
T1 T11
S22 TMR T2 K50 S32 Y11
TMR T0 K350
M1013
Y2 TMR T12 K50 T0
T2 T12 SET S21
S23 Y1 S33 Y10 S21
S Y2
TMR T13 K350
T13 TMR T1 K250

T1
S0 SET S22
S22
S TMR T2 K50
M1013
Y2
T2
SET S23
S23
S Y1
S30
S Y12
TMR T10 K250

T10
SET S31
S31
S TMR T11 K50
M1013
Y12
T11
SET S32
S32
S Y11
TMR T12 K50

T12
SET S33
S33
S Y10
TMR T13 K350

S23 S33 T13
S S S0
RET
END

Drawing by SFC Editor (WPLSoft )
Drawing by SFC Internal Ladder Diagram View
LAD-0
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
SET S0
LAD-0
S0
Transferred condition 1
0
T0
TRANS*
S20 S30
1 5 S22
S21 S31
TMR T2 K50
2 6
M1013
S22 S32 Y2
3 7
S23 S33 Transferred condition 4
T13
TRANS*
4
S0
Transferred condition 7
T12
TRANS*

2 DVP-PLC Function
2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number

ES, EX, SS Models:
Type Device Item Usage Range Function
X0~X177, 128 points, octal Correspond to
X External input relay Total is
number system external input point
256
Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal Correspond to
Y External output relay points
number system external output point
M0~M511, M768~M999,
For general
744 points Total is Contacts can switch to
M Auxiliary For latched * M512~M767, 256 points 1280 On/Off in program
M1000~M1279, 280 points points (some is latched)
For special
(some are latched)
100ms timer T0~T63, 64 points When the timer
indicated by TMR
Relay bit mode
T64~T126, 63 points (when Total is command attains the

T Timer 10ms counter M1028=On, it is 10ms, 128
setting, the T contact
M1028=Off, it is 100ms) points
with the same number
1ms timer T127, 1 points will be ON.
16-bit count up for general C0~C111, 112 points Total is
When the counter
128
16-bit count up for latched * C112~C127, 16 points indicated by CNT
points
(DCNT) command
32-bit count C235~C238, C241, C242,
C Counter 1-phase input attains the setting, the
up/down C244, 7 points Total is
C contact with the
high-speed 1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points 13
same number will be
counter for points
2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points ON.
latched*
Initial step point latched * S0~S9, 10 points
Total is
Step S10~S19, 10 points (use 128 Usage device of step
S Zero point return latched *
point with IST command) ladder diagram (SFC)
points
latched * S20~S127, 108 points
When timer attains,
T Present value of timer T0~T127, 128 points the contact of timer
will be ON.
When timer attains,
Register WORD data
C0~C127, 16-bit counter, 128

C Present value of counter the contact of timer
C235~C254, 32-bit counter, 13 points
will be ON.
For general D0~D407, 408 points Total is
For latched * D408~D599, 192 points 600 points It can be memory
D1000~D1311, 312 points area for storing data.
D
Data (for V4.9 and above) Total is E and F can be used
For special
register D1000~D1143, 144 points 312 points as the special
(for V4.8 and below) (144 purpose of index
E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points) indication
For index indication
points
Control point of
N For master control nested loop N0~N7, 8 points master control nested
loop
Location pointer of
Pointer
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points

CJ, CALL
I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10~99ms)
Time interrupt
(for Version 5.7) Location pointer of
I Interrupt
External interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points interrupt subroutine
Communication interrupt I150
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
K Decimal
Constant
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
H Hexadecimal
H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
* latched area is fixed, it can’t be changed.
2 DVP-PLC Function
EP/SA models:
Type Device Item Range Function
X0~X177, 128 points, octal number Correspond to

X External input relay Total
system is external input point
Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number 256 Correspond to
Y External output relay points
system external output point
For general M0~M511, 512 points (*1) Contacts can be
M512~M999, 488 points (*3) Total switched during
Auxiliary For latched * is
M M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) ON/OFF in the
Relay 4096
M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some points program (some is
For special
are latched) latched)
T0~T199, 200 points (*1)
T192~T199 for subroutine
100ms When the timer that
T250~T255, 6 points (accumulative
TMR command
type) (*4) Total
is indicates attains the
T Timer T200~T239, 40 points (*1)
256 setting, the T contact
10ms T240~T245, 6 points (accumulative points
with the same
type) (*4)
Relay bit mode
number will be On.

T246~T249, 4 points (accumulative
1ms
type) (*4)
C0~C95, 96 points (*1)
16-bit count up
C96~C199, 104 points (*3)
C200~C215, 16 points (*1) When the timer that
32-bit count up/down
C216~C234, 19 points (*3) CNT(DCNT)
Total
C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 9 is command indicates
C Counter
points (*3) 250 attains, the contact C
points
32-bit high-speed C246, C247, C249, 1-phase 2 with the same
counter inputs, 3 points (*3) number will be On.
C251, C252, C254, 2-phase 2
inputs, 3 points (*3)
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*1)
S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
Step Zero point return Total
S command) (*1) is Usage device of step
point For general S20~S512, 492 points (*1) 1024 ladder diagram
points
For latched * S512~S895, 384 points (*3)
For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points (*3)

2 DVP-PLC Function
When timer attains,

T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points the contact will be
On.
Present value of counter C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points When timer attains,
C
Register WORD data
C200~C254, 16-bit counter, 50 points the contact will be On.

For general D0~D199, 200 points (*1)
It is the memory area
D200~D999, 800 points (*3)
for storing data. E and
D Data For latched* D2000~D4999, 3000 points Total is
F can be used as
register (*3) 5000 points
special purpose of
For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points
index indication
For index indication E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points (*1)
It is extension register
None File register * K0~K1599 (1600 points) (*4)
for storing data
The control point of
N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points
master control nested
The location point of
CJ, CALL
I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6
External interrupt
Pointer
points
I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□＝1~99ms,
For Time interrupt The location point of
I time base=0.1ms)
interrupt interrupt subroutine.
High-speed counter
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
reaches interrupt
Communication interrupt I150
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
K Decimal number system
Constant
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

H Hexadecimal number system
*1: non-latched area is fixed, it can’t be changed.

*2: non-latched area can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.
*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.
*4: latched area is fixed, it can’t be modified. (the area marked with【】can’t be changed)

2 DVP-PLC Function
Latched setting for each EP/SA model:

For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched
M0~M511 M512~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095
M Factory setting is
Auxiliary relay Factory setting is latched
latched
It is fixed to be Some are latched and
non-latched Start: D1200(K512) can’t be changed Start: D1202(K2000)
End: D1201(K999) End: D1203(K4095)
100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms

T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255
T
Timer
It is fixed to be It is fixed to be Accumulative type
non-latched non-latched It is fixed to be latched
32 bits count up/down high

16 bits count up 32 bits count up/down
speed counter
C0~C95 C96~C199 C200~C215 C216~C234 C235~C255
It is fixed to be It is fixed to be
C Factory setting is latched
latched latched
Counter It is fixed to
It is fixed to be Start: D1208 Start: D1210
be
non-latched （K96）（K216） Start: D1212（K235）
non-latched
End: D1209 End: D1211 End: D1213（K255）
（K199）（K234）
For Special
Latched Latched For general
general register
S S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S511 S512~S895 S896~S1023
Step relay Factory setting is latched
It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1214（K512） It is fixed to be latched
End: D1215（K895）
For general Latched Special register Latched
D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999
D Factory setting is
Factory setting is latched
Register It is fixed to be latched Some are latched and
non-latched Start: D1216 (K200) can’t be changed Start: D1218 (K2000)
End: D1217 (K999) End: D1219 (K4999)
K0~K1599
Data Register
It is fixed to be latched
EH model:
Total Corresponds to
X External input relay X0~X377, 256 points, octal number system
is external input point
512 Corresponds to
Y External output relay Y0~Y377, 256 points, octal number system
points external output point
For general M0~M499, 500 points (*2)
Total Contacts can be
Relay bit mode
M500~M999, 500 points (*3)

Auxiliary For latched is switched between
M M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3)
relay 4096 On/Off in the program
M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some are points (some is latched)
For special
latched)
T0~T199, 200 points (*2) When the timer that
100ms T192~T199 is for subroutine Total set by TMR
【T250~T255】, 6-point Accumulative type (*4) is command attains, the
T Timer
T200~T239, 40 points (*2) 256 T contact with the
10ms points same number will be
【T240~T245】, 6-point Accumulative type (*4)
1ms 【T246~T249】, 4-point Accumulative type (*4) On.

2 DVP-PLC Function
C0~C99, 100 points (*2)

16-bit count up
C100~C199, 100 points (*3)
Total When the timer that
32-bit count C200~C219, 20 points (*2)
is set by CNT(DCNT)
C Counter up/down C220~C234, 15 points (*3)
253 command attains, the
C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 10 points (*3) points contact C will be On.
High-speed
C246~C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4 points(*3)
counter
C251~C254, 2-phases 2 inputs, 4 points (*3)
Initial step
S0~S9, 10 points (*2)
point
For zero point S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command) Total
Step return (*2) is Usage device of step
S
points For general S20~S499, 480 points (*2) 1024 ladder diagram (SFC)
For latched S500~S899, 400 points (*3) points
For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points (*3)

When timer attains,
T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points the contact of timer
will be On.
Register WORD data
When timer attains,

C Present value of counter the contact of timer
will be On.
For general D0~D199, 200 points, (*2) It is the memory area
D200~D999, 800 points (*3) Total is for storing data. E
Data For latched
D D2000~D9999, 8000 points (*3) 10000 and F can be used as
register
For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points points special purpose of
For index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points (*1) index indication
Extension register for
None File register K0~K9999(10000 points) (*4)
storing data
Master control nested
control point
The location pointer of
CJ, CALL
I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□
(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points
External interrupt
(□=1, rising-edge trigger , □=0, falling-edge
Pointer
trigger )
I6□□, I7□□, I8□□, 3 points(□□＝1~99ms) time
Interrupt
Time interrupt base=1ms The location pointer of

I
interrupt subroutine
I8□□, 1 point (□□＝1~99, time base=0.1ms)
High-speed counter
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
attained interrupt
Pulse interrupt I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
Communication
I150
interrrupt
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
K Decimal system K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit
Constant
operation)
H Hexadecimal system

2 DVP-PLC Function
*1: the area of non-latched is fixed, it can’t be changed.

*2: the area of non-latched, it can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.
*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.
*4: latched area is fixed, it can’t be modified. (the area marked with【】can’t be changed)
Latched setting for each EH model:

For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched
M M0~M499 M500~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095
Auxiliary relay
Start: D1200(K500) Some are latched and Start: D1202(K2000)
End: D1201(K999) they can’t be changed. End: D1203(K4095)
100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms
T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255
T Factory setting is Factory setting is
Timer non-latched non-latched Accumulative type
Start: D1204 (HFFFF)*1 Start: D1206 (HFFFF)*1 Fixed latched
End: D1205 (HFFFF)*1 End: D1207 (HFFFF)*1
16-bit count up 32-bit count up/down 32-bit high-speed count up/down
C0~C99 C100~C199 C200~C219 C220~C234 C235~C245 C246~C255
C Non-latched Non-latched Latched
Latched (default) Latched (default)
Counter (default) (default) (default)
Start: D1208 (K100) Start: D1210 (K220) Start: D1212 (K235)
End: D1209 (K199) End: D1211 (K234) End: D1213 (K255)
Zero point
Initial For general Latched Step point for alarm
return
S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S499 S500~S899 S900~S1023
S
Step relay Non-latched (default) Latched (default)
Start: D1214 (K500) Always is latched
End: D1215 (K899)
For general Latched Special register Latched
D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999
D
Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Latched (default)
Register
Some is latched, it can’t
Start: D1216 (K200) be changed Start: D1218 (K2000)
End: D1217 (K999) End: D1219 (K9999)
* 1: HFFFF means factory setting is non-latched.

When switching between power On/Off or MPU RUN/STOP mode, the memory type of version 5.5 and higher of ES,
ES/EX/SS series will be as following:
Clear all M1031
Power Clear all M1032 Factory
Memory type STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP Non-latched
Off=>On latched area setting
area
When M1033=Off, clear
Non-latched Clear Clear Unchanged 0
When M1033=On, unchanged
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear Unchanged
Special M,
Initial
Special D, Initial Unchanged Unchanged
setting
index register

2 DVP-PLC Function
The memory type of EP/SA/EH models will be as following:

Clear all M1031
Power Clear all M1032 Factory
Memory type STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP Non-latched
Off=>On latched area setting
area
When M1033=Off, clear
Non-latched Clear Clear Unchanged 0
When M1033=On, No change
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear 0
Special M,
Initial
Special D, Initial Unchanged Unchanged
setting
index register
File Register Unchanged 0
2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H]
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

K Decimal
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Constant
H Hexadecimal
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the
explanation of value types.
1. Binary Number (BIN)

It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the
following.
Bit : Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble : It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent
number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte : It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0). It can used to
represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word : It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to
represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word : It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to
represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.
DW Double Word
W1 W0 Word
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte
NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble
Bit
2. Octal Number (OCT)
The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17…(device number)

2 DVP-PLC Function
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17…(device number)
3. Decimal Number (DEC)
The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.
To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
To be the device number of S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
4. BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD)
It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the
four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output
value to 7-segment display to be display.
5. Hexadecimal Number (HEX)
The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.
To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in
decimal number.
Exception:
The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For
example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately.
Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100 means 100 in
hexadecimal number.
Reference Chart:
Binary Octal Decimal BCD Hexadecimal
(BIN) (OCT) (DEC) (Binary Code Decimal) (HEX)
Constant K,
Equipment For DIP Switch and 7-segment
For PLC internal operation equipment M, S, T, C, Constant H
X, Y number display
D, E, F, P, I number
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 11 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 12 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 13 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 B
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 14 12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 15 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 D

2 DVP-PLC Function
Binary Octal Decimal BCD Hexadecimal

(BIN) (OCT) (DEC) (Binary Code Decimal) (HEX)
Constant K,
Equipment For DIP Switch and 7-segment
For PLC internal operation equipment M, S, T, C, Constant H
X, Y number display
D, E, F, P, I number
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 16 14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 E
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17 15 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 F
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 20 16 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 10
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 21 17 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 11
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 143 99 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 63
2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y]
Input/output contact number:(octal number)
For MPU, the number of input and output contact will be counted from X0 and Y0. The number will be changed
with points of MPU. For I/O extension unit, the number of input / output terminal is counted with the connection
sequence of MPU.
For ES, EX, SS Models:
Model no DVP-14ES DVP-14SS DVP-20EX DVP-24ES DVP-32ES DVP-60ES Extension I/O
X0~X7 X0~X7 X0~X7 X0~X17 X0~X17 X0~X43 X20(X50)~X177

Input X
(8 Points) (8 Points) (8 Points) (16 Points) (16 Points) (36 Points) (Note)
Y0~Y5 Y0~Y5 Y0~Y5 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y17 Y0~Y27 Y20(Y30)~Y177
Output Y
(6 Points) (6 Points) (6 Points) (8 Points) (16 Points) (24 Points) (Note)
Note: Besides DVP-60ES, the started input number of extension unit is from X20 and the started output
number of extension unit from Y20. The started input number of DVP-60ES is X50 and the started
output number of DVP-60ES is Y30. The number of extension I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is
less than 8 points, it will count with 8 points.
EP/SA model:
Model no DVP-12SA (Note1) DVP-14EP DVP-32EP Extension I/O

Input X X0~X7 (8 points) X0~X7 (8 points) X0~X17 (16 points) X20~X177 (note 2)
Output Y Y0~Y3 (4 points) Y0~Y7 (8 points) Y0~Y17 (16 points) Y20~Y177 (note 2)
Note 1: All SA functions are the same as EP except function extension card. All SA extension units share
with SS series.
Note 2: The started input number of extension unit is from X20 and the started output number of extension
unit from Y20. The number of extension I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is less than 8 points, it
will count with 8 points.

2 DVP-PLC Function
EH model:
Model no DVP-16EH DVP-20EH DVP-32EH DVP-48EH DVP-64EH DVP-80EH Extension I/O
X0~X7 X0~X13(12 X0~X17 X0~X27 X0~X37 X0~X47 X20~X377

Input X
(8 points) points) (16 points) (24 points) (32 points) (40 points) (note)
Y0~Y7 Y0~Y7(8 Y0~Y17 Y0~Y27 Y0~Y37 Y0~Y47 Y20~Y377

Output Y
(8 points) points) (16 points) (24 points) (32 points) (40 points) (note)
Note: Besides DVP-16EH and DVP-20EH, the started input/output number of extension unit starts with the
last number of MPU. The started input number of DVP-60EH is X20 and the started output number
of DVP-60EH is Y20. The numbers of extension I/O are sequential numbers. The input number can
be up to X377 and output number can be up to Y377.
Input relay: X0~X377
The number of input relay (or called input terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be up
to 256 points, the range as follows: X0~X7, X10~X17, ……, X370~X377.
Output relay: Y0~Y377
The number of output relay (or called output terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be
up to 256 points, the range as follows: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17, ……, Y370~Y377.
Input/output contact Function:
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input
equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The
On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t be changed by using
peripheral equipment (HPP or WPLSoft).
(※ There is a special relay M1304 in EH model to force input contact X On/Off by peripheral equipment
HPP or WPLSoft, but PLC won’t receive any external input signal at this time.)
Output contact Y Function:
The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off
signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage
times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for output coil Y and it is
recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last
output Y with PLC program scan method.

2 DVP-PLC Function
X0
Y0 1 2 , i.e.
The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit ○
decided by On/Off of X10.
Y0 is repeated
X10
Y0 2
The Handling Process of PLC Program (Batch I/O)
Input signal input X Input signal:

1. PLC will read the On/Off of input signal into the
memory of input signal before executing
input terminal
program.
read in memory
2. The input signal state in memory won’t change
Input signal memory
if On/Off of the input signal changes during
Program read X0 state from memory executing. The new On/Off state will be read
X0 Write Y0 state into into memory in the next scan.

Device Memory
Y0 3. The delay time from the changes of external

read Y0 state from memory signal On→Off or Off→On to the contact will be
Y0
10ms.
M0
Write M0 state into Program:
Output output PLC executes each command in program from

address 0 after reading On/Off state of input
output latched memory
signal in input signal memory and save each
On/Off of output coil into each equipment
output terminal memory.
Output:
Y output 1. When executing END command, send On/Off
state of Y in memory to output latched memory.
In fact, this memory is the coil of output relay.
2. The delay time from the change of On→Off or
Off→On of relay coil to contact On/Off.
2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M]
The number of auxiliary relay:(decimal number)
ES, EX, SS models:
For general M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

Total is
Auxiliary relay
For latched M512~M767, 256 points. It is fixed to be latched area. 1280
M points
For special M1000~M1279, 280 points. Some are latched.

2 DVP-PLC Function
EP/SA models:
For general M0~M511, 512 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

Total is
Auxiliary relay M512~M999, M2000~M4095, 2584 points. It can be changed to
For latched 4096
M non-latched area by parameters.
points
For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points.
EH models:
M0~M499, 500 points. It can be changed to latched area by setting

For general
parameters.
Total is
Auxiliary relay
M500~M999, M2000~M4095, 2596 points. It can be changed to 4096
M For latched
non-latched area by setting parameters. points
For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points. Some are latched.
Auxiliary Relay Function

There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in
program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly. There are three types
divided by its characteristics.
1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to OFF when power loss during running. Its state will be OFF when
power on after power loss.
2. Auxiliary relay for latched : The state will be saved when power loss during running and the state when
power on after power loss will be the same as the state before power loss.
3. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please don’t use undefined
auxiliary relay. Please refer to 2.10 Special relay and special register for each
special auxiliary relay and 2.11 Functions of special auxiliary relay and special
registers.
2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S]
The numbering of auxiliary relay (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS models:
Initial latched S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Zero point S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be Total is
Step relay S 128
return latched latched area. points
Latched S20~S127, 108 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
EP/SA Models:
For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

For zero point S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be
return non-latched area.
Total is
Step relay S For general S20~S511, 492 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. 1024
points
S512~S895, 384 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area
For latched
by parameters.
For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

2 DVP-PLC Function
EH Models:
For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.

For zero point S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command). It can be latched
return area by setting parameters.
Total is
For general S20~S499, 480 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. 1024
Step relay S
S500~S899, 400 points. It can be non-latched area by setting points
For latched
parameters.
S900~S1023, 124 points. It can be latched area by setting
For alarm
parameters.
The function of step relay:

Step relay S is the basic equipment of step ladder diagram and it can set process easily in PLC. In step ladder
diagram (or call Sequential Function Chart, SFC), it should be used with command STL, REL and etc.
There are 1024 points, S0~S1023, in step relay S. Like output relay Y, there are output coil and A, B contacts in
each step relay S and unlimited usage times in program. But it can’t drive external load directly. Step relay (S) can be
used as general auxiliary relay when not use with step command. There are four types divided by its characteristics.
1. Initial step relay : S0~S9, 10 points.
In Sequential Function Chart (SFC), it is the step point for initiating.
2. Zero point return step : S10~S19, 10 points.

relay S10 – S19 are for zero point return when using API 60 IST in program. If it can’t
use IST command, they will be used as general step relay.
3. General step relay : EP/SA model: S20~S511, 492 points. EH mode: S20~S499, 480 points.
Those step points that are used as general in sequential function chart (SFC).
They will be cleared when power loss after running.
4. Latched step relay : ES, EX, SS models: S20~S127, 108 points. EP models: S512~S895,
384points. EH models: S500~S899, 400 points.
In sequential function chart (SFC), latched step relay will be saved when power
loss after running. The state of power on after power loss will be the same as
the sate before power loss.
5. Step relay for alarm : EP/SA models: S896~S1023, 128 points. EH models: S900~S1023, 124
points.
The step relay for alarm uses with alarm drive command API 46 ANS to be the
contact for alarm. It is used to record warning and eliminate external
malfunction.
2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T]
The numbering of timer (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS models:
100ms for general T0~T63, 64 points

Total is
T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms. when M1028=Off, it
Timer T 10ms for general 128
is 100ms)
points
1ms for general T127, 1 points

2 DVP-PLC Function
EP/SA model:
100ms for general T0~T199, 200 points. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.)
100ms for
T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
accumulative
Total is
10ms for general T200~T239, 40 points.
Timer T 256
10ms for points
accumulative
1ms for
accumulative
EH model:
T0~T199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.

100ms for general
(T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.)
100ms for
accumulative Total is
Timer T 10ms for general T200~T239, 40 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. 256
10ms for points
accumulative
1ms for
accumulative
Timer function:
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be ON when the
present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as
settings.
The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
There are three types divided by these characteristics as follows.
1. General timer:
ES/EP/SA Series General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if
:
Models timer attains when executing command TMR.
General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if
EH Series Models :
timer attains when executing command TMR.
X0 When X0=On, timer T0 is counted up with

TMR T0 K100
100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present
T0 value of timer equals to setting (K100).
Y0 10 sec
When X0=Off or power off, timer T0 will be
X0 cleared to 0 and output coil T0 will be OFF.
K100
present
T0 value
Y0
2. Accumulative timer:

2 DVP-PLC Function
General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if
ES/EP Series Models :
EH Series Models :
X0 When X0=On, timer T250 is counted up with
TMR T250 K100 100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present
value of timer equals to settings (K100).
T250
If X0=Off or power off during counting, timer
Y0 T250 pauses and keep on counting after X0=On. The
present value counts up till the present value of timer
T1 T2 T1+T2=10sec
equals to settings (K100), output coil T0=On.
X0
K100
present
T250 value
Y0
3. Timer for subroutine

If timer is used in subroutine or have interrupt in subroutine, use timer T192~T194 for it.
General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if
ES/EP Series Models :
EH Series Models :
If general timer is used in subroutine or interrupt to insert in subroutine and the subroutine won’t be executed,
timer can’t count correctly.
Designate method of settings: actual setting time of timer = unit * settings.
1. Designate constant K: Settings designates constant K directly
2. Designate indirectly D: Settings use data register D to be indirect designation
The detail of timer:
Beside timer used for subroutine, the flow chart of general timer is in the following:
Timer will start when executing TMR command.
When X0=On, If scan time is longer, same scan will count with
input reflash it starts to count. plural timing pulse automatically.
X0
contact T0 is On
TMR T0 K100 T0 counts to
10sec now,
but contact
isn’t On.
T0 contact Y0=On
Y0
1st scan 2nd scan Nth scan (N+1)th scan
From action above, the action since the coil is started to be ON in detail are in the following:
+T0
T
-α
α : 1ms timer is 0.001 second, 10ms timer is 0.01 second, 100ms timer is 0.1 second
T : Setting time of timer (second)
T0 : Scan time (second)

2 DVP-PLC Function
If contact is wrote prior to TMR command in program, it needs to add 2*T0 (two times scan time) in the worst
situation.
If timer setting is 0, output contact will be ON when TMR command is executed in the next time.
2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]
The numbering of counter (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS model:

16 bits count up for
C0~C111, 112 points
general
Counter C
C112~C127, 16 points. it is always latched area Total is
latched
141
C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points. It is always
1-phase input points
32 bits count up/down latched area
High speed counters C 1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It is always latched area
2-phase inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It is always latched area
EP/SA models:
C0~C95, 96 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
general
16 bits count up for C96~C199, 104 points. It can be non-latched area by setting
latched parameters.
32 bits count
Counter C
up/down for C200~C215, 15 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
general
Total is
32 bits count
C216~C234, 19 points. It can be changed to be non-latched 250
up/down for
area by setting parameters. points
latched
1-phase input for C235~C242, C244, 9 points. It can be changed to be
latched non-latched area by setting parameters.
32 bits count up/down 1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It can be changed to be
High speed counters C for latched non-latched area by setting parameters.
2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It can be changed to be
for latched non-latched area by setting parameters.
EH models:
16-bit count up for C0~C99, 100 points. It can be changed to be latched area
general by parameters.
16-bit count up for C100~C199, 100 points. It can be changed to be
latched non-latched area by parameters.
Counter C
32-bit count up/down C200~C219, 20 points. It can be changed to be latched area
for general by parameters.
32-bit count up/down C220~C234, 15 points. It can be changed to be non-latched
Total is
for latched area by parameters.
253
Software 1-phase 1 C235~C240, 6 points. It can be changed to be non-latched
points
input area by parameters.
Hardware 1-phase 1 C241~C244, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched
32 bits count up/down input area by parameters.
High-speed counters C Hardware 1-phase 2 C246~C249, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched
inputs area by parameters.
Hardware 1-phase 2 C251~C254, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched
inputs area by parameters.
Features:

2 DVP-PLC Function
Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters

Type General General High speed
Count
Count up Count up/down
direction
Settings 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Designate for Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
constant
Present Counter will stop when attaining Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings
value change settings
Output When count attains settings, When count up attains settings, contact will be ON and latched.
contact contact will be ON and latched. When count down attains settings, contact will reset to OFF.
Reset action The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to OFF.
Present
16 bits 32 bits
register
Contact After scanning, act together. After scanning, act Act immediately when count attains. It
action together. has no relation with scan period.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from OFF to ON, the present value of counter equals to settings and output
coil is ON. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C199:
1. Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be ON
immediately at the first count.
2. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value
before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
3. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the
same as settings.
4. The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1999)
to be indirect setting.
5. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be
positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768.
Example:
LD X0
X0
RST C0 RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5
CNT C0 K5
C0
LD C0 Y0
OUT Y0

2 DVP-PLC Function
1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, X0

C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to
OFF.
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will X1
count up (add 1).
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 5
contact is ON and C0 = setting =K5. C0 4
won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 C0 settings
3
remains K5. present 2
value 1
0 0
Contacts Y0, C0
32-bit general addition/subtraction counters C200~C234:
1. The setting range of general 32-bit counter is K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. (not for DVP ES, EX and SS
MPU)
2. Special auxiliary relay used to switch count up/down of general 32-bit addition/subtraction counters decided by
M1200~M123. For example: When M1200=Off, C200 is for addition. When M1200=On, C200 is for
subtraction.
3. Settings can be constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1999 is not included) and also can
be positive/negative number. If using data register D, it will occupy two continuous data register.
4. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If it is latched counter, counter will save the present
value and the contacts state and keep on counting when power is on after power loss.
5. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way, once
counter counts down to -2,147,483,648 the next value will be 2,147,483,647.
Example:
LD X10 X10
OUT M1200 M1200
LD X11 X11
RST C200 RST C200
LD X12
X12
DCNT C200 K-5
CNT C200 K-5
C200
LD C200 Y0
OUT Y0

2 DVP-PLC Function
1. X10 drives M1200 to decide C200 is gradual gradual

X10 increase increase
addition or subtraction. gradual decrease
X11
2. When X11 is from Off to ON and RST
command is executed, C200 will be clear X12
to 0 and contact will be off. 5
4 4
C200 3 3
3. When X12 is from Off to On, counter present 1
2 2
1
value
0 0 0
will add one (count up) or subtract 1 (count -1
-2
down). -3 -3
-4 -4
output contact -5 -5
4. When counter C200 is from K-6 to K-5, is On before. -6 -6
-7 -7
the contact of C200 is from Off to On. contacts -8
When counter C200 is from K-5 to K-6, the Y0, C0
contact of C200 will be from On to Off.
5. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the
next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same
as settings.
32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C254:
1. Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is : K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647.
2. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C244 is decided by the On/Off of
special auxiliary relay M1235~M1244. For example: if M1235=Off, C235 is addition and if M1235=On,
C235 is subtraction.
3. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C246~C254 is decided by the On/Off of
special auxiliary relay M1246~M1254. For example: if M1246=Off, C246 is addition and if M1246=On,
C246 is subtraction.
4. The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D (special data
register D1000~D1999 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data
register.
5. If using DMOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value which is large than setting to any high-speed
counter, at the next time that input point X of counter is from Off to On, this contact doesn’t have any
change and it will do addition and subtraction with present value.
6. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way,
once counter counts down to -2,147,483,648, the next value will be 2,147,483,647.

2 DVP-PLC Function
High-speed counter for ES / EX / SS series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 5KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.
Type 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A
X1 U/D R R D D D B B B
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input

D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input
Input points X0 and X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 40KHz.
High-speed counter for EP/SA series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 10KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.
Type 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
X4 U/D
X5 U/D

1. Input point X0, X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 20KHz
2. There are two functions for input points X5
When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.
When M1260=On, it is Global reset for C235~C239.
C235~C240 are high-speed counters for EH series and they are program interrupted 1-phase high-speed
counter (10KHz) and total frequency is 20KHz. C241~ C254 are Hardware High Speed Counter, is called HHSC.
pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC 1 can up to 100 KHz; HHSC2 and HHSC3 can up to 30KHz (both of
single phase and AB phase).
C241, C246, C251 share HHSC0

1. Each HHSC can be used for a number one time and it uses command DCNT to designate.
2. There are three modes for each HHSC:
A. 1-phase input, it is called Pulse/Direction mode

B. 1-phase 2 inputs, it is called CW/CCW mode
C. 2-phase inputs, it is called AB phase mode

2 DVP-PLC Function
Type Program-interrupted 1-phase

Hardware High-speed Counter
High-speed Counter
Type 1-phase input 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
Input
X0 U/D U/D U A
X1 U/D D B
X2 U/D R R R
X3 U/D S S S
X4 U/D U/D U A
X5 U/D D B
X6 R R R
X7 S S S
X10 U/D U A
X11 D B
X12 R R R
X13 S S S
X14 U/D U A
X15 D B
X16 R R R
X17 S S S

3. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:
A. There are Reset signal and Start signal of external inputs in HHSC0~3. It also can be Reset signal
by setting special M, M1272 (HHSC0), M1274 (HHSC1), M1276 (HHSC2) and M1278 (HHSC3).
And it can be Start signal by setting special M, M1273 (HHSC0), M1275 (HHSC1), M1277
(HHSC2) and M1279 (HHSC3).
B. If input external control signals of R and S aren’t used when using high-speed counter, the
function of input signal can be closed by setting M1264/ M1266/ M1268/ M1270 and M1265 /
M1267/ M1269/ M1271 to True. The corresponding external input can be used as general inputs.
Please refer following for using.
C. When using special M to be high-speed counter, control input with START and TRSET and the
action will be affected with scan time.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Current value Comparison value
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D of counter reached setting
Counting pulse U
X0 X4 X10 X14 HHSC0
A
HHSC1
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Comparator
HHSC2
Counting pulse B
X1 X5 X11 X15
D HHSC3
DHSCS occupies one group setting value

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 DHSCR occupies one group setting value
Counting mode Counting Comparison value DHSCZ occupies two groups setting value
D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228
up/down flag reached output
Setting value:0~3 respectively selection
represent Mode 1~4
(1~4 frequency mode )
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D mode setting flag HHSC0 M1246 M1251 High speed Comparison value
comparison reached operation
C241 C242 C243 C244 HHSC1 M1247 M1252 command
M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244
DHSCS SET/RESET
HHSC2 M1248 M1253
DHSCR I 010 ~ I 060 interrupt
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 HHSC3 M1249 M1254 counting value reset
DHSCZ
X2 X6 X12 X16
AND Reset signal R
M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270 OR
Interrupt inhibit flag

M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278 I 010 M1289
I 020 M1290
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 I 030 M1291
X3 X7 X13 X17 I 040 M1292
AND Start signal S
M1265 M1267 M1269 M1271 OR I 050 M1293
I 060 M1294
M1273 M1275 M1277 M1279
4. Counting mode selection
ES/EX/SS/EP high-speed counter uses special D1022 in 2-phase inputs counting mode to select
double frequency mode. D1022 content will be loaded in at the first scan time when PLC switches
from STOP to RUN. (ES/EX/SS series MPU (V5.5 and higher) supports this function.
Device No. Functions

D1022 Double frequency setting of counter counting method
D1022=K1 Normal frequency mode
D1022=K2 Double frequency mode (factory setting)
D1022=K4 Four times frequency mode
Double frequency mode (↑,↓ means the action of counting)
Counting Wave for counting mode

mode
1
A-phase
(normal frequency)
2-phase
inputs
B-phase counting down

counting up

2 DVP-PLC Function
Counting Wave for counting mode

mode
A-phase
2
frequency) B-phase
(double
counting down
counting up
A-phase
4 (four times
frequency)
B-phase
counting down
counting up
There are 1 to 4 times frequency for EH hardware high-speed counter (HHSC0~3) and set by Special D1225~D1228.
Facotry setting is double frequency.
Type Special
Count up (+1) Count down (-1)
D(settings)
1(normal U/D
frequency) U/D FLAG

1-phase input
2(double U/D
frequency) U/D FLAG
1(normal U
1-phase 2 frequency) D
inputs 2(double U
frequency) D
1(normal A
frequency) B
2(double A
2-phase 2 frequency) B
inputs 3(three times A
frequency) B
4(four times A
frequency) B
5. Device number and special registers for high-speed counter
Device number Functions
M1150 Declare DHSZ command to be used for multi-group setting comparison mode
M1151 Multi-group setting comparison finishes to execute a cycle
M1152 Declare DHSZ command to be used in frequency control mode

2 DVP-PLC Function
M1153 Frequency control finishes executing.

C235 ~ C244 are count direction of high-speed counters.
M1235 ~ M1244 When M12□□=Off, C2□□ is count up. When M12□□=On, C2□□ is count
down.
C246 ~ C249, C251 ~ C254 are monitor count direction of high-speed
M1246 ~ M1249 counters.
M1251 ~ M1254 When C2□□ counts up, M12□□=Off. When C2□□ count down, M12□□
=On.
M1264 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC0
M1265 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0
M1272 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0
M1274 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1
M1289 Disable high-speed counter interrupt insert I010~I060
M1290 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I010
M1312 C235 Start input point control
M1320 C235 Reset input point control
M1326 C235 Start/Reset enable control

2 DVP-PLC Function

D1022 ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models double frequency selection of AB phase counter
The register to record the comparison item of settings comparison mode of
D1150
multi-group
D1151 The register to record the comparison item of frequency control mode
Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the high word of pulse
D1152
output frequency.
Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the low word of pulse
D1153
output frequency.
D1225 First group counter setting, C241, C246 and C251 counting mode
D1226 Second group counter setting, C242, C247 and C252 counting mode
D1227 Third group counter setting, C243, C248 and C253 counting mode
D1228 4th group counter setting, C244, C249 and C254 counting mode
HHSC0~ HHSC3 counting mode of EH hardware high-speed counter
When setting to 1, it is normal frequency. Setting to 2 is double
D1225 ~ D1228
frequency.(Factory setting)
Setting to 3 is three times frequency and setting to 4 is four times frequency.
1-phase inputs high-speed counter:
Example:
LD X10 X10
RST C241 RST C241
LD X11 X11
OUT M1241 M1241
LD X12 X12
DCNT C241 K5 DCNT C241 K5
LD C241 C241
OUT Y0 Y0
1. X11 drives M1241 to decide C241 is counting down

addition or subtraction. X11,M1241 contact counting up
2. When X10=On and RST command is
executed, clear C241 to 0 and reset X10
output contact to off.
3. When X12=On, C241 receives count X12
signal from X0 and counter will count up
(+1) or count down (-1). X0
4. When counter C241 attains settings
K5, C241 will be ON. If there is still C241
present 7
signal input for X0, it will keep on
value 6 6
counting. 5 5
4 4
3 3
2 0
1
0
Y0, C241 contact

2 DVP-PLC Function
5. C241 for ES, EX, SS, EP series has external input Reset X1 signal.
6. C241 for EH series has external input Reset signal (X2), Start signal (X3).
7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact
of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of
start signal is disabled by M1273.
9. Counting mode (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be set by D1225.
Factory setting is double frequency.
1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counters:
Example:
LD X10 X10
RST C246 RST C246
LD X11 X11
LD C246 C246
OUT Y0 Y0
X10
1. When X10=On and RST command is executed,
clear C246 to 0 and reset output contact to off. X11
X0
2. When X11=On, C246 receives count signal count up
X1
from X0 input terminal and counter will count up count down
C246
(+1) or receive count signal from X1 input present 7
value 6 6
terminal and counter will count down (-1). 5 5
4 4
3 3
3. When C246 attains settings K5, C246 will be 2 0
on. After C246 is ON, if there is counter pulse 1
0
input, C246 will keep on counting.
Y0, C246 contact
4. C246 for EH series has external input Reset signal X2 or Start signal X3.
5. C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be normal frequency or double frequency by setting D1225. Factory setting
is double frequency.
6. EH series external input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input
contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1265.
7. EH series internal input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input
contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1273.

2 DVP-PLC Function
2-phase AB input high-speed counter:
Example:
LD X10 X10
RST C251 RST C251
LD X11 X11
LD C251 C251
OUT Y0 Y0
1. When X11=On, RST command is executed and reset C251 to 0, output contact is reset to off.
2. C251 receives A phase counting signal of X0 input terminal and B phase counting signal of X1 input
terminal to execute add 1 (count up) or subtract 1 (count down) when X12=on. EH series can set different
frequency for counting mode.
3. When counter C251 attains settings K5, C251 contact will be ON. After C251 is On, if there is counter
pulse input, C251 will keep on counting.
4. For ES/EP/SA series, it can be set to normal frequency, double frequency or four times frequency by
D1022 (counting mode setting). Factory setting is double frequency.
5. EH series C251 has external input reset signal X2 and start signal X3.
6. The counting mode (normal frequency, double frequency, third times frequency, four times frequency) of
EH series C251 (HHSC0) can be set by D1225. Factory setting is double frequency.
7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input
contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input
contact of start signal is disabled by M1273.
ES/EX/SS, EP/SA series:
X10
X11
A-phase X0
B-phase X1
6
C251 present value 5 5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
1 Counting up Counting down 1
0 0
Y0, C251 contact

2 DVP-PLC Function
EH series:(double frequency)
X10
X11
A-phase
X0
B-phase
X1
C251 6
5 5
present 4 4
value 3 3
2 2 2
1 counting up counting down 1
0 0
Y0. C251 contact
2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F]
2.8.1 Data register [D]
It is used to store numerical data and data length is 16-bit (-32,768~+32,767). The left-most bit is sign bit. Two
16-bit registers also can be combined to a 32-bit register (The number for each 32-bit register will be (D0, D1), (D2,
D3) …..and the number for upper bit will be greater than low bit.) The left-most bit sign bit and the store range is
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647.
ES, EX, SS model:
For general D0~D407, 408 points

For latched * D408~D599, 192 points. (It is fixed to be latched area) Total is
Data register D 744
Special D1000~D1143, 144 points. (Some are latched area) points
Index register E, F E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points
EP/SA model:
For general D0~D199, 200 points. (It is fixed to be unlatched area)

D200~D999, D2000~D4999, 3800 points. (It can be used to
For latched Total is
Data register D be unlatched area by setting parameter.) 5000
points
Special D1000~D1999, 1000 points. (Some are latched area)
Index register E, F E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points
File register K0~K1599, MPU 1600 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)

2 DVP-PLC Function
EH model:
D0~D199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting

For general
parameter
D200~D999, D2000~D9999, 8800points. It can be Total is
Data register D For latched 10000
non-latched area by setting parameter points
For special D1000~D1999, 1000 pints. Some are latched.
Index register E, F E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points.
File register K0~K9999, MPU is 1000 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
There are five types of register which sorts by characters in the following:
1. General register : The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or
power is off. If M1033=On when PLC switches from Run to STOP, data won’t be
cleared but the data will be cleared to 0 when power is off.
2. Latched register : The data is the latched register won’t be cleared when PLC is power off. If you want
to clear the data in this register, you should use RST or ZRST command.
3. Special register : Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system
status, error messages, monitor state. Please refer to chapter 2.11 for detail.
4. Index register [E], [F] : Index registers are 16-bit registers. There are 2 points, E and F, for ES/EX/SS
models. There are 8 points, E0~E3 and F0~F3, for EP models. There are 16 points,
E0~E7 and F0~F7, for EH models. If you want to use index register to be 32-bit
register, you should indicate E and at this moment F can’t be used.
5. File register : There are 1600 file registers (K0~K1599) for EP/SA MPU and 10000 file registers
(K0~K9,999) for EH MPU. There is no real device number for file register, you should
execute read/write of file register by command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW,
peripheral device HPP or WPLSoft.
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F]
Index registers E, F are 16-bit data register, just the same as general
16-bit 16-bit data register. It can be wrote/read.
E0 F0 It can be used as 32-bit register. But at this time, this register should
be indicated to E and F can’t be used. Otherwise, the data will be
32-bit
error. (It is recommend to use command DMOVP K0 E and clear E
E0 F0 and F to 0 when power on.
upper 16-bit lower 16-bit The combination of E and F when using as 32-bit register are:
(E0, F0) , (E1, F1) (E2, F2) ….(E7, F7)

2 DVP-PLC Function
X0 When X0=On and E0=8, F0=14, D5E0=D(5+8)=D13, D10F0

MOV K8 E0
=D(10+14) = D24, the content in D13 will be moved to D24.
MOV K14 F0
MOV D5E0 D10F0
The function of Index register is the same as general operand. It can be used to move or compare and used to
be index for byte device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit device (X, Y, M, S). For ES/EP/SA series, it can’t be
used for constant (K, H). But for EH series, it can be used for constant (K, H).
ES/EX/SS models: E0, F0 2 points
EP model: E0~E3, F0~F3, total is 8 points
EH model: E0~E7, F0~F7, total is 16 points
※ some commands don’t support index function, please refer to chapter 5.4 for using index register E and F.
※ When using command mode of WPLSoft to use constant (K,H) to be index register, it needs to use symbol “@”:
Example: ”MOV K10@E0 D0F0”
2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics
EP/SA/EH series will check following when PLC is power on or change from STOP→RUN.
1. M1101 (if it starts file register function)
2. D1101 (the start number of file register of EP/SA series (K0~K1599), for EH series is K0~K9999)
3. D1102 (item number for reading, EP/SA series is K0~K1600 and EH series is K0~K10000)
4. D1103 (the address to save the reading data, the start address of designated file register D
(K2000~K9999). It is used to decide if transferring file to designated register automatically.
Note:
The action which read from file register to data register D won’t be executed when D1101 for EP/SA model
is greater than 1600, D1101 for EH model is greater than 8,000 or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or
greater than 9,999.
When starting executing the action to read data from file register to data register, PLC will stop reading
once the address of file register or data register D exceeds usage range.
There are 1600 file registers for EP/SA models and 10000 file registers for EH models. There is no actual
number for file register, therefore it should use command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW or peripheral
HPP02 and WPLSoft to execute the read/write of file register. If the address of file register for reading
exceeds useful range, the data for reading will be 0.
2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I]

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES, EX, SS models:
Control point of master

N For master control nested N0~N7, 8 points
control nested
Location pointer of CJ,
CALL
I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10~99ms, time
Pointer Insert timer interrupt
base=1ms) (for Version 5.7)
Location pointer of
I Interrupt Insert external I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
interrupt interrupt subroutine
Insert communication
I150
interrupt
EP/SA models:
The control point of

master control nested
The location point of
CJ, CALL
Insert external I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6
interrupt points
I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□＝10~99ms, time
Pointer Insert time interrupt
base=1ms)
For Insert high-speed The location point of
I
interrupt counter attained I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points interrupt subroutine.
interrupt
Insert
communication I150
interrupt
EH models:
Master control nested

control point
CJ, CALL
I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3),
Insert external I40□(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points
interrupt (□=1, rising-edge trigger , □=0,
falling-edge trigger )
I6 □ □ , I7 □ □ , I8 □ □ , 2 points ( □ □ ＝
Pointer 1~99ms, time base=1ms)
Insert time interrupt
I8 □ □ , 1 points ( □ □ ＝ 0.1~9.9ms, time
I Interrupt base=0.1ms)
Insert high-speed interrupt subroutine
counter attained I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
interrupt
Insert pulse
I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
interrupt
Insert
communication I150
interrupt
Nest Level Pointer N: used with command MC and MCR. MC is master start command. When MC command is
executed, the commands between MC and MCR will be executed normally. MC-MCR master
command supports nested program structure and the maximum is 8 levels, which is
numbered from N0 to N7. Refer to chapter3.7 for detail information.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Pointer P: use with application commands API 00 CJ, API 01 CALL, API 02 SRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 commands CJ,
CALL, SRET usage method for more information.
CJ condition jump:
P**
X0 When X0=On, program will jump from 0 to N
0 CJ P1
(designated label P1) and keep on executing
X1 without executing the address between 0 and

Y1 N.
X2 When X0=Off, program will execute from 0 and
P1 N Y2
keep on executing the followings. CJ command
won’t be executed at this time.
CALL subroutine, SRET subroutine END:
P**
X0 When X0 is On, it will jump
20 CALL P2 Call subroutine P** to P2 to execute the
X1 designated subroutine as
24 Y1
executing CALL
FEND command. When

executing SRET
P2 Y0 command, return to
(subroutine
P2) subroutine address 24 to go on
Y0 executing.
SRET subroutine return
Interrupt pointer I:
It is used with application command API 04 EI, API 05DI, API 03 IRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 for more information.
There are five functions below. Interrupt insert should be used with EI, interrupt insert enable, interrupt insert disable
and IRET interrupt insert return, etc.
1. External interrupt insert : When input signal of input terminal X0~X5 is triggered on rising-edge or
falling-edge, it will interrupt present program and jump to the designated
interrupt insert subroutine pointer I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3),
I40□(X4), I50□(X5) to execute and return to previous address to execute
when executing IRET command. That is due to special hardware circuit
design of PLC MPU and is not affected by scan period.
2. Timer interrupt insert : It is special hardware circuit design in PLC MPU. It will stop present program
and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute
automatically every a period time (can be set to 10ms~99ms).
3. Counter attained interrupt insert : The comparison command API 53 DHSCS of high-speed counter can
designate to interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt
insert subroutine to execute interrupt pointer I010, I020, I030, I040, I050,
I060 when comparison attained.

2 DVP-PLC Function
4. Pulse interrupt insert : Using pulse output command API 57 PLSY to send interrupt vector
I130(corresponds to M1342) and I140(corresponds to M1343) at the same
time when pulse output the first pulse. But it should start flag M1342 and
M1343 first. And it also can set to send interrupt vector I110 (corresponds to
M1340) and I120(corresponds to M1341) once pulse finishes to output the
last pulse.
5. Communication interrupt insert : When using communication command RS, it can be set to have interrupt
request when receiving specific charcters. Interrupt number is I150 and
specific characters is set to low byte of D1168.
When PLC connects to communication device and received data length is
not the same, setting end character to D1168 and interrupt subroutine to
I150. When PLC receives this end character, it will execute interrupt
subroutine I150.
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register
The kinds and functions of special auxiliary relay (Special M) and special registers (special D) are as shown in
the following. Please notice that some equipments with the same number will be different to the different model. In the
following chart, the meaning of column “Attribute” are: “R” means can only read. “R/W” means can read/write.
“-“ means can do nothing. “#” means system setting, user can read the detail explanation of the setting in the manual.
“*” means can refer following for explanation.
ES Off STOP RUN
Special EP Factory
Function EX EH Attribute Latched setting
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
Normally open contact (a contact). This contact
M1000* is ON when running and it is ON when the ○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off
status is set to RUN.
Normally OFF contact (b contact). This contact
M1001* is OFF in running and it is OFF when the status ○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On
is set to RUN.
ON only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is
M1002* contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUN ○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off
moment. Pulse width=scan period.
OFF only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is
M1003* contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUN ○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On
moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1004* On when error occurs ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1008* Monitor timer flag (ON: PLC WDT time out) ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1009 System used - - - - - - - - -
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: PLSY Y0 mode
M1010 selection. It is continuous output when it is ON. ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
EH：PULSE will be output at the END.
M1011* 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1012* 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1013* 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1014* 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1015* High-speed connection counter ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
When it is Off, it will display two right-most bits.
M1016* When it is On, it will display (two right-most bits ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
+ 2000).
M1017* ±30 seconds adjustment ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1018 Flag for Radian/Degree, On for degree ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1019* Cancle X0~X17 input delay ○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1020 Zero flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1021 Barrow flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1022 Carry flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
PLSY Y1 mode selection, it is continuous
M1023 ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
output when it is ON.
M1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - -
If PLC receive illegal communication request
M1025 when HPP, PC or HMI connects to PLC, M1025 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
will be set and save the error code in D1025.
M1026 EP/EH: Startup flag of RAMP module ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1027 PR output flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
10ms time switch flag. The base setting flag of
M1028 T64~T126 is 100ms, when timer is OFF and ○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
the base setting flag is 10ms when it is ON.
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y0 of
PLSY and PLSR command execution
completed or other relative command execution
M1029* completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
EH: The first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) output
complete executing or other relative command
execution completed
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y1 of
PLSY and PLSR command execution
M1030* completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
EH: The second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3)
output complete executing
M1031* Clear all non-latched memory ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1032* Clear all latched memory ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1033* Memory latched at STOP ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1034* All Y outputs disable ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Start X input point to be RUN/STOP switch and
M1035* correspond to D1035 (for EP/SA models, only ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES Off
X7 can be used)
M1039* Constant scan mode ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1040 Step transition inhibit ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1041 Step transition start ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1042 Start pulse ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1043 Zero point return completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1044 Zero point condition ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1045 All outputs clear inhibit ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1046 STL state setting (On) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1047 STL monitor enable ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1048 Flag for alarm point state ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1049 Monitor flag for alarm point ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1050 I001 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1054 I401 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1055 I501 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1056 I6□□ masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1057 I7□□ masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1059 I010~I060 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1060 System error message 1 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1064 Operator error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1065 Syntax error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1066 Program error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1067* Program execution error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1068* Execution error latched (D1068) ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: time pulse unit switch of
PWM command Y1. When it is ON, the time
pulse unit is 100us and when it is OFF, the time
M1070 pulse unit is 1ms. ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
EH: Unit setting for PWM command of the 1st
pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1). On is 100us and Off is
1ms.
Unit setting for PWM command of the 2nd pulse
M1071 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
CH1 (Y2, Y3). On is 100us and Off is 1ms.
M1072 Execute PLC RUN command ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1073 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1074 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1075* FLASH write error ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1076* Perpetual calendar error ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1077 Battery voltage is too low or malfunction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
PLSY command Y0 pulse output stop
M1078 ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
immediately flag
PLSY command Y1 pulse output stop
M1079 ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
immediately flag
M1080 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1081 FLT command change direction flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
Enable/Disable execute interrupt program in
M1083 ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
FROM/TO mode
Matrix compared flag. If the result is the same,
M1088 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1088 = 1. If the result is different, M1088 = 0.
Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first
M1089 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
bit and M1090=1.
Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first
bit and M1090=1.
Matrix finding bit flag. When find it, it will stop
comparing and M1091=1.
Matrix pointer error flag. When pointer Pr Off
M1092 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - R NO Off
exceeds this range, M1092=1.
Matrix pointer increase flag. It will add 1 to Off
M1093 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - R/W NO Off
present pointer.
Matrix pointer clear flag. It will clear present Off
M1094 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - R/W NO Off
pointer to 0.
M1095 Carry flag for matrix rotate/shift output ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1096 Complement flag for matric shift input ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1097 Direction flag for matrix rotate/shift ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1098 Matrix count bit 0 or 1 flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1099 It is On when matrix count result 0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1100 A sampling flag of SPD command ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1101* To decide whether start file register or not ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes Off
M1104* Digital switch function card SW1 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1112* TR1 transistor output ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1113* TR2 transistor output ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1115* Start switch for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1116* Acceleration flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1117* Target attained frequency flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1118* Deceleration flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1119* Completed function flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1120 Communication protocol holding ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1121 Transmission ready ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1122 Sending request ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1123 Receiving completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1124 Receiving wait ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1125 Communication reset ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1126 STX/ETX user/system selection ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
MODRD/RDST/MODRW commands. Data
M1127 ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
receivingcompleted.
M1128 Transmitting/Receiving Indication ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1129 Receiving time out ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1130 STX/ETX selection ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
MODRD/RDST/MODRW, M1131=On when
M1131 ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
data convert to HEX
Special high speed pulse (50KHz) output swich
M1133* ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
(On is start)
M1134* On is continuous output switch ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1135* Output pulse numbers attained flag ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1140 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW data received error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1141 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW command error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1142 VFD-A command data received error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
ASCII/RTU mode selections (use with MODRD
M1143 / MODWR / MODRW) (it is Off when in ASCII ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
mode and it is On when in RTU)
Ouput start switch of accel/decel pulse output
function of adjustable slope
Acceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output
M1145* ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off
Target attained frequency flag of accel/decel
pulse output function of adjustable slope
Deceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output
Complete function flag of accel/decel pulse
output function of adjustable slope
Stop counting temporality flag of accel/decel
M1149* ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
pulse output function of adjustable slope

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
Declare DHSZ command used for multi-group
M1150 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
settings comparison mode
Finish executing multi-group settings
M1151 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
comparison mode
Declare DHSZ command used to be frequency
M1152 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
control mode
M1153 Finish executing frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
Start designated deceleration function flag of
M1154* accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
slope
M1161 8/16 bits mode (it is On when in 8 bits mode) ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1167 HKY input is 16 bits mode ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1168 SMOV working mode indication ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1170* Start executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1171* Execute single step ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1172* 2-phase pulse output switch (on is start) ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1173* On is continuous output switch ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1174* Output pulse number attained flag ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1178* VR0 volume starts ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1179* VR1 volume starts ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1196 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1197 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1198 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1199 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1200 C200 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1235 C235 counting mode (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1239 C239 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1240 C240 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1241 C241 counter mode setting (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1243 C243 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1246 C246 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1248 C247 counter monitor (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1253 C254 counter monitor (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1256 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1258 Swap Y0 and Y1 pulse output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1259 Swap Y2 and Y3 pulse output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
Let X5 be the reset input signal of all
M1260 ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
high-speed counter
DHSCR command High-speed comparison
flag
M1264 HHSC0 Start function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1265 HHSC0 Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1272 HHSC0 Start control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1273 HHSC0 Reset control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1280 I00□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1286 I6□□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1289 I010 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1303 Switch flag of high and low bit ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1304* X input point can decide to be On-Off ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1305 Factory setting ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1312 C235 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1320 C235 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1328 C235 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1334 Stop CH0 (Y0,Y1) pulse output ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1335 Stop CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse output ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1336 CH0 (Y0,Y1) pulse send flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1337 CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse send flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1338 Start CH0 (Y0,Y1) Offset pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1339 Start CH1(Y2,Y3) Offset pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
To have interrupt after completing to send CH0
(Y0,Y1) pulse
To have interrupt after completing to send CH1
(Y2,Y3) pulse
To have interrupt at the same time that sending
CH0 (Y0,Y1) pulse
To have interrupt at the same time that sending
CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse
M1344 Start CH0 (Y0,Y1) compensation pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1345 Start CH1 compensation pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1350* PLC LINK start flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1351* Start PLC LINK automatically or by manual ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1360* PLC LINK ID 1 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1376* PLC LINK ID 1 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1392* PLC LINK ID 1 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
M SA
SS On RUN STOP
M1408* PLC LINK ID 1 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1424* PLC LINK ID 1 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off


2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
Function EX EH Attribute Latched
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1000* Watchdog timer (WDT) value (Unit: 1ms) ○ ○ ○ 200 - - R/W NO 200
DVP model number+memory capacity / type (user
can read PLC program version from this register.
For example, D1001 = H XX27 means version
D1001 ○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
2.7. When reading from HPP it will display
Knnnnn and you can convert it to hexadecimal
number by pressing <H> key.
D1002* Program capacity ○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
Sum of program memory (sum of the PLC internal
D1003 program memory. User can identify the content of ○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
PLC control program by this register)
D1004* Grammar detective number ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1005 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1008* STEP address when WDT timer is ON ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1010* Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
0~32,767(unit: 0.1ms) addition type of high-speed
D1015* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
connection timer
D1018* πPI (Low byte) ╳ ○ ○ H’0FDB H’0FDB H’0FDB R/W NO H’0FDB
D1019* πPI(High byte) ╳ ○ ○ H’4049` H’4049` H’4049` R/W NO H’4049`

ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X0~X7 input filter (unit: ms)
D1020* ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
EH: X0~X17 input filter (unit: ms)
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X10~X17 input delay
D1021* setting (unit: ms) ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
EH: X20~X377 input filter (unit: ms)
Double frequency selection for AB phase counter
D1022 ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
of ES/EX/SS and EP/SA models
D1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - -

D1025* Communication error code ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1028 Index register E0 ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1029 Index register F0 ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1030 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (Low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1031 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (High word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1032 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (Low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1033 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (High word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1035* Set the number of X input point of RUN/STOP ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1037 HKY command scan time setting, unit: 1ms ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 500
When PLC MPU is master, the setting of data
D1038* ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
response delay time. Time unit is 0.1ms.
D1039* Constant scan time (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1040 On state number 1 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1049 On number of alarm point ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1050
PLC will automatically convert the ASCII data
↓ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
saved in D1070~D1085 to HEX.
D1055
Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0
D1056* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
(CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)
D1057* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
(CH1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1(CH1)
D1058* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
(CH2)
D1059* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
(CH3)
D1067* Algorithm error code ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1068* Lock the algorithm error address ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Step number of errors associated with flags
D1069 ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
M1065~M1067
When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication
D1070 command receives feedback signals from
↓ receiver. The signals will be saved in the registers ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1085 D1070~D1085. User can use the contents saved
in the registers to check the feedback data.
When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication
D1089 command is executed, the transmitting signals will
↓ be stored in the registers D1089~D1099. User ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1099 can use the contents saved in registers to check
the feedback data.
D1101* Start address of file register ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W Yes 0
D1102* Copy numbers of file register ╳ ○ ○ 1600 - - R/W Yes 1600
Set start D number for file register to store (the
D1103* ╳ ○ ○ 2000 - - R/W Yes 2000
number should be large than 2000)
Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output Y0
D1104* ○ ○ ╳ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
(corresponds to device D)
Average of EX series analog input channel 0 (CH
D1110* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0)
D1111* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 1 (CH1)
D1112* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
2)
D1113* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
3)
EX series analog output channel 0 (CH 0) and
D1116* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0)

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
EX series analog output channel 1 (CH 1) and
D1117* ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0)
For EX model only. It is the filter wave time setting
between the A/D conversions, and with the default
D1118* ○ ╳ ╳ 5 - - R/W NO 5
setting as 0 and the unit as 1ms, all will be
regarded as 5ms if D1118<=5.
D1119 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1120 RS-485 communication protocol ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
PLC communication address (the address that
D1121 ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes 1
save PLC communication address, it is latched)
D1122 Residual words of transmitting data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1123 Residual words of receiving data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1124 Start character definition (STX) ○ ○ ○ H’3A - - R/W NO H’3A
D1125 First ending character definition (EXT1) ○ ○ ○ H’0D - - R/W NO H’0D
D1126 Second ending character definition (EXT2) ○ ○ ○ H’0A - - R/W NO H’0A
D1129 RS-485 time-out setting (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1130 MODBUS return error code record ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1133* Special high-speed pulse output register (D) index ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1137* Address of operator error occurs ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
Connection number of BCD module extension unit
D1139* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(the maximum is two units)
Special extension module number, maximum is 8
D1140* ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
units
D1141 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1142 Input points (X) of extension unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1143 Output points (Y) of extension unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output of
D1144* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
adjustable slope (corresponds to component D)
D1145* Connection number of KEY module extension unit ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Connection number of DISP module extension
D1146* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
unit
D1148 System used - - - - - - - - -
Memory card type:
0: no card, 1: RS-232, TS-01, RS-422, 4: analog
D1149 volume switch, 5: digital switch, 6: transitor output ╳ ○ ○ - - - R NO 0
card, 7: high-speed pulse output card, 8: 2AD
card, 9: 2DA card
Table count register in multi-group setting
D1150 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
comparison mode
D1151 Table count register in frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1152 The change value of high word of DHSZ D ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1153 The change value of low word of DHSZ D ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
Recommended Interval of accelerated time
D1154* (10~32767 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of ╳ ○ ╳ 200 - - R/W NO 200
adjustable slope
Recommended Interval of decelerated time (-1~
D1155* -32700 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of ╳ ○ ╳ -1000 - - R/W NO -1000
adjustable slope

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1156
Special D that indicated by RTMU command
↓ ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(K0~K9)
D1165
D1170* PC value when executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1172* 2-phase pulse output frequency (12Hz~20KHz) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1173* 2-phase pulse output mode selection (K1and K2) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (low
D1174* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
16-bit)
Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (high
D1175* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
16-bit)
Present output number of 2-phase pulse (low
D1176* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
16-bit)
Present output number of 2-phase pulse (high
D1177* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
16-bit)
D1178* VR0 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1179* VR1 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1182 Pointer register E1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1183 Pointer register F1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1188 Pointer register E4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1189 Pointer register F4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1196 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1197 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1198 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1199 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1200* Start address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1201* End address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 999
Start address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay
D1202* ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 2000
latched
End address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay
D1203* ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 4095
latched
D1204* Start latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1205* End latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1206* Start latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1207* End latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1208* Start latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1209* End latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 199
Start latched address of 32-bit counter
D1210* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
C200~C234
End latched address of 32-bit counter
D1211* ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 234
C200~C234
Start latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter
D1212* ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 235
C235~C255
End latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter
D1213* ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 255
C235~C255
D1214* Start latched address of step point (S0~S1023) ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1215* End latched address of step point (S0~S1023) ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1216* Start latched address of register D0~D999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 200
D1217* End latched address of register D0~D999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 999
D1218* Start latched address of register D2000~D9999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 2000
D1219* End latched address of register D2000~D9999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
The first group of pulse output phase 00: 1-phase
D1220 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(Y0 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase
The second group of pulse output phase 00:1-
D1221 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
phase (Y2 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase
The first group of the count setting of counter
D1225 (HHSC0). It is the count mode of C241, C246, ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
C251.
The second group of the count setting of counter
D1226 (HHSC1).. It is the count mode of C242, C247, ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
C252.
The third group of the count setting of counter
C253.
The forth group of the count setting of counter
C254.
MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. The
D1256
characters that sent during executing is saved in
↓ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1256~D1295. User can check according to the
D1295 content of these registers.
D1296 MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. PLC
system will convert ASCII in the content of the
↓ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
register that user indicates to HEX and save it in
D1311
D1296 – D1311.
D1313* Perpetual calendar (RTC) second 00~59 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1314* Perpetual calendar (RTC) minute 00~59 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1315* Perpetual calendar (RTC) hour 00~23 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1316* Perpetual calendar (RTC) day 01~31 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 1
D1317* Perpetual calendar (RTC) month 01~12 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 1
D1318* Perpetual calendar (RTC) week 1~7 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 6
D1319* Perpetual calendar (RTC) year 00–99 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1320* The first special extension module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1321* The 2nd special extension module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1322* The 3rd special extension module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1323* The 4th special extension module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1328 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1329 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1330 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1331 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1332 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1333 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1334 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1335 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1336 Present value of CH0 pulse (Low word) Y0, Y1 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1337 Present value of CH0 pulse (High word) Y0, Y1 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1338 Present value of CH1 pulse (Low word) Y2, Y3 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1339 Present value of CH1 pulse (High word) Y2, Y3 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1340 The 1st step acceleration frequency ╳ ╳ ○ 200 - - R/W Yes 200
Maximum output frequency (Low word) (it is fixed

D1341 ╳ ╳ ○ H’04D0 - - R Yes H’04D0
to 200KHz)
Maximum output frequency (High word) (it is fixed
D1342 ╳ ╳ ○ 3 - - R Yes 3
to 200KHz)
D1343 Acceleration /Deceleration time ╳ ╳ ○ 100 - - R/W Yes 100
CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (Low

D1344 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
word)
CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (High

D1345 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
word)
CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (Low
D1346 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
word)
CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (High
D1347 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
word)
Communication address that read by PLC LINK
D1355* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 1
D1356* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 2
D1357* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 3
D1358* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 4
D1359* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 5
D1360* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 6

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1361* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 7
D1362* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 8
D1363* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 9
D1364* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 10
D1365* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 11
D1366* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 12
D1367* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 13
D1368* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 14
D1369* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 15
D1370* ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
ID 16
D1375* The first KEY module X coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1376* The first KEY module Y coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1377* The first KEY module button number ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1378* The second KEY module X coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1379* The second KEY module Y coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1380* The second KEY module button number ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1381* The first BCD module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1382* The first BCD module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1383* The second BCD module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1384* The second BCD module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1385* The first DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1386* The first DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1387* The decimal setting of first DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
D1388* The second DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1389* The second DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1390* The decimal setting of second DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
D1391* The third DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1392* The third DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1393* The decimal setting of third DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK
D1415* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 1
D1416* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 2
D1417* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 3
D1418* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 4

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1419* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 5
D1420* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 6
D1421* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 7
D1422* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 8
D1423* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 9
D1424* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 10
D1425* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 11
D1426* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 12
D1427* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 13
D1428* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 14
D1429* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 15
D1430* ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
ID 16
D1431* PLC LINK times ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1432* PLC LINK counts ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1433* PLC LINK units ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1434* Read items of PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1450* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1480* ID 1 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for
↓ ID 1 reads is in D1355. The range is D100-D115 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1495* of ID 1 PLC.
D1496* ID 1 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for
↓ ID 1 writes is in D1415. The range is D200-D215 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1511* of ID 1 PLC.
D1527* of ID 2 PLC.
D1543* of ID 2 PLC.
D1559* of ID 3 PLC.
D1575* of ID 3 PLC.
D1591* of ID 4 PLC.
D1607* of ID 4 PLC.
D1623* of ID 5 PLC.
D1639* of ID 5 PLC.
D1655* of ID 6 PLC.
D1671* of ID 6 PLC.

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1687* of ID 7 PLC.
D1703* of ID 7 PLC.
D1719* of ID 8 PLC.
D1735* of ID 8 PLC.
D1751* of ID 9 PLC.
D1767* of ID 9 PLC.
D1768* ID 10 LINK PLC reads. Communication address
↓ for ID 10 reads is in D1364. The range is ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1783* D100-D115 of ID 10 PLC.
D1784* ID 10 LINK PLC writes. Communication address
↓ for ID 10 writes is in D1424. The range is ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1799* D200-D215 of ID 10 PLC.
D1815* D100-D115 of ID 11 PLC.
D1831* D200-D215 of ID 11 PLC.
D1847* D100-D115 of ID 12 PLC.
D1863* D200-D215 of ID 12 PLC.
D1879* D100-D115 of ID 13 PLC.
D1895* D200-D215 of ID 13 PLC.
D1911* D100-D115 of ID 14 PLC.
D1927* D200-D215 of ID 14 PLC.
D1943* D100-D115 of ID 15 PLC.
D1959* D200-D215 of ID 15 PLC.

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES Off STOP RUN

Special EP Factory
setting
D SA
SS On RUN STOP
D1975* D100-D115 of ID 16 PLC.
D1991* D200-D215 of ID 16 PLC.
2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions
PLC 1. M1000: M1000 is On contact during runing, i.e. a normal open contact a. Using M1000 to
Operation
Flag drive indicated lamp during running, you can know that PLC is in RUN state. M1000
is always on when PLC is RUN.
M1000~M1003
M1000
Y0 PLC is running
M1000 is On contact
during operation always ON
2. M1001: M1001 is Off contact during running, i.e. a normal close contact b. M1001 is always
Off when PLC is RUN.
3. M1002: M1002 will be ON at the first scan when PLC starts RUN and then is Off. M1002 can
be regarded as scan initial pulse and pulse width is a scan time. It can be used to
initial, i.e. start positive pulse (it is ON once it is RUN).
4. M1003: It is Off at the first scan when PLC is RUN and then is ON later, i.e. start negative
pulse (it is Off once it is RUN).
PLC RUN
M1000
M1001
M1002
M1003
scan time

2 DVP-PLC Function
Monitor 1. Monitor timer is used to moitor PLC scan time. When scan time exceeds the setting time of
Timer moitor timer, RED ERROR LED will be light and all outputs will be Off.
2. The initial value of monitor timer is 200ms. You can use command MOV to change the
D1000 setting of monitor timer in the program when program is long or calculation is complicated.
Following example is set moinitor timer to 300ms.
M1002
0 MOV K300 D1000
Primary pulse
3. The maximum setting for monitor timer is 32,767ms. But please notice that if monitor timer
settings is too large, the detected time of calculation abnormal will be delay. Therefore, if it is
not the complicated calculateion makes scan time exceeds 200ms, it is better to set monitor
timer around 200ms.
4. Please monitor D1010~D1012 to check if scan time exceeds D1000 setting when
calculation is complicated or PLC MPU connects too many special module to cause scan
time too long. In this situation, besides modify D1000 setting, you can also use WDT
command (API 07) in PLC program. When CPU excutes WDT command, internal monitor
timer will be clear to 0 to make scan time not exceed monitor timer setting.
Program It is different program capacity for different series:

Capacity 1. ES, EX, SS series: 3792 Steps
2. EP, SA series: 7920 Steps
D1002
3. EH series: 15872 Steps
Grammar 1. If there is grammar error, PLC ERROR LED will blinking and special relay M1004=On.
Check 2. Time to check PLC grammar: When power is from Off→On. Other time:
M1004 Writing program into PLC by WPLSoft or HPP

D1004, D1137 Using On-line Programming function by EH series and WPLSoft
3. It will happen with illegal operand (device) or grammar error. You can get the fault by
checking special register D1004 with fault code information. Fault address is saved in data
register D1137 (if it is general circuit error, D1137 will be invalid).
4. Refer to chapter 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC device number for each device usage range.
5. Refer to chapter 2.12 Troubleshooting and Fault Information for checking grammar.
Scan Time-out 1. When scan time-out during executing, PLC ERROR LED will light and M1008=On.
Timer
2. Using WPLSoft or HPP to monitor D1008 which saves timeout STEP address as WDT timer
M1008, D1008 is ON.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Scan Time The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are saved in
Monitor D1010~D1012.
1. D1010: the present scan time.
D1010~D1012
2. D1011: the minimum scan time.
3. D1012: the maximum scan time.
Internal Clock 1. There are four following clock pulses in PLC. Once PLC is power on, these four clock pulse
Pulse will act automatically.
10 ms
M1011~M1014
M1011 (10 ms) 100 Hz
100 ms
M1012 (100 ms) 10 Hz

1 sec
M1013 (1 sec) 1 Hz
1 min
M1014 (60 sec)
2. When PLC is STOP, clock pulse will also act. The start timing of clock pulse and RUN are
not synchronized.
High-speed 1. The steps for using special M and special D directly:

Timer
Only valid when PLC is RUN.
M1015, D1015 When M1015=On, it will start high-speed timer D1015 once PLC finish executing END
command of that scan period. The minimum unit of D1015 is 100us.
The range of D1015 is 0~32,767. When it counts to 32,767, it will start from 0.
When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.
2. There is high-speed timer command HST for EH series, refer command API 196 HST for
detail.
3. Example:
When X10 is On, set M1015=On to start high-speed timer and record in D1015.
When X10=Off, set M1015=Off to close high-speed timer.
X10
M1015

2 DVP-PLC Function
Perpetual 1. The relative command special M and special D.

Calendar
Clock
Device name Fuunction
M1016, M1017
Year display of Off: show the 2 right most bits
M1076 M1016
perpetual calendar On: show the (2 right most bits + 2000)
D1313~D1319
When Off→On, it is triggered to adjust
When it is during 0~29 seconds, minute won’t change
±30 seconds
M1017 and second will be reset to 0.
adjustment
When it is during 30~59 seconds, it will add 1 to
minute and reset second to 0.
Perpetual calendar It will be ON when setting exceeds range or battery
M1076
malfunction has run down.
D1313 Second 0~59
D1314 Minute 0~59
D1315 Hour 0~23
D1316 Day 1~31
D1317 Month 1~12
D1318 Week 1~7
D1319 Year 0~99(2 right-most bit)
2. If perpetual calendar setting is error, time will reset to Jan. 1, 2000. 00:00 Saturday when
PLC is power on again.
3. Adjust method of perpetual clock:
It can use specific command TWR to adjust for EP/EH mode built-in perpetual
calendar. Refer to API 167 TWR for detail.
Using peripherial WPLSoft and digital setting display DU-01 to set.
π(PI)
1. It uses 32-bit data register which is combined with D1019 and D1018 to save floating point
D1018, D1019
value π(PI),
2. Floating point value = H 40490FDB

2 DVP-PLC Function
Response time 1. Digital filter circuit is built-in input terminals X0~X17 can set response time of receive pulse
adjustment of
input terminal from input terminal by the content of D1020 and D1021. Unit is ms.
2. When PLC is from Off → On, the content of D1020 and D1021 will become to 10
M1019
automatically.
D1020, D1021
Terminal response time
0
X0 0ms
1
1ms
setting by D1020
(default is 10)
10 input reflash
X17 10ms
15
15ms state
memory
3. When setting X0~X17 response time to 0ms to execute following program, the faster
response time in input terminla will be 50µs due to input terminal connects to RC filter circuit
in series.
M1000
MOV K0 D1020
normally ON contact
4. It is not necessary to adjust response time when using high-speed counter, interrupt insert
or fast pulse catch (M1056~M1059) in program.
5. It is the same to use command REFF (API 51) or change the content of D1020 and D1021.
Execution Execution Completed Flag:

Completed
Flag
1. API 52 MTR, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 77 PR:
M1029=On for a scan period once the command finish executing.
M1029, M1030
2. API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR:
For EP/SA/ES/EX/SS MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 pulse finishes output and
M1030 will be On after Y1 pulse completes output. When commands PLSY and PLSR
are Off, M1029 and M1030 will be Off.
For EH MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 and Y1 pulses complete output and M1030
will be On after Y2 and Y3 pulse complete output. When commands PLSY, PLSR are
Off, M1029 or M1030 will be Off.
It is needed to clear by user after executing M1029 and M1030.
3. API 63 INCD: M1029 will be On for a scan period when designated group finish comparison.

2 DVP-PLC Function
4. API 67 RAMP, API 69 SORT:
M1029= On after completing execution, M1029 is needed to clear by user.
If this command is Off, M1029 will be Off.
5. API 155 DABSR, API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 158 DRVA:
M1029=On when the first output group Y0 and Y1 pulses complete sending and
M1030=On when the second output group Y2 and Y3 pulses complete sending.
M1029 or M1030 will be Off when execute this command in the next time and it will be
On after completing execution.
Communication Error code when communication error:

Error Code
01: illegal command.
D1025
02: illegal equipment address.
03: request data exceeds range.
07: checksum error
Clear 1. M1031 (clear unlatched area) , M1032 (clear latched area)

Command
Device The component that will be cleared
M1031, M1032 M1031 The contact state of Y, general M, general S

T contact for general and time coil
Clear unlatched
C contact for general, time coil reset coil
area
D present register for general
T present register for general
C present register for general
M1032 The contact state of M and S for latched
Clear latched area Accumulative timer T contact and time coil

Latched C and hig-speed counter C contact, count coil
Present register D for latched
Present register of accumulative timer T
Latched C and present register of high-speed counter C
Output Latched When M1003 is On, the On/Off state of output will be held once PLC is from RUN to STOP. If
in STOP mode output contact load of PLC is heater, heater’s state will be held as PLC is from RUN to STOP
and RUN after program modification.
M1033

2 DVP-PLC Function
All Output Y When M1034 is drove to be On, all output Y will be Off.
are inhibited
M1034 all outputs inhibited
M1034
RUN/STOP 1. For EH series, when M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X0~X17 to be RUN/STOP
Switch switch by the content of D1035 (0~17).
M1035, D1035 2. For EP/SA series, When M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X7 to be RUN/STOP
switch.
Communication For ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series, data response delay time can be set when PLC MPU is to be
Response Delay Slave in RS-485 communication. Unit is 0.1ms.
D1038
Constant Scan 1. When M1039 is On, program scan time is determined by D1039. When program finishes
Time executing, it will execute the next scan as constant scan time attained. If D1039 is less than
program scan time, it will scan by program scan time.
M1039, D1039
M1000
M1039 Constant scan time
normally ON
contact MOV P K20 D1039
Scan time is fixed to 20ms
2. The relative commands of scan time are RAMP(API 67), HKY(API 71), SEGL(API 74),
ARWS(API 75) and PR(API 77). They should be used with “constant scan time” or “constant
time insert interrupt”.
3. Especial for command HKY(API 71), scan time should be set to 20ms and above when it is
used 4×4 matrix to be 16 keys to operate.
4. Scan time D1010~D1012 display also include constant scan time.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Analog 1. For EX MPU, analog input channel resolution 10 bits (±10V or ±20mA)
Function
2. For EX MPU, analog output channel resolution 8 bits (0~10V or 0~20mA)
D1056~D1059 3. It is analog digital converter filter time setting for EX series. The factory setting is 0 and unit
D1110~D1113 is 1ms. If D1118 ≦5, it will be regarded as 5ms.
D1116~D1118
4. Resolution of EP/EH analog input AD card: 12 bits (±10V or ±20mA)
5. Resolution of EP/EH analog input DA card: 12 bits (0~10Vor 0~20mA)
Device Function
Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0)

D1056
and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)
Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1)
D1057
D1058 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2)
D1059 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3)
Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH 0)
D1110
Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1)
D1111
D1112 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2)
D1113 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3)
EX MPU analog output channel 0 (CH 0), EP/EH MPU DA
D1116
card channel 0 (CH0)
EX MPU analog output channel 1 (CH 1), EP/EH MPU DA
D1117
card channel 1 (CH1)
D1118 EX series analog input filter setting (ms)
Algorithm 1. Algorithm error flag:

Error Flag
Component Explanation Latched STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
M1067~M1068
M1067 Algorithm error flag none clear latched
D1067~D1068
M1068 Algorithm error lock flag none unchanged latched
D1067 Algorithm error code none clear latched
D1068 STEP value of algorithm error none unchanged latched
2. Error code explanation:
D1067 error code Function
0E18 BCD conversion error

0E19 Divisor is 0
0E1A Usage exceeds limit (include E and F)
0E1B It is negative number after doing radical
0E1C FROM/TO communication error

2 DVP-PLC Function
File 1. For EP/EH series, When PLC is power on or from STOP to RUN, it will check start file
Register register function from M1101, the start number of file register from D1101 (file registers for
EP/SA series: K0~K1,599; for EH series: K0~K9,999), read item number of file register from
M1101
D1102(read items of file registers for EP/SA series: K0~K1,600; for EH series: K0~K8,000),
D1101~D1103
D1103(file registers for save and read, start number of designated data register D (for
EP/SA series: K2,000~K4,999, for EH series: K2,000~K9,999) to determine to send file
register to designated data register automatically or not).
2. Please refer to commands API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW explantion.
Digital Switch 1. When PLC is RUN with digital switch card, 8 DIP switches correspond to M1104~M1111
Function Card separately.
M1104~M1111 2. Please refer to command API 109 SWRD for detail.
Transistor When PLC is RUN with transistor output card, M1112 and M1113 correspond to 2 points
Output Card transistors output TR1 and TR2 separately.
M1112, M1113
Pulse Output
with 1. The definition of special D and special M which are used by pulse output with acceleration/
Acceleration/
Deceleration
deceleration:
M1115~M1119 Device Function

D1104 M1115 Start switch for accel/decel pulse output
M1116 Flag that is used in acceleration
M1117 Target frequency attained flag
M1118 Flag that is used in deceleration
M1119 Complete function flag
D1104 Using parameter index (correspond to D component)
2. Corresponding table for parameter (frequency range is 25Hz~10KHz)
index Function
+0 Start frequency (SF)

+1 Gap frequency (GF)
+2 Target frequency (TF)
+3 Total number of pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)
(TP)
+4 Total number of pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32-bit)
+5 Output pulse number in acceleration area (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)
(AP)
+6 Output pulse number in deceleration area (upper 16-bit of 32-bit)
3. It doesn’t need to use command, it just need to fill parameter chart and set M1115 to start.
This function can use Y0 output only, the timing is as following.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Acceleration/Deceleration step number

GF = (TF-SF)/GF
Output pulse number for each step GP=

Frequency AP/(Acceleration or Deceleration step number)
GP
TF
SF
Pulse number
AP AP
AP is pulse number of
acceleration/deceleration
4. Note:
This function should be executed under the following conditions all exist. Once a condition
doesn’t exist, this function can’t execute.
Start frequency must be less than target frequency.
Gap frequency must be less than (target frequency – start frequency)
Total number of pulse number must be greater than (accel/decel pulse number *2)
Start frequency and target frequency: the minimum is 25Hz and the maximum is
10KHz.
Accel/decel pulse number must be more than accel/decel step number
When M1115 is from On to Off, M1119 will be cleared and M1116, M1117 and M1118 aren
unchanged. When PLC is from STOP RUN or from RUN STOP, M1115~M1119 will be
cleared to Off. And D1104 will be cleared to 0 only when it is from Off On.
If the function “acceleration/deceleration pulse output” and command PLSY Y0 output

exist at the same time, it will execute one action which starts Y0 output first.
5. How to calculate action time of each section
If start frequency is set to 1KHz, gap frequency is set to 1KHz, target frequency is set to
5KHz, total pulse number is 100 and accel/decel pulse number is 40, timing chart of
accel/decel area is in the following.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Frequency (Hz)
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Time (sec)
t1 t2 t3 t4
You can get accel/decel step = (5K – 1K) / 1K = 4 and output number of each pulse is
40 / 4 = 10. Therefore, you can get t1 = (1 / 1K) * 10 = 10ms, t2 = (1 / 2K) * 10 = 5ms, t3
= (1 / 3K) * 10 = 3.33ms and t4 = (1 / 4K) * 10 = 2.5ms from the following figure.
Example: Forward/Reverse accel/decel step motor control

M1002
MOV K500 D1104 Using D500-D506 to be parameter address
MOV K1000 D500 1KHz start frequency
MOV K100 D501 100Hz gap frequency
MOV K10000 D502 10KHz target frequency
DMOV K80000 D503 80000 pulses output
DMOV K10000 D505 10000 pulses in acceleration/deceleration section
SET M1115
When PLC is RUN, it will save each parameter setting into the register that designated
by D1104.
When M1115=On, acceleration/deceleration pulse starts to output.
M1116=On during acceleration, M1117=On when speed attained, M1118=On in

deceleration and M1119=On after finishing executing.
M1115 won’t be reset automatically and it needs to be cleared by user.
Actual pulse output curve is in the following:

2 DVP-PLC Function
Frequency (Hz)
10K
1K Pulse
number
10000 90000 100000
Special 1. For EP series, the definition of special D and special M for special high-speed pulse (50KHz)
High-speed
pulse output output function:
D1133 M1133 Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start executing)
M1134 On is continuous output switch

M1135 Output pulse number attained flag
D1133 Index for special high-speed pulse output register (D)
2. Corresponding table for D1133 parameter
Index Function
+0 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)

+1 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)
+2 Special high-speed pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)
+3 Special high-speed pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)
Display present special high-speed pulse output number (lower
+4
16-bit of 32 bits)
Display present special high-speed pulse output number (upper
+5
16-bit of 32 bits)
3. Function explanation:
Output frequency and output numbers above can be modified when M1133=On and
M1135=Off. It won’t affect present output pulse once output frequency or output target number
is changed. Present output pulse number will be displayed once a scan time update. It will be
cleared to 0 when M1133 is from Off On and it will keep that last output number when M1133
is from On Off.

2 DVP-PLC Function
4. Note:
This special high-speed pulse output function can use special Y1 output point in RUN. It
can exist with PLSY Y1 at the same time and PLSY (Y0) won’t be affected. If command PLSY
(Y1) is executed prior to this function, this function can’t be used and vice versa. When
executing this function, general Y1 output will be invalid and outputs point of Y0 and Y2~Y7
can be used.
The difference between this function and command PLSY is higher than output frequency.
The maximum output can up to 50KHz.
Extension 1. D1139: connection number of BCD extension module, the maximum is 2 connections to use
Connected
Detection with KEY extension module.
2. D1140: special extension module (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC, RT, HC, PU) numbers, the maximum
D1139, D1140
is 8.
D1142, D1143
3. D1142: Digital extension input X point number.
D1145, D1146
4. D1143: Digital extension input Y point number.
5. D1145: connection number of KEY extension module, the maximum is 2connects to use with
BCD extension module.
6. D1146: connection number indication of DISP extension module, the maximum is 3
connections.
1. For EH series, special D and special M definition of BCD module:

BCD Module
Device Function
D1139
connection number indication of BCD extension module, the
D1381~D1384 D1139
maximum is 2 connections to use with KEY extension module
D1381 Low byte of first BCD module
D1382 High byte of first BCD module
D1383 Low byte of second BCD module
D1384 High byte of second BCD module
2. Explanation:
PLC will update BCD module to read out BCD module value by each scan.
Special D above will be updated automatically when PLC is RUN.
The maximum number for a MPU is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY modules, a KEY
module and a BCD extension unit or 2 BCD extension units.

2 DVP-PLC Function
3. BCD module external wiring terminal:
DIP Switch
W8
W4
W2
W1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
4. BCD module wiring example:
D7 D6 D5 D0
DIP switch group
W8
W4 it needs to connect a diode in
W2 series (1N4148 is recommended)
W1
1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M of KEY module:

KEY Module
Device Function
D1145
Connection number indication of KEY extension module, the
D1145
D1375~D1380 maximum is 2 connections to use with BCD extension module
D1375 X coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)
D1376 Y coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)
D1377 Button number of the first KEY module (1~64)
D1378 X coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)
D1379 Y coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)
D1380 Button number of the second KEY module (1~64)

2 DVP-PLC Function
2. Explanation:
KEY module uses scan method to read data to PLC, it will just care the first button once
there are two more keys are pressed at the same time.
The maximum number for a MPU to connect is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY

modules, a KEY module and a BCD extension unit or 2 BCD extension units.
KEY module will be updated in each scan when PLC is RUN.
Calculated method of button number is: H+(V-1)*8. For coordinate (5,1) button, its
number is 5.
3. KEY module external wiring terminal:
Matrix Keypad
V1
V2
H1H2
4. KEY module wiring example:
Button coordinate(x,y)
(D1375, D1376) Button number
(D1378, D1379) (1,1) D1377(D1380)
(1,1) (2,1) (3,1) (4,1) (5,1) (6,1) (7,1) (8,1)
1
V1
V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H1
(1,2) (2,2) (3,2) (4,2) (5,2) (6,2) (7,2) (8,2)
V2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(1,3) (2,3) (3,3) (4,3) (5,3) (6,3) (7,3) (8,3)
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
V3
(1,4) (2,4) (3,4) (4,4) (5,4) (6,4) (7,4) (8,4)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
V4
(1,5) (2,5) (3,5) (4,5) (5,5) (6,5) (7,5) (8,5)
V5 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
(1,6) (2,6) (3,6) (4,6) (5,6) (6,6) (7,6) (8,6)
V6 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
(1,7) (2,7) (3,7) (4,7) (5,7) (6,7) (7,7) (8,7)
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
V7
(1,8) (2,8) (3,8) (4,8) (5,8) (6,8) (7,8) (8,8)
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
V8
H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8

2 DVP-PLC Function
1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M definition of DISP module (7-segment
DISP Module
display):
D1146 Device Function

D1385~D1393
Connection number indication of DISP extension module, the
D1146
maximum is 3 connections.
D1385 Low byte of first DISP module
D1386 High byte of first DISP module
D1387 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the first DISP module
D1388 Low byte of the second DISP module
D1389 High byte of the second DISP module
D1390 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the second DISP module
D1391 Low byte of the third DISP module
D1392 High byte of the third DISP module
D1393 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the third DISP module
2. Explanation:
It needs to use common cathode 7-segment display.
The maximum DISP module extension units that a PLC can connect are 3 DISP
module extension units and each DISP module extension unit has 8 7-segment
displays.
Each 7-segment display uses 4-BITS to display.
Dot setting: there are 8 7-segment displays on a 7-segment display extension unit.
There is a dot in each 7-segment display and each dot setting can be filled in 1~8 to
display the dot of DISP1~DISP8. If the setting is out of range, no dot of 7-segment
display will light.
Pre-zero: this function is used to decide if it needs to display 0. It will check from the
left-most bit and display “0” after non-zero bit. For example: if the values of
DISP8~DISP1 are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and the 0 of DISP8 won’t be displayed.
First DISP D1385 D1386 D1387

BIT b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b15~b8 b7~b0
DISP number DISP4 DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 DISP8 DISP7 DISP6 DISP5 Pre- dot
zero
The value of
F F F F F F F F 0 0
STOP->RUN

2 DVP-PLC Function
3. DISP module external wiring terminal:
cathode 7-segment display (8-bit)

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
dot
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
4. Example of DISP module wiring:

Common cathode 7-segment display circuit: the device from BCD to Common cathode
7-segment display.
Power Input
1. using external +24VDC to be driven 2. Using internal +24VDC to be driven

power of display module. power of display module.
P P
Short additional DC
circuit
24VDC 24VDC
24V
OV OV
Common cathode 7-segment display connection:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
dot
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

2 DVP-PLC Function
1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of adjustable accel/decel pulse
Adjustable Acceleration/
Deceleration Pulse output function:
Output Function
Explanation
Device Function
M1144~M1149,
M1144 Start switch of accel/decel pulse output
M1154
M1145 Flag that is used in acceleration
D1032, D1033
M1146 Target frequency attained flag
D1144, D1154
M1147 Flag that is used in deceleration
D1155
M1148 Completed function flag
M1149 stop counting temporarily flag
M1154 Start designated deceleration gap time flag and frequency flag
D1032 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers
D1033 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers
D1144 Using parameter index (correspond to D component)
D1154 Recommended value of designated deceleration gap time (10~32767 ms)
D1155 Recommended value of designated acceleration gap frequency (-1~ - 32700 Hz)
2. Corresponding table of parameter D1144
Index Function
+0 Total segment number (n) (the maximum number is 10)
+1 Present execution segment (read only)
+2 Start frequency of first segment (SF1)
+3 Interval time of first segment (GT1)
+4 Interval frequency of first segment (GF1)
+5 Target frequency of first segment (TF1)
+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse
+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse
+8 Start frequency of second segment (SF2)
+9 Interval time of second segment (GT2)
+10 Interval frequency of second segment (GF2)
+11 Target frequency of second segment (TF2)
+12 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse
+13 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse
: :
+n*6+2 Start frequency of nth segment (SFn)
+n*6+3 Interval time of nth segment (GTn)
+n*6+4 Interval frequency of nth segment (GFn)
+n*6+5 Target frequency of nth segment (TFn)
+n*6+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse
+n*6+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse

2 DVP-PLC Function
3. Function Explanation:
This function can only be used for Y1 output point and the timing will be as follows. After
filling parameter table, set M1144 to start (it should be used in RUN mode)
GF
GF
Frequency(Hz)
GT
TF2
GT
SF3
SF2 TF3
TF1 SF4
TF4
SF1
Time(ms)
1st section 3rd section

pulse number 2nd section pulse number 4th section
(SE1) pulse number (SE3) pulse number
(SE2) (SE4)
4. Usage rule and restriction:
The minimum frequency of start frequency and target frequency should be equal to or
greater than 200Hz. If it is less than 200Hz, it means finish executing or not to execute.
The maximum frequency of start frequency of target frequency is 32700Hz. It will

execute in 32700Hz as it is greater than 32700Hz.
The interval time range is 1~32767ms and its unit is ms.
The interval frequency range in acceleration segment is 1Hz~32700Hz and in

deceleration segment is -1~-32700Hz. If it is set to 0Hz, the executed segment can’t be
up to target frequency, but it will tansfer to execute next segment after reaching target
number.
Target number of segment pulse output should be greater than ((GF*GT/1000)*

((TF-SF)/GF). Refer to example 1 for detail. Once Target number of segment pulse
output isn’t greater than ((GF*GT/1000)* ((TF-SF)/GF), this function can’t be used. The
improve method is to add interval time or add target number of pulse output.
If there is Y1 output designated by high-speed command in RUN mode, Y1 output

command will be started as high priority.

2 DVP-PLC Function
After starting to execute M1144, if M1148 outputs without attaining completed function
flag and M1144 is closed, this function will start deceleration function. If designated
acceleration function flag M1154 is Off, it will reduce 200Hz per 200ms and stop output
pulse till output frequency is less than 200Hz and set M1147 to deceleration flag. But if
designated deceleration flag M1154 is On, it will be executed by interval time and
frequency that defined by user. And interval time can’t be less than or equal to 0 (if it is
less than or equal to 0, factory setting will be set to 200ms). Interval frequency can’t be
greater than or equal to 0 (factory setting will be set to -1KHz when it is equal to 0 and
factory setting will be added negative sign automatically when it is greater than 0.)
When M1148 attains completed function flag and M1144 is closed, this function won’t
start deceleration function and it will clear M1148 flag. Once M1144 is closed, it will
clear M1149 flag.
The execution segment of this function will execute by total segment number. The
maximum segment is 10 segments.
The acceleration/deceleration of this function will execute by start frequency of the

next segment, i.e. when target frequency of execution segment is less than start
frequency of the next segment, the next segment is acceleration and the target
frequency of the next segment must be greater than start frequency of the next
segment. When target frequency of execution segment is greater than the next
segment frequency, the next segment is deceleration, therefore, target frequency of
the next segment must be less than start frequency of the next segment. If user can’t
set it by this way, we can’t ensure that you can get correct output pulse.
When STOP RUN, M1144~M1149 will be cleared to Off. When RUN STOP, M1144
will be cleared and M1145~M1149 won’t be cleared. D1144 will be cleared to 0 when it
is from Off On and unchanged in other case.
The usage parameter range of EP/SA series is D0~D999 and D2000~D4999. It won’t
execute this command and close M1144 if parameter is out of range (includes all
usage segment parameter).
5. Example 1: calculate output number of acceleration/deceleration of each segment and
target frequency
If setting start frequency of segment to 200Hz, segment interval time to 100ms, segment
gap frequency to 100Hz, segment target frequency to 500Hz and target number of segment
pulse is 1000 pulses. The calculation will be in the following:
Output pulse number at start acceleration/deceleration is 200*100/1000 = 20 pulses
Output pulse number of the first acceleration interval is 300*100/1000 = 30 pulses
Output pulse number of the second acceleration interval is 400*100/1000 = 40 pulses
Output pulse number of target frequency is 1000 − (40+30+20) = 910 pulses
(NOTE: it is recommended to set this number to be greater than 10)

2 DVP-PLC Function
Output time of target frequency is 1 / 500 * 910 = 1820 ms
Total time of this segment is 1820 + 3*100 = 2120 ms

6. Example 2: simple acceleration/deceleration pulse output program of a segment
acceleration and a segment deceleration
M1002
MOV K200
MOV K2 D200
MOV K250 D202
MOV K500 D203
MOV K250 D204
MOV D205
D206
MOV K750 D208
MOV K500 D209
MOV K-250 D210
MOV K250 D211
K200 D212
M0
END
7. Example 3: pulse output program of a segment acceleration/deceleration with direction

2 DVP-PLC Function
Y7=OFF
TF1
SF2
TF2
SF1
X0=ON
Position
Zero point SF1

TF2
SF2 TF1
Y7=On
Explanation:
Acceleration/deceleration setting is as example 2.
Figure above is the example of position movement. When X0 contact is On, it will start
to move and it will stop when X0 contact is Off. (Y7 is for direction setting)
Program is shown in the following.
M1002
RST M0
RST M1
X0
SET M0
X0 M0
ALT M1
M1
Y7
M1
SET
M1
M1148
RST
M0
X0
RST
END
8. Example 4: apply acceleration and deceleration of a segment to zero point return program.
Relative flag timing chart is shown in the following.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Acceleration for Deceleration for

returning to zero point returning to zero point
Stop returning to zero point

X0
M1144
M1148
Stop pulse output

M1149
The relation between frequency and position are shown in the following.
Frequency(Hz)
zero point
Position
Acceleration for Deceleration for

returning to zero point returning to zero point
Number setting of acceleration/deceleration, frequency and pulse are shown in the

following. (correspond to component D)
Index Settings
+0 2
+2 250(Hz)
+3 100(ms)
+4 500(Hz)
+5 10000(Hz)
+6, +7 10(pulse)
+8 9750(Hz)
+9 50(ms)
+10 -500(Hz)
+11 250(Hz)
+12, +13 30000(pulse)
Program is shown in the following: (it assumes contact X7 to be start reset trigger switch)

2 DVP-PLC Function
X7
SET
SET
X0
RST
X0
SET
RST
END
Explanation:
After contact X7 is triggered, M1144 will set to start acceleration and set M1149 not to
count pulse number. And it will send 10 pulses once deceleration switch X0 is
triggered and then enter deceleration segment.
To set M1148 to end pulse output by manual and close this function once X0 is closed.
Note: This example is just an application method that user should adjust parameters settings
used in acceleration/deceleration segment according to actual machine characteristics
and limitation.
Single Step 1. The definition of special D and special M of EH series single step execution function
Execution
Function
Device Function explanation
M1170, M1171
M1170 Start flag of single step function
D1170 M1171 Single step execution flag
D1170 STEP number of present PLC execution command
Execution time: this flag is valid when PLC is at RUN mode.
Action Steps:
A. Start M1170 to enter single step execution mode. PLC will stay at specific
command which the STEP is saved in D1170 and execute that command one
time.
B. When Forcing M1171 to be On, PLC will execute the next command and stop at
the next command, at the same time, PLC will force M1171 to be Off. D1170 will
display present STEP value.

2 DVP-PLC Function
3. Note:
Those commands that will be affected by scan time will be incorrect due to single STEP
execution. Example: when HKY command is executed, it needs 8 scan time to get a valid input
value of a button. Thus, single step execution will have faults.
Some commands like Pulse input/output, high-speed comparison command, won’t be

affected by single STEP due to hardware start.
2-phase Pulse 1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of 2-phase output function:
Output Function
Device Function Explanation

M1172~M1174
M1172 2-phase pulse output switch
D1172~D1177 M1173 On is continuous output switch
M1174 Output pulse number attained flag
D1172 2-phase output frequency (12Hz~20KHz)
D1173 2-phase output mode selection (k1and k2)
D1174 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number
D1175 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number
D1176 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number
D1177 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number
Output frequency = 1/T as shown in the figure below. There are two output modes, k1 and
k2, k1 means A phase gets ahead of B phase and k2 means B phase gets ahead of A phase.
Output number calculation adds 1 once there is a phase difference, such as figure below, there
are 8 output pulses. When output numbers attains, M1174 will be On and if you want to clear
M1174, you should close M1172.
Y0(A)
Y1(B)
1 2 7 8

2 DVP-PLC Function
Output frequency, output target number and mode selection can be modified when
M1172=On and M1174=Off. The modification of output frequency and output target number
won’t affect present output pulse number but mode selection modification will clear present
output pulse number to 0. Present output pulse number will be updated once scan time
updates and it will clear to 0 when M1172 is from Stop Run, and keep that last output number
when M1172 is from Run Stop.
3. Note:
This function just can be used at RUN mode and can exist in program with PLSY
command. But if command PLSY is executed first, this function can’t be used, and vice versa.
1. For EH/EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of built-in 2 points VR volume
VR Volume
function:

D1178~D1179
M1178 Start volume VR0
D1178 VR0 value
D1179 VR1 value
2. Function explanation:
This function only can be used at RUN mode. When M1178=On, the variational value of
VR 0 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1178. When M1179=On, the variational value
of VR 1 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1179.
3. Please refer to command API 85 VRRD for detail.
Power Loss 1. For EH/EP/SA series to set latched range. The latched range will be from start address
Latched Range
Setting number to end address number.
D1200~D1219 2. Please refer to chapter 2.1 for detail.
Input Point X 1. For EP/SA series, When M1304=On, input point X (X0-X17) of MPU can force to be On-Off
can force to be
ON/OFF by using peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.
M1304 2. For EH series, When M1304=On, input point X of MPU can force to be On-Off by using
peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
Extension
For EH series, it will display extension module ID in D1320~ D1327 by order when
Module ID connecting to special extension module.
Special extension module ID of EH series:
D1320~D1327
Extension Module Extension Module
Extension Module ID Extension Module ID
Name Name
DVPEH04AD H’0400 DVPEH01PU H’0110
DVP04DA-H H’0401 DVPEH01HC H’0120
DVPEH04PT H’0402 DVPEH02HC H’0220
DVPEH04TC H’0403 DVPEH01DT H’0130
DVPEH06XA H’0604 DVPEH02DT H’0230
DVPEH06RT H’0405
Easy PLC 1. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID1–ID8:
Link
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID
M1350-M1352 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M1360-M1439 read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
D1355-D1370 D1480 D1496 D1512 D1528 D1544 D1560 D1576 D1592 D1608 D1624 D1640 D1656 D1672 D1688 D1704 D1720
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D1415-D1465
D1495 D1511 D1527 D1543 D1559 D1575 D1591 D1607 D1623 D1639 D1655 D1671 D1687 D1703 D1719 D1735
D1480-D1991
Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item
number number number number number number number number number number number number number number number number
Device Communication Address

If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC
M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367
Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC
M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383
Read/write error flag
M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399
Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415
Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).
Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).

2 DVP-PLC Function
2. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID9–ID16:
MASTER PLC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item Item
number number number number number number number number number number number number number number number number
Device Communication Address

If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC

M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375
Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC
M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391
Read/write error flag
M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407
Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423
Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).
Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).
3. Explanation:
The basic communication protocol for EASY PLC LINK is MODBUS
All communication format used to connect to PLC should be the same (set D1120 for
PLC) and it supports ASCII and RTU mode.
The maximum slave PLCs for a master PLC to connect is 16 slave PLCs.
The ID of slave PLC should be fixed to 1~16 and each slave ID can’t be repeated.
One to one connection can connect to RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 in series
One to multiple connection can connect to RS-485 in series

2 DVP-PLC Function
4. Operation:
Setting Master PLC ID by D1121 and slave ID first. ID can’t be repeated.
Setting read/write items of slave (the maximum is 16 items). (refer to special D for
detail)
Setting device communication address to read/write to slave. (refer to Special D

explanation above for special D setting. Factory setting of communication address for
reading is H1064 (D100) and writing is H10C8 (D200).
Setting PLC LINK automatically (M1351)
Setting PLC LINK manually (M1352)

Start MASTER PLC LINK (M1350)
5. Master PLC action explanation:
Slave ID detection: When M1350=On, Master PLC is started and then detect slave
number to record number in D1433.
You can see if there is slave PLC by M1360-M1375 which save slave ID 1-16
separately. On means exist.
If detection of slave PLC number is 0, M1350 will be Off and stop Link at the same
time. PLC will only detect slave PLC number only at start that M1350=On.
Read/write of master and slave PLC: After finishing detecting slave, master PLC will
read/write to each slave. The slave that master can do read/write is slave ID got after
detecting slave ID. Once slave PLC is added after detecting, master can’t do read/write
to it till the next detection.
Master PLC will read first and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D100.
After reading, PLC will write and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D200.
Master PLC will read/write to slave PLC in order, i.e. it will read/write to the next slave
after finishing a slave.
6. Automatic/ Manual model explanation:
Automatic mode: it should set M1351 to Off. Master PLC will read/write to slave till
M1350 is Off.
Manual mode: It needs to set times of read to D1431. One time means finish all Slave
read/write. When PLC starts Link, D1432 will start to count times of
Link. When D1431 = D1432, PLC will stop Link and force M1351 to be
Off at the same time. If M1351 is forced to be On, PLC will start to link
according to D1431 value automatically.

2 DVP-PLC Function
Note:
1. Automation mode M1351 and manual mode M1352 can’t be On at the same
time.
2. Please clear M1350 first before switching automation/manual mode.
3. Communication time-out can be set by D1129. The setting range is from 300
to 3000. When it is out of range, it will be regarded as 300 when it is less
than 300 and regarded as 3000 when it is larger than 3000. Besides, this
setting is valid when it is set before linking.
4. PLC LINK function is only valid when baud rate is larger than 1200 bps.
When baud rate is less than 9600 bps, please set communication time-out to
more than 1 second.
5. It won’t communicate when write/read item is 0.

2 DVP-PLC Function
2.12 Fault Code Information
If the PLC ERROR LED is flashing or special relay M1004=On after writing program in PLC, the problem may be
an invalid operand or error grammar. You can get fault code saved in special register D1004 to check in following
table to get error message and error address is saved in D1137. (D1137 will be invalid if it is general loop error)
Please refer to chapter 2.1 for each model usage range.
Fault Code Description Fault Code Description
Operand bit device S exceeds the usage
0001 0F06 SFTR misuse operand
range
Label P exceeds the usage range or
0002 0F07 SFTL misuse operand
duplicated
0003 Operand KnSm exceeds the usage range 0F08 REF misuse operand
Interrupt pointer I exceeds the usage
0102 1000 ZRST misuse operand
range or duplicated
An unrecognized command code is being
0202 Command MC exceeds the usage range C400
used
0302 Command MCR exceeds the usage range C401 Loop error
Operand bit device X exceeds the usage LD / LDI continuously use more than 9
0401 C402
range times
0403 Operand KnXm exceeds the usage range C403 MPS continuously use more than 9 times
Operand bit device Y exceeds the usage
0501 C404 FOR-NEXT exceeds 6 levels
range
STL/RET used between FOR-NEXT
0503 Operand KnYm exceeds the usage range C405
SRET/IRET used between FOR-NEXT
Operand bit device T exceeds the usage MC/MCR used between FOR-NEXT
0601
range END / FEND used between FOR-NEXT
Operand word device T register usage
0604 C407 STL continuously use more than 9 times
exceeds limit
Operand bit device M exceeds the usage Use command MC/MCR in STL
0801 C408
range Use I/P in STL
Use STL/RET in subroutine
0803 Operand KnMm exceeds the usage range C409
Use STL/RET in interrupt program
0D01 DECO misuse operand Use MC/MCR in subroutine
C40A
0D02 ENCO misuse operand Use MC/MCR in interrupt program
0D03 DHSCS misuse operand MC/MCR doesn’t start from N0 or
C40B
0D04 DHSCR misuse operand discontinuously
0D05 PLSY misuse operand MC/MCR corresponding value N is
C40C
0D06 PWM misuse operand different
0D07 FROM/TO misuse operand C40D Use I/P incorrectly
0D08 PID misuse operand IRET doesn’t follow by the last FEND
command
Operand bit device C exceeds the usage C40E
0E01 SRET doesn’t follow by the last FEND
range
command
Operand word device C register usage
0E04 The number of input/output points of I/O
exceeds limit C41C
extension unit exceeds usage range
0E05 DCNT misuse operand CXXX
0E18 BCD conversion error Special extension module exceeds usage
C41D
0E19 Division error (divisor=0) range
Component exceeds usage range (include Hardware setting of special extension
0E1A C41E
E and F error) module error
It is negative number after radical
0E1B C41F Data write in memory failure
expression
0E1C FROM/TO communication error C4FF Invalid command (no this command)
Operand word device D register usage
0F04 C4EE No END command in program
exceeds limit
0F05 DCNT misuse operand DXXX

3 Basic Commands
3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command
Basic Commands
Command Execution speed (us)

Function Operands STEP Page
Code ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
LD Load contact A X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.6 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3
LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.68 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3
AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3
ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4
OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4
ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-5
ANB Series connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5
ORB Parallel connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5
MPS Save the operation result None 4.64 0.24 1~3 3-6
Read the operation result (the
MRD None 4 0.24 1 3-6
pointer not moving)
MPP Read the result None 4.4 0.24 1 3-6
Output commands

Code
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
OUT Drive coil Y, S, M 6.4 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7
SET Action latched (ON) Y, S, M 5.04 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7
Y, M, S, T, C, D,
RST Clear the contacts or the registers 7.6 0.24(0.56) 3 3-7
E, F
Timers, Counters

API Function Operands STEP Page
96 TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D 9.6 25 4 3-8
97 CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D（16 bits） 12.8 30 4 3-8
97 DCNT 32-bit counter C-K or C-D（32 bits） 14.32 50 6 3-9
Main control commands

MC Connect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.6 20 3 3-10
Disconnect the common series connection

MCR N0~N7 5.76 15 3 3-10
contacts

3 Basic Commands
Rising-edge/falling-edge detection commands of contact

Code
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11
91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.32 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11
92 ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11
93 ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12
94 ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12
95 ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13
Rising-edge/falling-edge output commands

Code
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
89 PLS Rising-edge output Y, M 9.92 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13
99 PLF Falling-edge output Y, M 10.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13
End command
Execution speed (us)

Command Code Function Operands STEP Page
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
END Program end none 7.44 0.24 1 3-14
Other commands

NOP No function none 3.52 0.16 1 3-14
98 INV Inverting operation none 3.92 0.24 1 3-15
P Pointer P0~P255 －－ 1 3-15
I Interrupt pointer I□□□ －－ 1 3-15
Step ladder commands

Command
Code
STL Step transition ladder start command S 1 4-1
RET Step transition ladder return command none 1 4-1
Note: The value wrote in () in the column of execution speed of EH series is the execution speed of specific
operand M1536~M4095.

3 Basic Commands
3.2 Basic Commands Explanations
Command Functions Adaptive model

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
LD Load A contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A
Command
Explanation contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present
contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative
register.
Ladder Diagram: Command Code: Command code explanation:
Program
Example X0 X1 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
Y1 AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in
OUT Y1 series
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
LDI Load B contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B
Command
Explanation contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present
contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative
register.

Program
Example X0 X1 LDI X0 Load contact B of X0
Y1 AND X1 Connect to contact A of X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
AND Series connection-a contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－

3 Basic Commands
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Program Load contact B of X1
Example X1 X0 LDI X1 Connect to contact A of X0 in series
Y1 AND X0 Drive Y1 coil
OUT Y1

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ANI Series connection-b contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Program Load contact A of X1
Example X1 X0 LD X1 Connect to contact B of X0 in
Y1 ANI X0 series

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
OR Parallel connection-a contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,
thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Example X0 LD X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in
Y1 OR X1 parallel
X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

3 Basic Commands

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ORI Parallel connection-b contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,
thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

Example X0 LD X0 Connect to contact B of X1 in
Y1 ORI X1 parallel
X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
Operand none
To perform the “AND” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
Command
Explanation contents of the accumulative register.

Example X0 ANB X1 LD X0 Connect to contact B of X2 in
Y1 ORI X2 parallel
X2 X3 LDI X1 Load contact B of X1
OR X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in
ANB parallel
Block A Block B OUT Y1 Connect circuit block in series
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
Operand None
To perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
Command
Explanation contents of the accumulative register.

3 Basic Commands

Example X0 X1 Block A LD X0 Connect to contact B of X1 in
Y1 ANI X1 series
LDI X2 Load contact B of X2
X2 X3 AND X3 Connect to contact A of X3 in
ORB ORB series
Block B OUT Y1 Connect circuit block in parallel
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
MPS Store the operation result
Operand None
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
Command
Explanation operation pointer pulses 1)

ES/EX/SS EP EH
MRD Reads the operation result
Operand None
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
Command
Explanation operation result doesn’t move)

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
MPP Reads, then clears the operation result
Operand None
To retrieve the previous reserved logic calculation result from the operation result and
Command
Explanation save it into the accumulative register. (the pointer of result operation minus 1)

Example MPS LD X0 Save to stack
X0 X1 MPS Connect to contact A of X1 in
Y1 AND X1 series
X2 OUT Y1 Drive M0 coil
MRD M0 MRD Read from stack
AND X2 Drive Y2 coil
OUT M0 Program end
Y2
MPP
MPP OUT Y2
END END

3 Basic Commands

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
OUT Output coil
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－－－－
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Command
Explanation Motion of coil contact:
OUT command
Operation
Contact
result Coil
A contact（normal open） B contact（normal close）
FALSE OFF Non-continuity Continuity
TRUE ON Continuity Non-continuity

Program Load contact B of X0
Example X0 X1 LDI X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in
Y1 AND X1 series

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
SET Latch（ON）
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－－－－
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will keep
Command
Explanation “ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set
the device to “OFF”.
Ladder Diagram: Command Code: Command code

Program explanation:
Example X0 Y0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
SET Y1 ANI Y0 Connect to contact B
SET Y1 of Y0 in series
Y1 latch (ON)

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
RST Clear the contact or the register
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 E, F

Operand
－

3 Basic Commands
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Command
Explanation Device Status
S, Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and
T, C
contact will be set to “OFF.”
D, E, F The content value will be set to 0.
If the RST command is not executed, status of specific device will not be changed.

Example X0 LD X0
RST Y5 RST Y5 Load contact A of X0
Clear contact Y5

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
TMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0~T255, K0~K32,767

Operand
T-D T0~T255, D0~D9,999
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
Command
Explanation count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the
contact will be as following:
NO(Normally Open) contact Open collector

NC(Normally Closed) contact Close collector
Example X0 LD X0
TMR T5 K1000 TMR T5 K1000 Load contact A of X0
T5 timer
Setting is K1000
Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand T usage.
Footnote

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
CNT 16-bit counter
C-K C0~C199, K0~K32,767

Operand
C-D C0~C199, D0~D9,999

3 Basic Commands
When the CNT command is executed from OFF ON, which means that the counter
Command
Explanation coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact
is as follows:
NO(Normally Open) contact Continuity

NC(Normally Closed) contact Non-continuity
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the conatcts and the counting
values will be un unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.

Example X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
CNT C20 K100 CNT C20 K100 C20 counter
Setting is K100

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
DCNT 32-bit counter
C-K C200~C254，K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647
Operand
C-D C200~C254, D0~D9,999
DCNT is the startup command for the 32-bit high-speed counter that is utilized
Command
Explanation especially in counters C232 to C255.
For general addition/subtraction counter C200~C234, the present value will count up
(add 1) or count down (subtract 1) when command DCNT is from Off→On.
When specific high-speed counter pulse input of high-speed addition/subtraction
counters C235~C254 is from Off→On, it will execute counting. If counter trigger input
keeps being On or Off, the counter value will be unchanged. See chapter 2.7 timer
number and function for high-speed pulse input terminals (X0~X17) and counting
(count up (add 1) and count down (subtract 1)).
When DCNT command is OFF, the counter will stop counting, but the counting values
will not be cleared. Users can use RST C2XX command to remove the counting values
and the contacts. High-speed addition/subtraction counters C235~C254 can use
external specific input point to remove the counting values and the contacts.
LadderDiagram: Command Code: Command code
Program M0 LD M0 explanation:
Example DCNT C254 K1000 DCNT C254 K1000 Load contact A of
M0 and C254
LD M0 counter
DCNT C254 K1000 Setting is K1000

3 Basic Commands

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
MC / MCR Master control Start/Reset command
Operand N0~N7
MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the

Command
Explanation execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described
as follows:
The counting value is set back to zero, the coil
Timer
and the contact are both turned OFF
The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the
Accumulative timer
contact stay at their present condition
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the
Counter
contact stay at their present condition
Coils driven up by the OUT
All turned OFF
command
Devices driven up by the SET
Stay at present condition
and RST commands
Application commands All of them are not acted
MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control
program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command.
Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure,
with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer
to the following:
Ladder Diagram: Command Code Explanation
Program LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Example X0 MC N0 Enable N0 common series
MC N0 connection contact
X1 LD X1 Load A contact of X1
Y0 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
:
X2 LD X2 Load A contact of X2
MC N1 MC N1 Enable N1 common series
connection contact
X3
LD X3 Load A contact of X3
Y1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
:
MCR N1 MCR N1 Disable N1 common series
connection contact
:
MCR N0 MCR N0 Disable N0 common series
X10 connection contact
:
MC N0
X11 MC N0 Enable N0 common series
Y10 connection contact
MCR N0 :
MCR N0 Disable N0 common series
connection contact

3 Basic Commands

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
LDP Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
Command
Explanation different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Ladder Diagram: Command code: Command code explanation:
Program
Example X0 X1 LDP X0 Start X0 rising-edge
Y1 AND X1 detection
OUT Y1 Series connection A contact
of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand usage.
Footnote If specific rising-edge contact state is On before PLC is power on, rising-dedge contact
will be True after PLC is power on.

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
LDF Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
Command
Explanation different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
Ladder Diagram: Command code: Command code
Example X0 X1 LDF X0
Y1 AND X1 Start X0 falling-edge
OUT Y1 detection
Series connection A
contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ANDP Series connection command for the riding-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－

3 Basic Commands
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
Command
Explanation
Example X0 X1 LD X0
Y1 ANDP X1 Load A contact of X0
OUT Y1 X1 rising-edge detection in
series connection
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ANDF Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.
Command
Explanation
Program
Example X0 X1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1 ANDF X1 X1 falling-edge detection in
OUT Y1 series connection
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ORP Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge
Command
Explanation detection.

Example X0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1 ORP X1 X1 rising-edge detection in
X1 OUT Y1 parallel connection
Drive Y1 coil

3 Basic Commands

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
ORF Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge
Command
Explanation detection.

Y1 ORF X1 X1 falling-edge detection in
X1 OUT Y1 parallel connection
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
PLS Rising-edge output
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－－－－－
When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
Command
Explanation send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time.

Program X0 explanation:
Example PLS M0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
PLS M0 M0 rising-edge output
M0
LD M0 Load the contact A of
SET Y0 SET Y0 M0
Timing Diagram:
Y0 latched (ON)
X0
M0 a scan time
Y0

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
PLF Falling-edge output
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand
－－－－－

3 Basic Commands
When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will
Command
Explanation send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.

Example PLF M0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
PLF M0 M0 falling-edge output
M0
LD M0 Load the contact A of
SET Y0 SET Y0 M0
Timing Diagram:
Y0 latched (ON)
X0
a scan time
M0
Y0

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
END Program End
Operand None
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command
Command
Explanation program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return
to address 0 to scan again.

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
NOP No operation
Operand none
Command This is a no-operation command and has no effect on the previous operation. NOP is
Explanation used in the following cases: To delete a command without changing the number of
steps. (Overwrite with NOP)

Example Command NOP will be omitted LD X0 Load B contact of X0
when ladder diagram displays. NOP No operation
OUT Y1
X0 Drive Y1 coil
NOP Y1

3 Basic Commands

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
INV Inverting Operation
Operand None
Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result.
Command
Explanation
Example Y1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
INV Inverting the operation
OUT Y1 result
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
P Pointer
Operand P0~P255
Pointers are used with the jump commands (CJ, CALL) in two different ways as follows.
Command
Explanation But a number cannot be used repeatedly.

CJ P10 CJ P10 Jump from command CJ
: to P10
X1 P10
P10 Y1 LD X1 Pointer P10
OUT Y1 Load a contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
I Interrupt Pointers (I)
I00□, I10□, I20□, I30□, I40□, I50□, I6□□, I7□□, I8□□

Operand
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I110, I120, I130, I140
Interrupt programs should begin with interrupt pointer （I□□□）and ends with
Command
Explanation application command to be as interrupt end and return. It must use with application
commands API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, API 05 DI.

3 Basic Commands
Ladder Diagram: Command Code: Command

Program code explanation:
EI
Example range for inserting EI Interrupt Enable
X1 program interrupt
Y1 LD X1 Load A contact of X1
interrupt OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Service DI :
program
pointer DI Interrupt Disable
FEND :
X2 FEND Program end
I 001 Y2 I001 Insert point
program interrupt insert
into subroutine LD X2 Load A contact of X2
IRET OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil
:
IRET Interrupt and return
The number of interrupt pointer I of ES / EX / SS series:

Footnote There are four external interrupts (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2) and (I301, X3).
The number of interrupt pointer I of EP series:
1. There are 6 external interrupt points: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3),
(I401, X4) and (I501, X5). (□＝1 means interrupt in rising-edge, □＝0 means interrupt
in falling-edge)
2. There are two time interrupt points: I6□□, I7□□. (□□＝10~99ms)
3. There are six high-speed counter attained interrupt points: I010 (use with C235,
C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254), I020(use with C236), I030 (use
with C237, C242), I040(use with C238), I050(use with C239), I060 (use with C240).
(use with command API 53 DHSCS to produce interrupt signal)
The number of interrupt pointer I of EH series:
1. There are six interrupt points of external interrupt: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□,
X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4), (I50□, X5). (□＝1 means interrupt in rising-edge, □＝0
means interrupt in falling-edge)
2. There are three time interrupt points: I6□□, I7□□, I8□□. (□□＝10~99ms)
3. There are six points of high-speed counter attained interrupt: I010, I020, I030, I040,
I050, I060. (use with API 53 DHSCS command to produce interrupt signal)
4. Pulse wave output interrupts I110, I120 (they are triggered at the end of pulse wave.
I130, I140 (they are triggered at the beginning of first pulse wave).

4 Step Ladder Commands
4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET]
Common Function Operand Adaptive model

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
STL Step Transition Ladder Start Command S0~S1023
The step ladder command, STL Sn, has constituted the stepping point, and when the
Command
Explanation STL command showed up in the program, it implies that the program is now at the step
ladder diagram condition that is controlled by the step procedure. The step ladder
command RET represents the end of the step ladder diagram (from S0~S9) that is to
return to the BUS command. The SFC diagram is represented through the step ladder
diagram composed of STL/RET. The number of step point S can’t be repeated.
Common Function Operand Adaptive model

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
RET Step Transition Ladder Return Command None
At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET
Command
Explanation command indicates the end of the step procedure. Maximum is 10 step procedures
(S0~S9) for a PLC program and it should have RET command at the end of each step
procedure.
Ladder Diagram: SFC:
Program M1002
ZRST S0 S127 M1002
Example
SET S0 S0
S0 X0 X0
S SET S20
S20 S20 Y0
S Y0
X1 X1
SET S30
S30 S30 Y1
S Y1
X2
X2
SET S40 S40 Y2
S40
S Y2 X3
X3
S0
RET
S0
END
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
In automatic control field, it often needs to cooperate with electric control and mechanical control to reach the
goal. SFC can be divided into several serial STEP (i.e. several phases). Each STEP should finish its actions. It
usually has transition to transfer from each step to the next step. That is the design concept of Sequential Function
Chart to have transition to end the action of the previous step and start the action of the next step (the previous step
will be clear at this time).

Features:
1. You don’t need to do SFC design for constant state step. PLC will execute the
SFC:
action of interlock and double output between each state. It is only needed do
simple SFC design for each state and make machine works.
S0
2. The action is easy to understand and easy to adjust initial PLC start-up, detect
X0
and maintain.
S21
3. SFC edition theory is made by IEC1131-3. It is figure edition mode and the
X1 X2
structure looks like flow chart. Each PLC internal step relay S is used to be step
point and also equal to each step of flow chart. After finishing present step, it S22 S24
will transfer to the next step, i.e. next step point S, by setting condition. By X3
repeating this way, it can reach the result that user needs.
4. Explanation of right side SFC figure: each step has its own transition condition X4
to move from one step to the next step. In this figure, primary step point S0 will
S24
move to step point S21 once this transition condition X0 is established, and
X5
S21 can move to S22 or S24 by transition condition X1 or X2 and S25 will
S25
move to S0 to finish a whole procedure once transition condition X6 is
X6
established. By this way, it can circulate control with repeat again and again.
S0
It is used for ladder step mode. This figure means internal edition program is a general step
ladder diagram not step ladder program.
It is for primary step point. This double-frame is used for SFC primary step point and the usage
devices are S0~S9.
It is used for general step point and the usage devices are S10~S1023.
It is JUMP step point that used to move from step point to another which is not next to it. (it can
be used to disconnected jump up or jump down in the same program procedure, return to
primary step point or jump between different program procedure.
It is the transition condition of step point that used to move between each step point.
It is alternative divergence that used for a step point to move to different corresponding step
point by different transition condition.
It is alternative convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step
point according to transition condition.
It is simultaneous divergence that used for a step point move to two step points and above by the
same transition condition.
It is simultaneous convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step
point with the same transition condition when the condition is established at the same time.
4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation
STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This
command helps the program designer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will
be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we could switch our procedure diagram from the left
diagram to the right PLC structure diagram.

At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET command indicates the end of
the step procedure. Several step procedures could be written in to the same program, just make sure to write in the
RET command at the end of the step procedure. There is no limitation to the usage of the RET command, and this
command should match up with the usage of the step points (S0~S9).
If the RET command is not written in at the end of the step procedure, this error will be detected by the editing
device.
M1002 M1002
primary pulse SET S0
S0 S0
S SET S21
S21
S21 S SET S22
S22
S SET S23
S22
S23
S S0
S23
RET
1. Step Ladder Action:
The step ladder is made up of numerous step points; each step point represents one control procedure action,
and each step point needs to execute following three missions:
A. drive output coil
B. specific transition condition
C. designate what step point is to be appointed to take over the control power of the present step point
Example:
S10 S10
S Y0 S Y0
SET Y1 SET Y1
X0 X0
When X0=ON,
SET S20 SET S20
S20=On,
S20 S10=Off. S20
S Y10 S Y10
X1 X1
SET S30 SET S30
Explanation:
When S10=ON, Y0 and Y1 are ON. When X0=ON, S20=ON and Y10 is ON, too.
And when S10 is OFF, Y0 will be OFF, but Y1 is ON. (Since Y1 uses the SET command, it will keep in ON status)
2. Step ladder timing: when state contact Sn is On, circuit will be activated and circuit won’t be activated when
state contact Sn is Off. (Above action will be executed after delaying a scan time)
3. The repeated usage of the output coil:

1. Output coils of the same number could be used in different S10

step points. S Y0
2. Such as right diagram, there is the same output device
Y0 in the different state. No matter S10 or S20 is On, Y0 SET Y1
will be On.
3. Y0 will be close during the transition from S10 to S20 and X0
output Y0 after S20 is On. Thus in this case, Y0 will be SET S20
On no matter S10 or S20 is On. S20
4. For general ladder diagrams, repeated usages of the S Y0
output coils should be avoided. Output coil number used
X1
in step point should be avoided to use after returning to
general ladder diagram. SET S30
4. Repeated usage of the timer:

Same as general output points, the timer could be used
repeatedly for different step points. (this is one feature of step
S20 TMR T1 K10
ladder diagram, but for general ladder diagrams, repeated
usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil X1
number used in step point should be avoided to use after S30 TMR T2 K20
returning to general ladder diagram.) X2
Note: as right diagram, ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series timer only S40 TMR T1 K30
used repeatedly in disconnected step point.
5. Transfer of the step point:
SET Sn and OUT Sn commands are both used to start (or to transfer to) another step point, and the occasions to
use these commands could be different: when the controlling power is transferred to another step point, the status of
the original step point S and the action of the output point would all be erased. Due to that numerous step control
procedures could exist at the same program simultaneously (take S0~S9 as the starting and ending points to lead the
step ladder diagram), the transfer of steps could thus be on the same step procedure or could be transferred to
different step procedures. And thus, the transfer commands, SET Sn and OUT Sn, of the step point might vary
somewhat in usage; please refer to the following explanations:
Within the same procedure, S10

SET Sn S Y10
it is used to drive up the next X0
status step point, and after SET S12 When executing “SET S12”,
S12 status step point moves from
the status is transferred, S Y11 S12 to S10 and clear S10 and
X1 all outputs (Y10).
outputs of previous action SET S14
status points will be clear.
Within the same procedure, transfer of the simultaneous convergence point and different procedures
OUT Sn
are used to drive up separate step points, and after the status is transferred, outputs of previous action
status points will be clear.

Within the same SFC diagram: Ladder diagram:
procedure, it is used to OUT S0

S0 S Drive jump step point
return to primary step
S21 Using OUT S24
point. S21 S
X2
S24
Within the same X2
S23
procedure, it is used for S
the step points to jump S24 S24
OUT return to primary step point
S
up or down between
S25 Using OUT S0
disconnected step point. S25 S
X7
X7 S0
S25 uses OUT to return
to primary step point S0 RET
At different procedures, it SFC figure: ladder diagram:

is used to drive up OUT OUT S0 Drive separate
S0 S1 S step point
separate step points. S21 Using OUT S42
S
S21 S41 X2 step procedure
S42 inducted by S0
S23
X2
OUT S
S42
S1 RET
S
S23 S43 S42
S step procedure
S43 inducted by S1
S0 and S1 two different step procedures S
S23 return to primary step point RET
S0 by using OUT
S43 return to primary step point
S1 by using OUT
6. Notice of Driving Output Points:
As in the following left diagram, after the LD or LDI command is written in the second line of BUS beyond the step
point, output coil can’t be connected from BUS directly. There will be error when compiling. It is needed to modify to
following middle and left diagram to correct diagram.
BUS
Sn Sn Sn
S Y0 S Y0 S Y0
M0 M0
Y1 Y2 or Y1
M0 M1000
Y2 Y1 Y2
modify position
normally open contact
in RUN mode
7. Usage restrictions for partial commands:
Program of every step point is identical to the general ladder diagram, and every kind of series and parallel
connection circuits or application commands could all be utilized, however, part of the commands are under certain
restrictions, please refer to the following descriptions:

Basic commands that are to be used within the step point
Basic command LD/LDI/LDP/LDF

AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF ANB/ORB
MC/MCR
OR/ORI/ORP/ORF MPS/MRD/MPP
Step point INV/OUT/SET/RST
Primary step point/ General step point Yes Yes No
Diverging step point/ General output Yes Yes No
Converging step point Step point transfer Yes No No
※ MC/MCR commands are not to be used within the step point.
※ The STL command could not be used in general sub-programs and the interruption service sub-program.
※ Use of the CJ command is not prohibited within the STL command, however, it will complicate the action and
should thus be avoided.
※ MPS/MRD/MPP command position:
Step Ladder Diagram: Command code: Explanation:
LD X0 STL Sn The BUS of step point can’t use

MPS LD X0
Sn X0 X1 commands MPS / MRD / MPP
MPS
S Y1 directly. It needs to use command
AND X1
X2 LD or LDI before using
MRD M0 OUT Y1
BUS
X3 MRD commands MPS / MRD / MPP.
Y2 AND X2
MPP OUT M0
MPP
AND X3
OUT Y2
8. Other Notice:
For general, commands (SET S□ or OUT S□) that used to transfer to next state are better to use after finishing
all relative outputs and actions.
In the following figure, they are the same after executing by PLC. If there are many conditions or actions in S10, it
is recommended to execute SET S20 after modifying from left figure to right figure and finishing all relative outputs
and actions. In this way, the procedure is clear and easy to maintain.
S10 S10
S Y0 S Y0
SET S20 Y1
Y1 SET S20
S20 S20
S Y2 S Y2

It is needed to add RET command after finishing step S20 X1

S S0
ladder program and RET command is also needed to add
after STL as shown in right figure. RET
S20 X1
S S0
RET
4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program
1. The step point up front in SFC is called the primary step point, S0~S9. Utilize the primary step point to be the start
of the procedure, and use the RET command as the end to construct a complete procedure.
2. If the STL command is not in use, S could be served as general auxiliary relay.
3. The number for the step point, S, could not be used repeatedly.
4. Categories of procedures:
Single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program (the alternative diverge and converge, the simultaneous
diverge and converge aren’t included)
Complicated single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program and it includes alternative diverge,
alternative converge procedures, Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.
Combination procedure: there are numerous single procedures in a program and maximum is 10 (S0~S9)
procedures.
5. Procedure separation: it is allowed to write in numerous procedures within one step ladder diagram
There are two single procedures S0 and S1 at the right OUT OUT
S0 S1
diagram; procedure of the program is to write in S0 ~S30 first,
and then S1~S43.
S21 S41
Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one
specified step point on other procedures. OUT
S42
Once the condition below S21 at the right diagram is held, it
could jump to the specified S42 step point on the S1 procedure;
this motion is called the separate step point. S30 S43
6. Restrictions on the diverging procedure: (See following examples)
A. Up to 8 diverging step points could be used within a diverging procedure.

B. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural diverging or simultaneous converging procedures.
C. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.
7. Reset of the step point and the output prohibition:
A. Use the ZRST command to Reset a section f step points to be OFF.

B. Use the output Y prohibition of PLC (M1034=ON).
8. Retaining step point:
When PLC encountered power failure, the retaining step point will memorize the ON/OFF status, and go on
with the execution before the power failure after the power is turned back on. S0~S127 are currently the retaining
step points.
9. Special auxiliary relay and special register: refer to chapter 4.6 IST command for detail.
Device Description
M1040 Step transition inhibits. When M1040 is On, all movement of step point are inhibited.
M1041 Step transition start. Flag for IST command.
M1042 Start pulse. Flag for IST command.
M1043 Origin reset completed. Flag for IST command.
M1044 Origin condition. Flag for IST command.
M1045 All outputs clear inhibit. Flag for IST command.
M1046 STL state setting. Once there is a step point On, M1046 is On.
M1047 STL monitor enable
D1040 ON state number 1 of step point S
4.5 Categories of Procedures
A. Single procedure: the basic step action is single procedure control action.
The first step point of step ladder diagram is called primary step point and the number is S0~S9. Those step points
after primary step point are called general step point and the number are S10~S1023. S10~S19 will be used as origin
reset step points once use command IST.
A-1 Single Procedure without Divergence and Convergence
After finishing a procedure, transferring control power of step point to primary step point.

Step Ladder Diagram SFC diagram

M1002
ZRST S0 S127 M1002
S0
SET S0 X0
S0 X0
S20 Y0
S SET S20
S20 X1
S Y0 S30 Y1
X1 X2
SET S30
S30
S40 Y2
S Y1 X3
X2 S50 Y3
SET S40
X4
S40
S Y2 S60 Y4
X3 X5
SET S50
S50
S Y3 S0
X4
SET S60
S60
S Y4
X5
S0
RET
END

A-2 JUMP Procedure
1. Transfer control power of step 2. Transfer control power of step

point to upper certain step point to step point of other
point. procedure.
OUT OUT OUT

S0 S0 S1
OUT
S21 S21 S41
OUT
S42
S42
S41 S43
S43
A-3 Reset Procedure
At the right diagram, S50 will Reset itself and end the
S0
procedure when condition is held.
S21
RST
S50
B. Complicated single procedure: it includes alternative diverge, alternative converge procedures,

Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.
B-1 Structure of simultaneous divergence

The situation that transfers to many states when present condition is held is called structure of simultaneous
divergence as shown in following. When X0=On, S20 will transfer to S21, S22, S23 and S24 at the same time.
Ladder diagram of simultaneous divergence:

S20 X0
S SET S21
SET S22
SET S23
SET S24
SFC diagram of simultaneous divergence:
S20
S21 S22 S23 S24
B-2 Structure of the alternative divergence
The situation that transfers to individual state when individual condition of present state is held is called structure of
alternative divergence as shown in following. S20 will transfer to S30 when X0=On, S20 will transfer to S31 when
X1=On and S20 will transfer to S32 when X2=On.
Ladder diagram of alternative divergence:
S20 X0
S SET S30
X1
SET S31
X2
SET S32
SFC diagram of alternative divergence:
S20
X0 X1 X2
S30 S31 S32
B-3 Structure of the simultaneous convergence
The situation that transfers to next state when continuous states are held at the same time is called simultaneous
convergence.

Ladder diagram of simultaneous convergence:

S40 S41 S42 X2
S S S SET S50
SFC diagram of simultaneous convergence:
S40 S41 S42
X2
S50
B-4 Structure of the alternative convergence
The following ladder diagram is alternative convergence. That means it will transfer to S60 once one of S30, S40 and
S50 is held.
Ladder diagram of alternative convergence:

S30 X0
S SET S60
S40 X1
S SET S60
S50 X2
S SET S60
SFC diagram of alternative convergence:
S30 S40 S50

X0 X1 X2
S60

Example of the alternative divergence and alternative convergence procedures
M1002
ZRST S0 S127 M1002
S1
SET S1
S1 X0 X0
S SET S20
S20 Y0
S20
S Y0
X1 X1 X4 X7
SET S30 S30 Y1 S31 Y3 S32 Y5
X4
SET S31 X2 X5 X10
X7 S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6
SET S32
X3 X6 X11
S30
S Y1
X2 S50 TMR T1 K10
SET S40 T1
S40
S Y2 S60 Y7
X3 X12
SET S50
S31 S1
S Y3
X5
SET S41
S41
S Y4
X6
SET S50
S32
S Y5
X10
SET S42
S42
S Y6
X11
SET S50
S50
S TMR T1 K10
T1
SET S60
S60
S Y7
X12
S1
RET
END

Example of the simultaneous divergence and simultaneous convergence procedures
M1002
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S3
SET S3 X0
S3 X0 S20 Y0
S SET S20
X1
S20
S Y0
S30 Y1 S31 Y3 S32 Y5
X1
SET S30 X2 X3 X4
S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6
SET S31
X5
SET S32
S50 TMR T1 K10
S30
S Y1 T1
X2 S60 Y7
SET S40 X6
S40
S Y2 S3
S31
S Y3
X3
SET S41
S41
S Y4
S32
S Y5
X4
SET S42
S42
S Y6
S40 S41 S42 X5
S S S SET S50
S50
S TMR T1 K10
T1
SET S60
S60
S Y7
X6
S3
RET
END

Example of the simultaneous divergence and alternative convergence procedures
M1002
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S4
SET S4 X0
S4 X0 S20 Y0
S SET S20 X1
S20
S30 Y1 S31 Y3 S32 Y5
S Y0
X2 X4 X6
X1
S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6
SET S30
X3 X5 X7
SET S31 S50 TMR T1 K10

T1
SET S32
S60 Y7
S30
S Y1
X2 S4
SET S40
S40
S Y2
X3
SET S50
S31
S Y3
X4
SET S41
S41
S Y4
X5
SET S50
S32
S Y5
X6
SET S42
S42
S Y6
X7
SET S50
S50
S TMR T1 K10
T1
SET S60
S60
S Y7
X6
S4
RET
END

Combination example 1: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence
and convergence)
M1002 S51
ZRST S0 S127 S Y10
X12
SET S0 SET S61
S0 S61
S Y0 S Y14
X0 S60 S61 X15
SET S20 S S SET S70
S20 S70
S Y1 S Y17
X1 X17
SET S30 S0
X2 S32
SET S31 S Y4
X3 X6
SET S32 SET S41
S30 S41
S Y2 S Y6
X4 X10
SET S40 SET S52
S31
S Y3 SET S53
X5 S52
S Y11
SET S40
X13
S40
S SET S62
Y5
X7 S62
S Y15
SET S50
S63
S Y12
SET S51
X14
S50
S SET S63
Y7
S63
X11
S Y16
SET S60
S62 S63 X16
S60 S S S0
S Y13
RET
END
M1002
S0 Y0
X0
S20 Y1
X1 X2 X3
S30 Y2 S31 Y3 S32 Y4
X4 X5 X6
S40 Y5 S41 Y6
X7 X10
S50 Y7 S51 Y10 S52 Y11 S53 Y12

X11 X12 X13 X14
S60 Y13 S61 Y14 S62 Y15 S63 Y16
X15 X16
S70 Y17
S0
X17
S0

Combination example 2: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence
and convergence)
M1002
ZRST S0 S127 M1002
S0
SET S0
S0 X0 X0
S SET S30
S30
S30 Y0
S Y0 X1
X1 X1
SET S31
X1 S31 Y1 S32 Y2
SET S32
X2 X3
S31
S Y1
X2 S33 Y3
SET S33
X4
S32
S Y2
X3 S34 Y4 S36 Y6
SET S33
S33 X5 X6
S Y3
X4 S35 Y5 S37 Y7
SET S34
X7
SET S36
S34
S Y4 S0
X5
SET S35
S35
S Y5
S36
S Y6
X6
SET S37
S37
S Y7
S35 S37 X7
S S S0
RET
END
Restrictions on the divergence procedure:

1. Up to 8 divergence step points could be used in a divergence procedure. In following diagram, maximum
divergence step points after step point S20 are 8 (S30 - S37).
2. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural divergence or simultaneous convergence procedures. In
following diagram, 4 step points after step point S40, 7 step points after step point S41 and 5 step points after step
point S42. In this procedure, maximum is 16 loops.
3. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.
M1002
S0
X0
S20 Y0
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10
S30 Y1 S31 Y2 S32 Y3 S32 Y4 S34 Y5 S35 Y6 S36 Y7 S37 Y10
X11 X12 X14 X15 X15 X15 X16 X17

RST
X13 SET S42 Y13
S40 Y11 OUT S41 Y12 S36
S0
S20 X25
X20 X26 X27 X30 X31
X21 X22 X23 X24
S59 Y25 S60 Y26 S61 Y27 S62 Y30 S63 Y31
OUT S58 Y24
S50 Y14 S51 Y15 S52 Y16 OUT
S53 Y17 S54 Y20 S55 Y21 S56 Y22 S57 Y23 S20 X40 X41 X42
S20 X37
X32 X33 X34 RST
X43
S70 Y32 S71 Y33 S72 Y34 X35 X36 S75 Y37
S58 S76 Y40
S73 Y35 S74 Y36 X47
SET X50
X44
X45 X46 S0 OUT
S80 Y41
S42
X51 S81 Y42
SET X52
S0 SET
S0

4.6 IST command
API Applicable models

IST Manual/Auto Control ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
60
Bit devices Word devices

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command (7 STEPS)
S ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
IST －－
D1 ¼ execution
D2 ¼
32-bit command
Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.
－－－－
The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and
D2＞D1. Flag: M1040~M1047.
Refer to following for detail.
IST command only can be used one time in program.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
: The starting input number of specific operation mode. : The smallest

Command
number for the specific status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest
Explanation
number for the specific status step point under the auto mode.
The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step
ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient
auto control command.
Program M1000
Example IST X10 S20 S60
1
X10: Individual operation (Manual operation) X14: Continuous operation
X11: Zero point return X15: Zero point return start switch
X12: Step operation X16: Start switch
X13: One cycle operation X17: Stop switch
When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited S0: Manual operation/initial state step point
M1041: Movement start S1: Zero point return/initial state step point
M1042: Status pulse S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
M1047: STL monitor enable
When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step
point of this state can’t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9 step
points, S0 initiates “manual operation”, S1 initiates “zero point return operation” and S2
initiates “auto operation”. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three initial state
step points first written in program.
When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won’t have any actions
once one of S10~S19 is On.
When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won’t have any actions
once one of between to is On or M1043=On

Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command):

Program
Example Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and
2 moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control.
Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,
lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order.
I/O Device:
Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3
Left-limit X1 (big balls) (small balls)
Y0
Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y2
Y1
Upper-limit X5
Big/small Big Small
sensor X0
Control panel
Power start Zero return X15 Auto start X16
Power stop Auto stop X17
Collect Raise Shift

balls robot arm to right Step X12
Zero return X11 One cycle

X20 X22 X24 operation X13
Release Lower Shift
balls robot arm to left Continuous
Manual
operation X10 operation X14
X21 X23 X25
Big/small sensor X0.

The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3
(small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5.
Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and
collect balls Y4.
START circuit:
X0 X1 Y4
M1044
M1000
IST X10 S20 S80

Manual operation mode:

S0 X20
S SET Y4 Collect balls
X21
RST Y4 Release balls
X22 Y1
Y0 Raise robot arm
X23 Y0 Condition interlock
Y1 Lower robot arm
X24 X4 Y3
Y2 Shift to right Condition interlock
X25 X4 Y2 Raise robot arm to the
Y3 Shift to left upper-limit (X4 is ON)
Zero point return mode:
SFC figure:
S1
X15
S10 RST Y4 Release balls
RST Y1 Stop lowering robot arm

Raise robot arm to the
X4 Y0
upper-limit (X4 is ON)
S11 RST Y2 Stop shifting to right
Shift to left and shift to

Y3
X1 the left-limit (X1 is On)
S12 SET M1043 Start zero return completed flag
RST S12 Zero return operation completed

Ladder Diagram:
S1 X15
S SET S10 Enter zero return operation mode
S10
S RST Y4 Release balls

Y0 upper-limit (X4 is ON)
X4
SET S11
S11
S RST Y2 Stop shifting to right
Y3
X1 Shift to left and shift to
SET S12 the left-limit (X1 is On)
S12
S SET M1043 Start zero return completed flag
Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):
SFC figure:
S2
M1041
M1044
S20 Y1
X5 X5
X0 X0
S30 SET Y4 S40 SET Y4

T0 T1
S31 Y0 S41 Y0
X4 X4
X2 X3
S32 Y2 S42 Y2
X2 X3
S50 Y1
X5
S60 RST Y4
TMR T2 K30
T2
S70 Y0
X4
X1
S80 Y3
X1
S2

Ladder Diagram:
S2 M1041 M1044
S SET S20 Enter auto operation mode
S20
S Y1 Lower robot arm
X5 X0
SET S30
X5 X0
SET S40
S30
TMR T0 K30
T0
SET S31
S31
S Y0 Raise robot arm to the
X4
SET S32
S32 X2
S Y2 Shift to right
X2
SET S50
S40
TMR T1 K30
T1
SET S41
S41
S Raise robot arm to the
X4
SET S42
S42 X3
S Y2 Shift to right
X3
SET S50
S50
X5
SET S60
S60
TMR T2 K30
T2
SET S70
S70
X4
SET S80
S80 X1
S Y3 Shift to left and shift to
the left-limit (X1 is On)
X1
S2
RET
END

5 Application Commands
5.1 Summary of Parameters
Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS

API Function Page
Classification Command
16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit
00 CJ – 3 Conditional jump 3 3 3 3 – 6-1
01 CALL – 3 Call subroutine 3 3 3 3 – 6-5
02 SRET – – Subroutine return 3 3 3 1 – 6-5
03 IRET – – Interrupt return 3 3 3 1 – 6-7
Loop Control
04 EI – – Enable interrupt 3 3 3 1 – 6-7

05 DI – – Disable interrupt 3 3 3 1 – 6-7
Terminate the main routine
06 FEND – – 3 3 3 1 – 6-11
program
07 WDT – 3 Reset the watchdog timer 3 3 3 1 – 6-12
08 FOR – – Nested loops begin 3 3 3 3 – 6-14
09 NEXT – – Nested loops end 3 3 3 1 – 6-14
10 CMP DCMP 3 Comparison output 3 3 3 7 13 6-17
11 ZCP DZCP 3 Zone comparison 3 3 3 9 17 6-18
12 MOV DMOV 3 Data Move 3 3 3 5 9 6-19
Transmission
Comparison
13 SMOV – 3 Shift move – 3 3 11 – 6-20

14 CML DCML 3 Counter transfer 3 3 3 5 9 6-22
15 BMOV – 3 Block move 3 3 3 7 – 6-23
16 FMOV DFMOV 3 Multiple devices movement 3 3 3 7 13 6-24
17 XCH DXCH 3 Data exchange 3 3 3 5 9 6-25
18 BCD DBCD 3 Convert BIN data into BCD 3 3 3 5 9 6-26
19 BIN DBIN 3 Convert BCD data into BIN 3 3 3 5 9 6-27
20 ADD DADD 3 Perform the addition of BIN data 3 3 3 7 13 6-29
Perform the subtraction of BIN
Four Fundamental Operations of
21 SUB DSUB 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-30

data
Perform the multiplication of BIN
22 MUL DMUL 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-31
data
23 DIV DDIV 3 Perform the division of BIN data 3 3 3 7 13 6-32
Arithmetic
24 INC DINC 3 Perform the addition of 1 3 3 3 3 5 6-34

25 DEC DDEC 3 Perform the subtraction of 1 3 3 3 3 5 6-34
Perform the logical product
26 WAND DAND 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-35
(AND) operation
Perform the logical sum (OR)
27 WOR DOR 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-36
operation
Perform the exclusive logical add
28 WXOR DXOR 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-37
(XOR) operation
29 NEG DNEG 3 Complement of 2 3 3 3 3 5 6-38
30 ROR DROR 3 Rotate to the right 3 3 3 5 9 6-41
31 ROL DROL 3 Rotate to the left 3 3 3 5 9 6-42
Rotate to the right with the carry
Rotation and Displacement
32 RCR DRCR 3 3 3 3 5 9 6-43

flag attached
Rotate to the left with the carry
33 RCL DRCL 3 3 3 3 5 9 6-44
flag attached
Shift the data of device specified
34 SFTR – 3 3 3 3 9 – 6-45
to the right
35 SFTL – 3 – 3 3 9 – 6-46
to the left
36 WSFR – 3 Shift the register to the right – 3 3 9 – 6-47
37 WSFL – 3 Shift the register to the left – 3 3 9 – 6-48
38 SFWR – 3 Displacement is wrote – 3 3 7 – 6-49
39 SFRD – 3 Displacement is read – 3 3 7 – 6-50
Resets a range of device
40 ZRST – 3 3 3 3 5 – 6-51
specified
41 DECO – 3 8 → 256 bits decoder 3 3 3 7 – 6-53


API Function Page
42 ENCO – 3 256 → 8 bits encoder 3 3 3 7 – 6-54
43 SUM DSUM 3 Sum of ON bits 3 3 3 5 9 6-56
Data Operation
44 BON DBON 3 Determine the ON bits 3 3 3 7 13 6-56

45 MEAN DMEAN 3 Mean value 3 3 3 7 13 6-57
46 ANS – – Alarm device output – 3 3 7 – 6-58
47 ANR – 3 Alarm device reset – 3 3 1 – 6-58
48 SQR DSQR 3 Square root of BIN 3 3 3 5 9 6-60
Convert BIN integer to binary
49 FLT DFLT 3 3 3 3 5 9 6-61
floating point
50 REF – 3 I/O refresh 3 3 3 5 – 7-1
Refresh and adjust the response
51 REFF – 3 – 3 3 3 – 7-2
time of input filter
52 MTR – – Input matrix – 3 3 9 – 7-3
High Speed Processing
High speed counter comparison

53 – DHSCS – 3 3 3 – 13 7-6
SET
54 – DHSCR – 3 3 3 – 13 7-15
RESET
Zone comparison (High-speed
55 – DHSZ – – 3 3 – 17 7-17
counter)
56 SPD – – Speed detection – 3 3 7 – 7-24
57 PLSY DPLSY – Pulse output 3 3 3 7 13 7-25
58 PWM – – Pulse width modulation output 3 3 3 7 – 7-30
Pulse wave output with
59 PLSR DPLSR – 3 3 3 9 17 7-31
acceleration/deceleration speed
60 IST – – Manual/Auto control 3 3 3 7 – 7-36
Convenience Command
61 SER DSER 3 Multiple devices comparison – 3 3 9 17 7-42

62 ABSD DABSD – Absolute cam control – 3 3 9 17 7-43
63 INCD – – Relative cam control – 3 3 9 – 7-44
64 TTMR – – Alternate timer – 3 3 5 – 7-46
65 STMR – – Special timer – 3 3 7 – 7-48
66 ALT – – On/Off alternate command 3 3 3 3 – 7-49
67 RAMP – – Ramp signal – 3 3 9 – 7-50
69 SORT – – Data sort – 3 3 11 – 7-52
70 TKY DTKY – 10-key keypad input – 3 3 7 13 7-54
71 HKY DHKY – 16-key keypad input – 3 3 9 17 7-56
External I/O Display
72 DSW – – Digital Switch input – 3 3 9 – 7-58

73 SEGD – 3 Decode the 7-step display panel 3 3 3 5 – 7-60
74 SEGL – – 7-step display scan output 3 3 3 7 – 7-61
75 ARWS – – Arrow keypad input – 3 3 9 – 7-65
76 ASC – – ASCII code conversion – 3 3 11 – 7-66
77 PR – – ASCII code output – 3 3 5 – 7-67
78 FROM DFROM 3 Read special module CR data 3 3 3 9 17 7-69
79 TO DTO 3 Special module CR data write in 3 3 3 9 17 7-69
80 RS – – Serial data communication 3 3 3 9 – 7-74
Octal number system
81 PRUN DPRUN 3 – 3 3 5 9 7-87
transmission
Serial I/O
82 ASCII – 3 Convert HEX to ASCII 3 3 3 7 – 7-88

83 HEX – 3 Convert ASCII to HEX 3 3 3 7 – 7-92
84 CCD – 3 Check sum – 3 3 7 – 7-95
85 VRRD – 3 Volume read – 3 3 5 – 7-97
86 VRSC – 3 Volume scale – 3 3 5 – 7-99
87 ABS DABS 3 Absolute value 3 3 3 3 5 7-100
88 PID DPID – PID calculation 3 3 3 9 – 7-100


API Function Page
89 PLS – – Rising-edge output 3 3 3 3 – 3-13
90 LDP – – Rising-edge detection operation 3 3 3 3 – 3-11
91 LDF – – Falling-edge detection operation 3 3 3 3 – 3-11
Series connection command for
92 ANDP – – the rising-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-11
operation
Basic Command
93 ANDF – – the falling-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-12

operation
Parallel connection command for
94 ORP – – the rising-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-12
operation
95 ORF – – the falling-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-13
operation
96 TMR – – Timer 3 3 3 4 – 3-8
97 CNT DCNT – Counter 3 3 3 4 6 3-8
98 INV – – Inverting operation 3 3 3 1 – 3-15
99 PLF – – Falling-edge output 3 3 3 3 – 3-13
100 MODRD – – MODBUS data Read 3 3 3 7 – 8-1
Communication command of Delta
101 MODWR – – MODBUS data write in 3 3 3 7 – 8-5

VFD-A series drive forward
102 FWD – – 3 3 3 7 – 8-8
command
AC Motor Drives
VFD-A series drive reverse

103 REV – – 3 3 3 7 – 8-9
command
VFD-A series drive stop
104 STOP – – 3 3 3 7 – 8-9
command
105 RDST – – VFD-A series drive status read 3 3 3 5 – 8-11
VFD-A series drive abnormal
106 RSTEF – – 3 3 3 5 – 8-13
reset
107 LRC – 3 LRC check sum – 3 3 7 – 8-13
108 CRC – 3 CRC check sum – 3 3 7 – 8-15
109 SWRD – 3 Digital switch read – 3 3 3 – 8-18
110 – DECMP 3 Binary floating point comparison 3 3 3 – 13 8-19
Binary floating point zone
111 – DEZCP 3 3 3 3 – 17 8-20
comparison
116 – DRAD 3 Degree Radian – 3 3 – 9 8-21
117 – DDEG 3 Radian Degree – 3 3 – 9 8-21
Convert binary floating point to
Floating Operation
118 – DEBCD 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-23

decimal floating point
Convert decimal floating point to
119 – DEBIN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-23
binary floating point
120 – DEADD 3 Binary floating point addition 3 3 3 – 13 8-24
121 – DESUB 3 Binary floating point subtraction 3 3 3 – 13 8-25
Binary floating point
122 – DEMUL 3 3 3 3 – 13 8-26
multiplication
123 – DEDIV 3 Binary floating point division 3 3 3 – 13 8-27
Perform exponent operation of
124 – DEXP 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-28
Perform natural logarithm
125 – DLN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-29
operation of binary floating point
Perform logarithm operation of
126 – DLOG 3 3 3 3 – 13 8-30
Square root of binary floating
127 – DESQR 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-31
point


API Function Page
Perform power operation of
128 – DPOW 3 3 3 3 – 13 8-32
129 INT DINT 3 3 3 3 5 9 8-33
BIN integer
Sine operation of binary floating
130 – DSIN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-34
point
Cosine operation of binary
131 – DCOS 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-36
floating point
Floating Operation
Tangent operation of binary

132 – DTAN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-37
floating point
Arcsine operation of binary
133 – DASIN 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-39
floating point
Arccosine operation of binary
134 – DACOS 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-40
floating point
Arctangent operation of binary
135 – DATAN 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-41
floating point
Hyperbolic sine operation of
136 – DSINH 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-42
Hyperbolic cosine operation of
137 – DCOSH 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-42
Hyperbolic tangent operation of
138 – DTANH 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-43
General pulse width modulation
144 GPWM – – – – 7 8-44
output
145 FTC – – Fuzzy temperature control – – 9 8-45
Additional Command
147 SWAP DSWAP 3 Swap high/low byte 3 3 3 3 5 8-48

148 MEMR DMEMR 3 MEMORY read – 3 3 7 13 8-49
149 MEMW DMEMW 3 MEMORY write in – 3 3 7 13 8-50
150 MODRW – – MODBUS data read/write in 3 3 3 11 – 9-1
151 PWD – – Input pulse width detection – – 3 5 – 9-11
Start to measure the execution
152 RTMU – – – – 3 5 – 9-11
time of I interrupt
End to measure the execution
153 RTMD – – – – 3 3 – 9-12
time of I interrupt
154 RAND – – Random value – 3 3 9 – 9-13
155 ABSR DABSR – ABS current value read – – 3 7 13 9-14
Positioning
Control
156 ZRN DZRN – Zero point return – – 3 9 17 9-18

157 PLSV DPLSV – Variable speed pulse output – – 3 7 13 9-21
158 DRVI DDRVI – Relative positioning – – 3 9 17 9-22
159 DRVA DDRVA – Absolute positioning – – 3 9 17 9-26
Perpetual calendar data
160 TCMP – 3 – 3 3 11 – 9-35
comparison
Perpetual Calendar
Perpetual calendar data zone

161 TZCP – 3 – 3 3 9 – 9-36
comparison
162 TADD – 3 Perpetual calendar data addition – 3 3 7 – 9-37
163 TSUB – 3 – 3 3 7 – 9-38
subtraction
166 TRD – 3 Perpetual calendar data read – 3 3 3 – 9-40
167 TWR – 3 Perpetual calendar data write in – 3 3 3 – 9-42
169 HOUR DHOUR – Hour meter – 3 3 7 13 9-44
170 GRY DGRY 3 Convert BIN to Gray code – 3 3 5 9 9-45
Gray Code 171 GBIN DGBIN 3 Convert Gray code to BIN – 3 3 5 9 9-46
180 MAND – 3 Matrix AND – – 3 9 – 9-47
181 MOR – 3 Matrix OR – – 3 9 – 9-49


API Function Page
182 MXOR – 3 Matrix XOR – – 3 9 – 9-50
183 MNOR – 3 Matrix NOR – – 3 9 – 9-51
Matrix Handling
184 MINV – 3 Matrix inverse – – 3 7 – 9-52

185 MCMP – 3 Matrix compare – – 3 9 – 9-52
186 MBRD – 3 Matrix bit read – – 3 7 – 9-54
187 MBWR – 3 Matrix bit write – – 3 7 – 9-55
188 MBS – 3 Matrix bit shift – – 3 7 – 9-56
189 MBR – 3 Matrix bit rotate – – 3 7 – 9-58
190 MBC – 3 Matrix bit state count – – 3 7 – 9-59
High-level
196 HST DHST 3 High speed counter – – 3 3 – 9-60
Command
215 LD& DLD& – S1 & S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-1
216 LD| DLD| – S1 | S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-1
Contact Type Logic
217 LD^ DLD^ – S1 ^ S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-1

Operation
218 AND& DAND& – S1 & S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-2

219 AND| DAND| – S1 | S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-2
220 AND^ DAND^ – S1 ^ S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-2
221 OR& DOR& – S1 & S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-3
222 OR| DOR| – S1 | S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-3
223 OR^ DOR^ – S1 ^ S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-3
224 LD= DLD= – S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
225 LD> DLD> – S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
226 LD< DLD< – S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
228 LD<> DLD<> – S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
Contact Type Compare Command
229 LD<= DLD<= – S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4

230 LD>= DLD>= – S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
232 AND= DAND= – S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
233 AND> DAND> – S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
234 AND< DAND< – S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
236 AND<> DAND<> – S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
237 AND<= DAND<= – S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
238 AND>= DAND>= – S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
240 OR= DOR= – S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
241 OR> DOR> – S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
242 OR< DOR< – S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
244 OR<> DOR<> – S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
245 OR<= DOR<= – S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
246 OR>= DOR>= – S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.
Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don’t possess pulse execution command (P command).

5.2 Application Command Structure
Many commands may be divided into an command and a operand as follows:
Command : Indicates the executive functions of the command

Operand : Indicates the device that calculates the operand
A command usually allows one step to be used and an operand usually allows two or four steps to be used
based on the command is a 16-bit or 32-bit command.
Explanation of the format of application command:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

41 DECO P S D n 8 to 256 bit Encoder ES/EX/SS EP EH
15 Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEPS) 8

14 X Y M S K H T C D E F Continuous Pulse
DECO execution DECOP
execution
13 S
32-bit command 9
D
n
12 Flag: None 10
Note: When D is a bit device, n=1~8
11
When D is a word device, n=1~4
Please refer the general specifications of each series
models to see the usage range of each device.
API number for application command

Upper row indicates 16-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available
in 16-bit command.
Lower row indicates 32-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available
in 32-bit command. A “D“ is added to the head of the mnemonic code to indicate 32-bit command. (For
example: API 12 DMOV)
The mnemonic code of application command
A symbol “☺” in the upper row indicates the command is generally applied by using pulse
execution command.
A “P“ in the lower row indicates the command is used with the pulse execution command. (For
example: API 12 MOVP)
The operand format of application command
The description of application command function
Applicable models of DVP series PLC
The step numbers occupied by the command in 16-bit operation, the name of continuous execution
command and pulse executive command
The step numbers occupied by the command in 32-bit operation, the name of continuous execution
command and pulse execution command
The related flag of the application command
A symbol “＊” is the device can use index register.
Note
A symbol “＊” is given to device which can be used for this operand
Device name
Device type

Application Commands Input
Some application commands are only combined by command codes API, but most of them are combined by
command codes API and several operands.
The application commands of DVP-Series PLC are controlled by command codes API 00 to API 246. Each
command code has its own meaning, for example, API 12 stands for MOV (move data). When using ladder
diagram editor to input programs, you will need to type in the command “MOV”. If using the HPP to input the
program, we will have to enter the API command codes. Each application command has its unique operand.
X0
MOV K10 D10
command operand
This command is to move the value of operand to the appointed operand.
Source operand: if there is more than 1 source operand, then we use , … to display.
Destination operand: if there is more than one operand, then we use , …. to display.
If the operand may only be represented as a constant K, H or register then we will use , , ,
, , to display.
The Length of Operand (16-bit or 32-bit command)
The length of operand can be divided into two groups: 16-bit and 32-bit to process different length data.
A ”D” before a command separates 32-bit from 16-bit commands.
16-bit MOV command
X0 When X0=On, K10 has been sent to D10.

MOV K10 D10
32-bit DMOV command

When X1=On, Data of (D11, D10) have been
X1
D10 D20 sent to (D21, D20)
Continuous execution command and Pulse execution command
The execution type of command can be divided into two types: continuous execution command and pulse
execution command. Due to the execution time is shorter when the commands have not been executived,
please use the pulse execution command as far as possible to reduce the scan cycle of programming. A “P” to
be added directly after the command, which is pulse execution commands. Most used commands usually

use pulse execution commands for application, for example, INC, DEC and MOV etc. related commands.
Therefore, pulse execution commands are identified by the symbol ☺ on the right top of the command.
Pulse execution command

When X0 goes from OFF→ON, the MOVP command
X0
D10 D12 will be executed one time and command cannot be
re-executed again in the scan of program scan. This
is called pulse execution command.
Continuous execution command

When X1=ON, the MOV command can be
X1
MOV D10 D12 re-executed again in every scan of program. This is
called continuous execution command.
The above figures show that when X0, X1=OFF, the command will not be executed and the contents of
the destination operand “D” will retmain unchanged.
The Assigned Devices of Operands
1. Bit device such as X, Y, M, S can be combined together and are defined as the WORD device. In
application commands, the bit device can serve as the word device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS) to store the
numeric values to operate.
2. Data register D, Timer T, Counter C and Index Register E, F are all assigned devices of operands.
3. A data register is usually a 16-bit register and it is also a register D. Hence, assigning a 32-bit register also
means assigning two register D with continuous numbers.
4. If the operand of 32-bit command assign D0, the 32-bit data register which is combined by D1 and D0 will
be occupied. D1 is the upper 16-bit and D0 is the lower 16-bit. The using rule of timer T and 16-bit
Counter(C0~C199) is the same.
5. When the 32-bit counter(C200~C255) is used as Data register, one point indicates 32-bit length. Only the
operand of 32-bit command can be assigned, the operand of 16-bit command can not be assigned.
Operand Data format
1. X, Y, M, S are only be single point ON/OFF, these are defined as a bit device.
2. However, 16-bit (or 32-bit) device T, C, D, E, F are data registers and are defined as Word device.
3. We also can add Kn in front of X, Y, M and S to be defined as word device, whereas n=1 means 4-bit. So
16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0
means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.

X0 When X0=On, move the contents of M0 to M7 to D10

MOV K2M0 D10
segments 0 to 7, and segments 8 to 15 are set to 0.
Specified Number of Digits
16-bit command 32-bit command
Specified Number of Digits (16-bit command): Specified Number of Digits (32-bit command):
K-32,768~K+32,767 K-2,147,483,648~K+2,147,483,647
16-bit command: (K1~K4) 32-bit command: (K1~K8)
K1 (4 points) 0~15 K1 (4 points) 0~15
K2 (8 points) 0~255 K2 (8 points) 0~255
K3 (12 points) 0~4,095 K3 (12 points) 0~4,095
K4 (16 points) -32,768~+32,767 K4 (16 points) 0~65,535
K5 (20 points) 0~1,048,575
K6 (24 points) 0~167,772,165
K7 (28 points) 0~268,435,455
K8 (32 points) -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Flags
1. General Flags
For the operation result of application commands, there are following flags of DVP series PLC:
Example : M1020 : Zero flag M1022 : Carry flag M1021 : Borrow flag
M1029 : Command execution completed flag
When executing the command, all flags will be turned to ON or OFF by the operation result of
application commands. However, when the command has not been executed, the ON/OFF state of
the flags will remain. Therefore, please notice that the above flags may not only be in connection with
specified commands but also many commands.
The program example of command execution completed flag , i.e. M1029
When the conditional contact is ON, the digital switch input command (DSW) will specify 4 output
points with 0.1 second frequency and circulate in order automatically to read the values of DSW.
During the intermediate period of operation, if the conditional contact is OFF, the DSW command is
suspended and the above-mentioned command will be re-executed from the beginning of the
program cycle.When the conditional contact is ON again, please refer the circuit below if you desire
to stop the interrupt.

X0
SET M0 When X0=ON, DSW command is activated.
M0 When X0=OFF, wait for the program cycle of
DSW X10 Y10 D0 K0 DSW command being completed, after
M1029 M1029=ON, then M0 will be OFF.
RST M0
2. Error Operation Flags
If the combination of the application command is error and/or the assigned devices of operands are out of
range, errors will occur and the error flags and numbers in the following table will be shown during the
excution of the application commands.
M1067 When error operations occur, M1067=On, D1067 will show the error number and D1069 will
D1067 show the error address.
D1069 If other errors occur, the contents of D1067 and D1069 will be refreshed. (when the error is
resetd, M1067=Off)
M1068 When error operations occur, M1068=On, D1068 will show the error address.
D1068 If other errors occur, the contents of D1068 will not be refreshed, M1068 must use RST
command to reset to OFF, otherwise the error will remain.
3. Flags for Extending Functions
Some application commands can extend the functions by using some special flags.
Example: command RS can switch transmission mode 8-bit and 16-bit by using M1161.
The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands:
Some commands can be used several times in the program, but some of them only can be used twice or even
once in the program. However, these commands can be modified by index register to extend more functions of
the commands in the operands.
1. Only can be used once in the program:
API 58 (PWM) (ES/EX/SS models) API 60 (IST) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA/EH models)

API 74 (SEGL) (ES/EX/SS models) API 88 (PID) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models)
2. Only can be used twice in the program:
API 57 (PLSY) (ES/EX/SS models) API 59 (PLSR) (ES/EX/SS models)

API 74 (SEGL) (EH models) API 77 (PR) (EP/SA/EH models)
3. Only can be used four times in the program:
API 169 (HOUR) (EP/SA models)
4. Only can be used eight times in the program:
API 64 (TTMR) (EP/SA models)

5. API 53 (DHSCS) and API 54 (DHSCR), these commands only can be executed simultaneously less than four
times in the program of DVP-ES/EX/SS models.
6. API 53 (DHSCS), API 54 (DHSCR), API 55(DHSZ) these commands only can be executed simultaneously
less than six times in the program of DVP-EP/SA models.
The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands Simultaneously:
There is no limited using time for executing the same command in the program. However, there are limited
using times for executing the commands simultaneously.
1. API 52 (MTR), API 56 (SPD), API 62 (ABSD), API 63 (INCD), API 69 (SORT), API 70 (TKY), API 71
(HKY), API 72 (DSW) (EP models), API 74 (SEGL)(EP models), API 75 (ARWS), API 80 (RS), API 100
(MODRD), API 101 (MODWR), API 102 (FWD), API 103 (REV), API 104 (STOP), API 105 (RDST), API
106 (RSTEF), API 150 (MODRW), API 151 (PWD), these commands only can be executed simultaneously
once in the program.
2. API 57 (PLSY), API 58 (PWM), API 59 (PLSR), API 72 (DSW) (EH models), these commands only can be
executed simultaneously twice in the program.
3. API 169 (HOUR) (EH models) only can be executed four times in the program.
4. API 64 (TTMR) (EH models) only can be executed eight times in the program.
5. In the program of DVP EH models, there is no limited using time for hardware high speed counter related
commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the
commands simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one memory unit and DHSZ command will
use two memory units. When these commands are executed simultaneously, the total used memory units
can not exceed eight memory units. If exceeding eight memory units, system will totalize the used memory
units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will be ignored.
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values
Device such as X, Y, M, S are bit devices and there are only two state, ON and OFF. However, T, C, D, E,
F are data registers and are defined as word devices. Although bit device can only be single point
ON/OFF but it can be used as numeric value in the operands of application commands if adding the
specified bit device in front. The “specified bit device” is the “specified number of digit” and it would look
like Kn where “n” can be a number from the range of 0 to 8.
16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0
means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.

valid data
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
low byte
transmit
clear to 0
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
equal to
low byte
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Transmit K1M0, K2M0, K3M0 to 16-bit registers and insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted.
It’s the same as sending K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, K7M0 to 32-bit registers and the
insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted also.
The insufficient upper bit will be defined as 0 if the content of the operand assign K1 to K3 in 16-bit
operation or assign K4 to K7 in 32-bit operation. Therefore, it means the operation result is positive.
M0
The BCD value combined by X4 to X13 will be converted to
BIN K2X4 D0
D0 as BIN value.
The numbers of Bit device can specify freely. However, it is recommended to use 0 in the lowest digit
decimal place of X and Y devices (X0, X10, X20…Y0, Y10, Y20). For M and S Series, it is recommended
to use the multiple 8 but the use of 0 is the most device efficient, like M0, M10, M20…etc.
Assign Continuous Numbers
For example , like D date register, the continuous numbers of D are D0, D1, D2, D3, D4…etc.
For the bit device, the continuous numbers are shown as follows:
K1X0 K1X4 K1X10 K1X14……

K2Y0 K2Y10 K2Y20 Y2X30……
K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36…….
K4S0 K4S16 K4S32 K4S48…….
The bit device numbers are all of the above. To avoiding errors, please do not skip over the continuous
numbers. Furthermore, if K4Y0 is used in 32-bit operation, the upper 16bit is defined as 0. Therefore, it is
recommended to use K8Y0 in 32bit operation.
Floating Point Operation
The internal operation of DVP series PLC usually is operated by “BIN integer” format. When performing integer
division operation, the decimal point will be discarded. For example: 40 ÷ 3 = 13, remainder is 1 and the
decimal point will be discarded. But if use floating point operation, the decimal point can be given.

The application commands related to floating point operation are shown in the following table.
API 49 (FLT), API 110 (D ECMP), API 111 (D EZCP), API 116 (D RAD),
API 117 (D DEG), API 118 (D EBCD), API 119 (D EBIN), API 120 (D EADD),
API 121 (D ESUB), API 122 (D EMUL), API 123 (D EDIV), API 124 (D EXP),
API 125 (D LN), API 126 (D LOG), API 127 (D ESQR), API 128 (D POW)
API 129 (INT) API 130 (D SIN) API 131 (D COS) API 132 (D TAN)
API 133 (D ASIN) API 134 (D ACOS) API 135 (D ATAN) API 136 (D SINH)
API 137 (D COSH) API 138 (D TANH)
Binary Floating Point
DVP PLC represents floating point number with 32-bit number by IEEE754 and the format is in the following:
8-bit 23-bit
S exponent mantissa
b 31 b0
Sign bit
0: positive
1: negative
Equation (− 1) × 2 E − B × 1.M ; B = 127

S
Therefore, the range of 32-bit floating is from ±2-126 to ±2+128, i.e. from ±1.1755×10-38 to ±3.4028×10+38.
Example 1: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23
Step 1: convert 23 to binary number: 23.0=10111
Step 2: Normalizing the binary: 10111=1.0111 × 24, 0111 is mantissa and 4 is an exponent.
Step 3: get exponent: E-B=4 →E-127=4 E=131=100000112
Step 4: We can now combine the sign, exponent, and normalized mantissa into the binary IEEE short real
representation.
0 10000011 011100000000000000000002=41B8000016
Example 2: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number –23
The conversion steps are the same as decimal number 23. Only need to modify sign bit from 0 to 1 to get value
1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016
DVP PLC also uses two registers with continuous number to store binary floating point. The following is the example
that uses register (D1, D0) to store binary floating point.
D1(b15~b0) D0(b15~b0)
7 6 5 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 bits of exponent 23 bits of constant

E0~E7=0 or 1 A0~A22=0 or 1
sign bit (0: positive 1:negative)

When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0.

Decimal Floating Point

The binary floating point is not accepted by most people. Therefore, binary floating point format can be converted
to decimal floating point format for people to perform the operation of decimal numbers. However, the DVP series
PLC use binary floating point to perform the operation of decimal numbers.
Decimal floating point is stored in the register with 2 continuous numbers. The register with small number stores
constant and the register with larger number stores exponent.
For example, using register (D1, D0) to store a decimal floating point.
Decimal floating point = [constant D0] X 10 [exponent D1 ]
constant D0 = ±1,000~±9,999
exponent D1 = - 41~+35
the most significant bit of (D1, D0) is symbol bit.
Besides, constant 100 doesn’t exist in D0 due to 100 will be shown with 1,000×10-1.
The range of decimal number is from ±1175×10-41 to ±3402×10+38.
Decimal floating point can be used in the following commands.
The conversion command for Binary floating point Decimal floating point (D EBCD)
The conversion command for Decimal floating point Binary floating point (D EBIN)
Zero flag (M1020), Borrow flag (M1021) and carry flag (M1022)
The flags that corresponds to the floating command are:

Zero flag: when the result is 0, M1020=On.
Borrow flag: when the result is least than the minimum unit, M1021=On
Carry flag: when the absolute value of result exceeds usage range, M1022=On
5.4 Index register E, F
The index register is 16-bit register. There are 2 devices for ES/EX/SS models (E and F), 8 devices for EP
models (E0~E3, F0~F3) and 16 devices for EH models (E0~E7, F0~F7).
E and F are also 16-bit register just the same as general

register. It can be wrote/read freely.
16-bit 16-bit If using a 32-bit register, you should specify E. In this

E0 F0 condition, F will be covered by E and cannot be used
anymore; otherwise the contents of E will become incorrect.
32-bit
(When PLC start-up, it is commended to use MOVP
E0 F0 command to clear the contents of F and reset it to 0)
upper bit lower bit
When using 32-bit index register, the combination of E, F are
as follows. (E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2)…(E7, F7).

As the left figure shown, the contents of operand will change
MOV K20E0 D10F0 according to the contents of E, F. and we name this kind of
modification as “Index”.
E0=8 F0=14 For example, E0=8 and K20E0 all represent constant
20+8=28 10+14=24 K28(20+8). If the contact is ON, constant K28 will be
K28 D24 transmit transmitted to register D24.
Devices can use Index register to modify in ES/EX/SS Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D.
Devices can use Index register to modify in EP Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
Devices can use Index register to modify in EH Series are: P, I, X, Y, M, S, K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
The above device can use index register E, F to modify. However, index register E, F cannot modify itself,
either Kn. (K4M0E0 is available, K0E0M0 is not available). In each application command, if the symbol “＊” is
added in the table of operand, it means the device can use index register E, F to modify.
Index register E, F can be used to modify P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D these devices under
certain condition. Two devices, E or F can be specified when using 16-bit register. If using index register E, F to
modify constant K, H in 32-bit command, only one device, E can be specified.
When constant (K,H) is used to be index function in WPLSoft command mode, it needs to use symbol
“@”.
Example: ”MOV K10@E0 D0F0”

The program example of index: T0 can use index register F0 to shorten the program and
display the 7 present value of T0~T9 on the external 7-step
The digit switch input X3~X0, display panel.

5 which be selected by Timer T
M1000
BIN K1X0 F0
(X3~X0)BCD (F0)BIN
DVP - PLC BCD T0F0 K4Y0

(T0F0)BIN (Y17~Y0)BCD
When F0=0~9, T0F0=T0~T9.
The 7-step display output Y17~Y0, which be

used to display the present value of Timer T
There are limited using times of some commands. If using the index register E, F to modify, the final result can
be the same as the operation result of using the same command repeatedly.

5.5 Index for Commands

• Sort by Characters

Classification A P I Function Page
Command
87 ABS DABS 3 Absolute value 3 3 3 3 5 7-100

62 ABSD DABSD – Absolute cam control – 3 3 9 17 7-43
155 ABSR DABSR – ABS current value read – – 3 7 13 9-14
20 ADD DADD 3 Perform the addition of BIN data 3 3 3 7 13 6-29
66 ALT – – On/Off alternate command 3 3 3 3 – 7-49
218 AND& DAND& – S1 & S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-2
220 AND^ DAND^ – S1 ^ S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-2
219 AND| DAND| – S1 | S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-2
234 AND< DAND< – S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
237 AND<= DAND<= – S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
236 AND<> DAND<> – S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
232 AND= DAND= – S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
233 AND> DAND> – S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
238 AND>= DAND>= – S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-5
A 93 ANDF – – the falling-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-12
operation
92 ANDP – – the rising-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-11
operation
47 ANR – 3 Alarm device reset – 3 3 1 – 6-58
46 ANS – – Alarm device output – 3 3 7 – 6-58
75 ARWS – – Arrow keyboard input – 3 3 9 – 7-65
76 ASC – – ASCII code conversion – 3 3 11 – 7-66
82 ASCII – 3 Convert HEX to ASCII 3 3 3 7 – 7-88
Arcsine operation of binary
133 – DASIN 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-39
floating point
Arccosine operation of binary
134 – DACOS 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-40
floating point
Arctangent operation of binary
135 – DATAN 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-41
floating point
18 BCD DBCD 3 Convert BIN data into BCD 3 3 3 5 9 6-26
19 BIN DBIN 3 Convert BCD data into BIN 3 3 3 5 9 6-27
B
15 BMOV – 3 Block move 3 3 3 7 – 6-23
44 BON DBON 3 Determine the ON bits 3 3 3 7 13 6-56
01 CALL – 3 Call subroutine 3 3 3 3 – 6-5
84 CCD – 3 Check sum – 3 3 7 – 7-95
00 CJ – 3 Conditional jump 3 3 3 3 – 6-1
14 CML DCML 3 Counter transfer 3 3 3 5 9 6-22
10 CMP DCMP 3 Comparison output 3 3 3 7 13 6-17
C 97 CNT DCNT – Counter 3 3 3 4 6 3-8
Cosine operation of binary
131 – DCOS 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-36
floating point
Hyperbolic cosine operation of
137 – DCOSH 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-42
108 CRC – 3 CRC check sum – 3 3 7 – 8-15


Command
25 DEC DDEC 3 Perform the subtraction of 1 3 3 3 3 5 6-34
41 DECO – 3 8 → 256 bits decode 3 3 3 7 – 6-53
117 – DDEG 3 Radian → Degree – 3 3 – 9 8-21
05 DI – – Disable interrupt 3 3 3 1 – 6-7
D
23 DIV DDIV 3 Perform the division of BIN data 3 3 3 7 13 6-32
159 DRVA DDRVA – Absolute positioning – – 3 9 17 9-26
158 DRVI DDRVI – Relative positioning – – 3 9 17 9-22
72 DSW – – Digital Switch input – 3 3 9 – 7-58
120 – DEADD 3 Binary floating point addition 3 3 3 – 13 8-24
118 – DEBCD 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-23
decimal floating point
Convert decimal floating point to
119 – DEBIN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-23
110 – DECMP 3 Binary floating point comparison 3 3 3 – 13 8-19
123 – DEDIV 3 Binary floating point division 3 3 3 – 13 8-27
04 EI – – Enable interrupt 3 3 3 1 – 6-7
Binary floating point
122 – DEMUL 3 3 3 3 – 13 8-26
E multiplication
42 ENCO – 3 256 → 8 bits encode 3 3 3 7 – 6-54
Square root of binary floating
127 – DESQR 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-31
point
121 – DESUB 3 Binary floating point subtraction 3 3 3 – 13 8-25

124 – DEXP 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-28
perform exponent operation
Binary floating point zone

111 – DEZCP 3 3 3 3 – 17 8-20
comparison
Terminate the main routine
06 FEND – – 3 3 3 1 – 6-11
program
Convert BIN integer to binary
49 FLT DFLT 3 3 3 3 5 9 6-61
floating point
16 FMOV DFMOV 3 Multiple devices movement 3 3 3 7 13 6-24
F 08 FOR – – Nested loops begin 3 3 3 3 – 6-14
78 FROM DFROM 3 Read special module CR data 3 3 3 9 17 7-69
VFD-A series drive forward
102 FWD – – 3 3 3 7 – 8-8
command
145 FTC – – Fuzzy temperature control – 9 9 – 9 8-45
General pulse width modulation
144 GPWM – – – 9 9 – 7 8-44
output
G
171 GBIN DGBIN 3 Convert Gray code to BIN – P P 5 9 9-45
170 GRY DGRY 3 Convert BIN to Gray code – P P 5 9 9-44
83 HEX – 3 Convert ASCII to HEX 3 P P 7 – 7-92
71 HKY DHKY – 16-key keyboard input – P P 9 17 7-56
169 HOUR DHOUR – Hour meter – P P 7 13 9-44
H High speed counter comparison
54 – DHSCR – 3 P P – 13 7-15
RESET
53 – DHSCS – 3 3 3 – 13 7-6
SET
196 HST DHST 3 High speed counter – – 3 3 – 9-60


Command
Zone comparison (High-speed
55 – DHSZ – – 3 3 – 17 7-17
counter)
24 INC DINC 3 Perform the addition of 1 3 3 3 3 5 6-34
63 INCD – – Relative cam control – 3 3 9 – 7-44
129 INT DINT 3 3 3 3 5 9 8-33
I BIN integer
98 INV – – Inverting operation 3 3 3 1 – 3-15
03 IRET – – Interrupt return 3 3 3 1 – 6-7
60 IST – – Manual/Auto control 3 3 3 7 – 7-36
215 LD& DLD& – S1 & S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-1
217 LD^ DLD^ – S1 ^ S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-1
216 LD| DLD| – S1 | S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-1
226 LD< DLD< – S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
229 LD<= DLD<= – S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
228 LD<> DLD<> – S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
224 LD= DLD= – S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
225 LD> DLD> – S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
L 230 LD>= DLD>= – S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-4
91 LDF – – Falling-edge detection operation 3 3 3 3 – 3-11
90 LDP – – Rising-edge detection operation 3 3 3 3 – 3-11
125 – DLN 3 perform natural logarithm 3 3 3 – 9 8-29
operation

126 – DLOG 3 3 3 3 – 13 8-30
perform logarithm operation
107 LRC – 3 LRC check sum – 3 3 7 – 8-13

180 MAND – 3 Matrix AND – – 3 9 – 9-47
190 MBC – 3 Matrix bit state count – – 3 7 – 9-59
189 MBR – 3 Matrix bit rotate – – 3 7 – 9-58
186 MBRD – 3 Matrix bit read – – 3 7 – 9-54
188 MBS – 3 Matrix bit shift – – 3 7 – 9-56
187 MBWR – 3 Matrix bit write – – 3 7 – 9-55
185 MCMP – 3 Matrix compare – – 3 9 – 9-52
45 MEAN DMEAN 3 Mean value 3 3 3 7 13 6-57
148 MEMR DMEMR 3 MEMORY read – 3 3 7 13 8-49
149 MEMW DMEMW 3 MEMORY write in – 3 3 7 13 8-50
M 184 MINV – 3 Matrix inverse – – 3 7 – 9-51
183 MNOR – 3 Matrix NOR – – 3 9 – 9-52
100 MODRD – – MODBUS data Read 3 3 3 7 – 8-1
150 MODRW – – MODBUS data read/write in 3 3 3 11 – 9-1
101 MODWR – – MODBUS data write in 3 3 3 7 – 8-5
181 MOR – 3 Matrix OR – – 3 9 – 9-49
12 MOV DMOV 3 Data Move 3 3 3 5 9 6-19
52 MTR – – Input matrix – 3 3 9 – 7-3
Perform the multiplication of BIN
22 MUL DMUL 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-31
data
182 MXOR – 3 Matrix XOR – – 3 9 – 9-50


Command
29 NEG DNEG 3 Complement of 2 3 3 3 3 5 6-38

N
09 NEXT – – Nested loops end 3 3 3 1 – 6-14
221 OR& DOR& – S1 & S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-3
O
223 OR^ DOR^ – S1 ^ S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-3
222 OR| DOR| – S1 | S2 – 3 3 5 9 10-3
242 OR< DOR< – S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
245 OR<= DOR<= – S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
244 OR<> DOR<> – S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
240 OR= DOR= – S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
241 OR> DOR> – S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
O 246 OR>= DOR>= – S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-6
95 ORF – – the falling-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-13
operation
94 ORP – – the rising-edge detection 3 3 3 3 – 3-12
operation
88 PID – – PID calculation 3 3 3 9 – 7-100
99 PLF – – Falling-edge output 3 3 3 3 – 3-13
89 PLS – – Rising-edge output 3 3 3 3 – 3-13
Pulse wave output with
59 PLSR DPLSR – 3 3 3 9 17 7-31
acceleration/deceleration speed
157 PLSV DPLSV – Variable speed pulse output – – 3 7 13 9-21
57 PLSY DPLSY – Pulse output 3 3 3 7 13 7-25
P
128 – DPOW 3 3 3 3 – 13 8-32
perform power operation
77 PR – – ASCII code output – 3 3 5 – 7-67

Octal number system
81 PRUN DPRUN 3 – 3 3 5 9 7-87
transmission
151 PWD – – Input pulse width detection – – 3 5 – 9-11
58 PWM – – Pulse width modulation output 3 3 3 7 – 7-30
116 – DRAD 3 Degree → Radian – 3 3 – 9 8-21
67 RAMP – – Ramp signal – 3 3 9 – 7-50
154 RAND – – Random value – 3 3 9 – 9-13
Rotate to the left with the carry
33 RCL DRCL 3 3 3 3 5 9 6-44
flag attached
R
Rotate to the right with the carry
32 RCR DRCR 3 3 3 3 5 9 6-43
flag attached
105 RDST – – VFD-A series drive status read 3 3 3 5 – 8-11
50 REF – 3 I/O refresh 3 3 3 5 – 7-1

Refresh and adjust the response
51 REFF – 3 – 3 3 3 – 7-2
time of input filter
R VFD-A series drive reverse

103 REV – – 3 3 3 7 – 8-9
command
31 ROL DROL 3 Rotate to the left 3 3 3 5 9 6-42
30 ROR DROR 3 Rotate to the right 3 3 3 5 9 6-41
80 RS – – Serial data communication 3 3 3 9 – 7-74


Command
VFD-A series drive abnormal
106 RSTEF – – 3 3 3 5 – 8-13
reset
End to measure the execution
153 RTMD – – – – 3 3 – 9-12
time of I interrupt
Start to measure the execution
152 RTMU – – – – 3 5 – 9-11
time of I interrupt
73 SEGD – 3 Decode the 7-step display panel 3 3 3 5 – 7-60
74 SEGL – – 7-step display scan output 3 3 3 7 – 7-61
61 SER DSER 3 Multiple devices comparison – 3 3 9 17 7-42
39 SFRD – 3 Displacement is read – 3 3 7 – 6-50
35 SFTL – 3 – 3 3 9 – 6-46
to the left
34 SFTR – 3 3 3 3 9 – 6-45
to the right
38 SFWR – 3 Displacement is wrote – 3 3 7 – 6-49
Sine operation of binary floating
130 – DSIN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-34
point
Hyperbolic sine operation of
136 – DSINH 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-42
S
13 SMOV – 3 Shift move – 3 3 11 – 6-20
69 SORT – – Data sort – 3 3 11 – 7-52
56 SPD – – Speed detection – 3 3 7 – 7-24
48 SQR DSQR 3 Square root of BIN 3 3 3 5 9 6-60
02 SRET – – Subroutine return 3 3 3 1 – 6-5
65 STMR – – Special timer – 3 3 7 – 7-48
VFD-A series drive stop
104 STOP – – 3 3 3 7 – 8-9
command
Perform the subtraction of BIN
21 SUB DSUB 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-30
data
43 SUM DSUM 3 Sum of ON bits 3 3 3 5 9 6-56
147 SWAP DSWAP 3 Swap high/low byte 3 3 3 3 5 8-48
109 SWRD – 3 Digital switch read – 3 3 3 – 8-18
162 TADD – 3 Perpetual calendar data addition – 3 3 7 – 9-37
Tangent operation of binary

132 – DTAN 3 3 3 3 – 9 8-37
floating point
Hyperbolic tangent operation of
138 – DTANH 3 – 3 3 – 9 8-43
T binary floating point
160 TCMP – 3 – 3 3 11 – 9-35
comparison
70 TKY DTKY – 10-key keyboard input – 3 3 7 13 7-54
96 TMR – – Timer 3 3 3 4 – 3-8
79 TO DTO 3 Special module CR data write in 3 3 3 9 17 7-69
166 TRD – 3 Read perpetual calendar data – 3 3 3 – 9-40
163 TSUB – 3 – 3 3 7 – 9-38
subtraction
T 64 TTMR – – Alternate timer – 3 3 5 – 7-46
167 TWR – 3 Perpetual calendar data write in – 3 3 3 – 9-42
Perpetual calendar data zone
161 TZCP – 3 – 3 3 9 – 9-36
comparison


Command
85 VRRD – 3 Volume read – 3 3 5 – 7-97

V
86 VRSC – 3 Volume scale – 3 3 5 – 7-99
Perform the logical product
26 WAND DAND 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-35
(AND) operation
07 WDT – 3 Reset the watchdog timer 3 3 3 1 – 6-12
Perform the logical sum (OR)
27 WOR DOR 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-36
W operation
37 WSFL – 3 Shift the register to the left – 3 3 9 – 6-48
36 WSFR – 3 Shift the register to the right – 3 3 9 – 6-47
Perform the exclusive logical add
28 WXOR DXOR 3 3 3 3 7 13 6-37
(XOR) operation
X 17 XCH DXCH 3 Data exchange 3 3 3 5 9 6-25
11 ZCP DZCP 3 Zone comparison 3 3 3 9 17 6-18
156 ZRN DZRN – Zero point return – – 3 9 17 9-18
Z
Resets a range of device
40 ZRST – 3 3 3 3 5 – 6-51
specified
Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.
Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don’t possess pulse execution command (P command).

6 Application Commands API 00-49

CJ Conditional Jump ES EP EH
00 P

Note: Operand S can assign P Continuous Pulse
CJ CJP
P can be modified by Index register E, F execution execution
ES Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P63
32-bit command
EP / EH Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P255
－－－－
ES series models do not support the pulse execution
command (CJP) Flag: None
: The destination pointer of conditional jump

Command
CJ command can be used in the following conditions:
Explanation
1. In order to shorten the program scan time when user do not want to execute some
unnecessary parts of PLC program.
2. In double or dual coils designation.
When the program that pointer P indicats is before CJ command, please note that the
error of WDT exceeding time. If PLC stop running, please use carefully.
CJ command can assign the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ command and
CALL command cannot assign the same pointer P, otherwise the error will occur.
The explanation of each device when executing the CJ command:
1. Y, M, S remains its previous state before the condition jump occurs.
2. The timer 10ms, 100ms that execute the counting will stop.
3. The timer T192~T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the
output contact will execute normally.
4. The high-speed counter that executes the counting will continue and the output
contact will execute normally.
5. The general counter will stop.
6. If the reset command of the accumulative type timer is activated before the condition
jump is activated, the device will be still in the reset state when condition jump is
executing.
7. The general application commands will not be executed.
8. The executing application commands, i.e. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, API 55
DHSZ, API 56 SPD, API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA, will continue executing.

When X0=On, the program will skip from address 0 to N (label P1) automatically and
Program keep on executing. But the area between address 0 and N will be skipped and will not
Example be executed.
1 When X0=Off, as usual, the program will keep on executing from address 0. CJ
command will not be executed.
(CJ command) P***
X0
0 CJ P1
X1
Y1
X2
P1 N Y2
There are five situations that the CJ command can be executed between the
Program commands MC and MCR.
Example
2 1. Out of MC~MCR.
2. Valid in the loop P1 in the following chart.
3. In the same level N, inside of MC~MC .
4. Inside of MC, out of MCR.
5. Jump from this MC~MCR to another MC~MCR. (1)
(1) This function is only provided in V4.9 (included) or higher version of ES series
models and EP/EH series models.
The execution explanations of V4.7(included) or lower version of ES series models:

CJ command is used between MC and MCR command but It is only used in the range
out of MC~MCR or in the same level N inside the MC~MCR. CJ command can not be used to
jump from this range of MC~MCR to another range of MC~MCR, otherwise the error will
occur. CJ command can execute correctly in the above-mentioned condition 1 and 3 but the
error will occur if it is not used in other conditions.
X0
MC N0
X2
CJ P0
X3
CJ P1
X1
MC N1
M1000
P1 Y1
MCR N1
M1000
P0 Y0
MCR N0

The states of each device are shown in the following:

Program
The contact The contact state
Example state before CJ during CJ
The output coil state during CJ
3 Device execution
execution execution
M1, M2, M3 M1, M2, M3
Y1 (note1), M20, S1 Off
Off OfftOn
Y, M, S
M1, M2, M3 M1, M2, M3
Y1 (note1), M20, S1 On
On OntOff
10ms, 100ms M4 Off M4 OfftOn Timer is not activated
Timer The interrupt of timer latched.
(ES/EP/EH) M4 On M4 OntOff
Keep on counting after M0 is off.
M6 Off M6 OfftOn Timer (T240) is not activated
1ms, 10ms, All accumulative timers will stop
100ms Timer (for but latched once executing
accumulative) M6 On M6 OntOff command CJ. When M0 is from
EP/EH OntOff, T240 will be
unchanged.
M10 On/Off
M7, X10 Off Timer does not count
trigger
C0~C234
M7 Off, X10 M10 On/Off The interrupt of counter latched.
On/Off trigger trigger Keep on counting after M0 is off.
Application commands won’t be
M11 Off M11 OfftOn
executed.
Application Do not execute the skipped
command application command but API
M11 On M11 OntOff
53~59, API 157~159 keep
executing.
Note 1: Y1 is dual output. When M0 is Off, it is controlled by M1. when M0 is On, it is

controlled by M12.
Note 2: When timer that subroutine used (T192~T199, for EP/EH) executes CJ command, it
will keep counting. After timer attains, output contact of timer will be On.
Note 3: When high-speed counters (C235~C255) execute CJ command, it will kekep counting
and output point will also continue act.

Y1 is double or dual coil designation. When M0=Off, it is controlled by M1. When M0=On,
it is controlled by M12.
M0
CJ P0
M1
Y1
M2
M20
M17
CJ P0
M3
S1
M4
TMR T0 K10
M5
RST T127
M6
TMR T127 K1000
M7
RST C0
M1
CNT C0 K20
M11
MOV K3 D0
M0
P0 CJ P63
M12
Y1
M13
P63 RST T127
RST C0
RST D0
END


CALL Call Subroutine ES EP EH
01 P

Note: Operand S can assign P. Continuous Pulse
CALL CALLP
P can be modified by Index register E, F. execution execution
ES Series models: operand S can assign P0~P63.
EP / EH Series models: operand S can assign P0~P255. 32-bit command
ES Series models do not support the pulse execution －－－－
command (CALLP).
Flag: None
Command : The desinition pointer of call subrountine.

Explanation Program continues in the subroutine after the FEND command.
Subroutine pointers of CALL command and the pointers of CJ command are not
allowed to coincide.
If only using CALL command, it can call subrountine of the same pointer number with
no limit of times.
Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL command. (If entering
the six level, the subroutine won’t be executed.)

SRET Subroutine Return ES EP EH
02

Note: No operand Continuous
SRET －－
The command driven by contact is not necessary. execution
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
Indicates the end of subroutine program.

Command
Explanation The subroutine will return to main program by SRET after the termination of subroutine
and execute the sequence program located at the next step to the CALL command.
When X0 = ON, then start CALL command, jump to P2 and run subroutine. When run
Program
Example SRET command, it will jump back to address 24 and keep running.
1

X0 P***
20 CALL P2 call subroutine P***
X1
24 Y1
FEND
P2 Y0
subroutine
Subroutine P2 Y0
SRET subroutine return
When X10 is the rising-edge triggered CALL P10 command that goes from Off to On,
Program
Example jump to P10 and run subroutine.
2 When X11 is On, execute CALL P11, jump to P11 and run subroutine.
When X12 is On, execute CALL P12, jump to P12 and run subroutine.
When X13 is On, execute CALL P13, jump to P13 and run subroutine.
When X14 is On, execute CALL P14, jump to P14 and run subroutine. When run SRET
command, it will jump back to the last P*** subroutine and keep running.
Run SRET command in the P10 subroutine and return to the main program.
X0 X2
INC D0 P12 INC D30
Y0 Y10
X10 X13
CALL P10 CALL P13
Main subroutine
X0 Program X2
INC D1 INC D31
Y1 Y11
FEND SRET
X2 X2
P10 INC D10 P13 INC D40
Y4 Y12
X11 X14
CALL P11 CALL P14
subroutine subroutine
X2 X2
INC D11 INC D41
Y5 Y13
SRET SRET
X2 X2
P11 INC D20 P14 INC D50
Y6 Y14
X12 subroutine
CALL P12 SRET
subroutine
X2
INC D21 END
Y7
SRET


IRET Interrupt Return ES EP EH
03

Continuous
Note: No operand IRET －－
execution
The command driven by contact is not necessary.
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
IRET denotes the interrupt of subroutine program.

Command
Explanation Terminate the processing of interrupt program and return to the main program by IRET
command. Execute the original program to produce the next interrupt command.

EI Enable Interrupt ES EP EH
04

Continuous
Note: No operand EI －－
execution
The pulse width of interrupt signal should be higher than 200us. 32-bit command
Please refer to the footnote of DI command to see the range of －－－－
numbers of each model.
Flag: M1050~M1059, M1280~M1294
(Please refer to the footnote of DI
command)

DI Disable Interrupt ES EP EH
05

Continuous
Note: No operand DI －－
execution
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
EI command enables interrupt subroutine to be processed in the program, e.g. External

Command
interrupt, Time interrupt, High-speed counter interrupt.
Explanation
In the program, using interrupt subroutine between EI and DI command is allowed.
However, it is not allowed to use DI command if there is no disable interrupt period
during the program.

Even in the interrupt allowed range when interrupting special the auxiliary relay M1050
to M1059 in ES / EP series models and M1280 to M1294 in EH series models, the
corresponding interrupting request will not be activated.
Interrupting cursor ( I ) must be used after the FEND command.

Other interrupts are not allowed to occur during executing the interrupt routine
program.
When most interrupts occur, priority is given to the interrupt occuring first. If the
interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt with the lower pointer number will be
given the higher priority.
Any interrupt request occuring between DI and EI commands cannot be executed
immediately. The request will be memorized and execute the subroutine in the enabling
range of the interrupt.
When using the interrupt pointer, please do not repeatly use the high-speed counter
driven by the same X input contact.
When the interrupt routine program is running and the I/O is immediately activated, the
state of I/O can be refreshed by writing REF command in the program.
During the PLC operation, the program scans the commands between EI and DI, if X1
Program
Example or X2 are ON, the subroutine A or B will be interruptted. When IRET is reached, the
main program will resume.
EI
X0
Y1 Enabled interrupt
DI
Disabled interrupt
EI
Enabled interrupt
FEND
I 101 Y0
Interrupt subroutine A
IRET
I 201 Y0
Interrupt subroutine B
IRET

Interrupt pointer I numbers of ES series models:

Footnote 1. External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3) 4 points.
2. Time interrupts: I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10~99, time base=1ms) (support for
V5.7)
3. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) (support for
V5.7)
Interrupt pointer I numbers of EP series models:
1. External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4),
(I501, X5) 6 points.
2. Time interrupts: I6□□, I7□□ 2 points. (□□＝1~99ms, time base=1ms)
3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53
DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)
4. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)
5. The order of interrupt point I: high-speed counter interrupt, external interrupt,

time interrupt and communication interrupt for specific characters received.
Interrupt pointer I Number of EH series models:

1. External interrupts: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□, X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4),
(I50□, X5) 6 points. (□＝0 indicates the interrupt of falling-edge, □＝1 indicates
the interrupt of rising-edge)
2. Time interrupts: I6□□, I7□□, 2 points. (□□＝1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8□□

1 point. (□□＝1~99ms, time base=0.1ms)
3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53
DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)
4. The interrupt, start and end of pulse output interrupt should be used with API 57
PLSY command. I130, I140 are triggered at the beginning of the pulse output by
the start-arranged flag of pulse output command M1342, M1343. Then, M1340,
M1341 will trigger I110, I120 at the end of pulse output command to interrupt the
executing program and jump to the assigned interrupt subroutine to execute .
5. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)
6. The order of the interrupt pointer I : External interrupts, time interrupts, high-speed
counter interrupts, and pulse output interrupts.
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of ES series models:
Flag Function
M1050 External interrupt, I 001 masked

Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EP series models:
Flag Function
M1056 Time interrupt, I6□□ masked
M1057 Time interrupt, I7□□ masked
M1059 High-speed counter interrupt, I010~I040 masked
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EH series models:
Flag Function
M1280 External interrupt, I00□masked
M1286 Time interrupt, I60□masked
M1289 High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked
M1295 Pulse output interrupt insert I110 masked
M1340 After CH0 pulse is transmitted, I110 interrupt occur
M1341 After CH1 pulse is transmitted, I120 interrupt occur
M1342 CH0 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I130 interrupt occur simultaneously
M1343 CH1 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I140 interrupt occur simultaneously


FEND Terminate the Main Routine Program ES EP EH
06

Continuous
Note: No operand FEND －－
execution
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
This command denotes the end of the main routine program. It has the same function
Command
Explanation as END command during PLC operation.
CALL must follow right after FEND command and add SRET command at the end of
the subroutine. Interrupt commands also have to follow after FEND command and add
IRET command at the end of the service program.
If using several FEND commands, please place the subroutine and interrupt service
programs between the last FEND and END command.
After CALL command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND
command before SRET command is executed.
After FOR command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND
command before NEXT command is executed.
The program flow The program flow when X0=On
CJ Command when X0=off, 0 program jumps to P0
ProgramFlow X1=off
main
program
X0
CJ P0
X1
CALL P63
main
program
main
P0 program
command CALL
P63 subroutine
interrupt
I301
subroutine

CALLCommand The program flow

0
ProgramFlow when X0=off, The program flow
X1=off when X0=Off,
main
X1=On.
program
X0
CJ P0
X1
CALL P63
main
program
main
P0 program
command CALL
P63
subroutine
I301 interrupt
subroutine

WDT Reset the Watchdog Timer ES EP EH
07 P

Continuous Pulse
Note: No operand WDT WDTP
execution execution
command (WDTP).
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None

WDT (Watch Dog Timer) is used to monitor the PLC operation in the DVP series PLC
Command
system.
Explanation
The WDT command can be used to reset the Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scanning
time (from step 0 to END or FEND command) is more than 200ms, the ERROR LED will
flash. The user will have to turn the PLC off and then back ON to clear the fault. PLC will
determine the status of RUN/STOP according to RUN/STOP switch. If there is no
RUN/STOP switch, PLC will return to STOP automatically.
When to use WDT:

When error occur in PLC system.
When the executing time of the program is too long to cause the scanning time to
exceed the content value of D1000. It can be modified by using the following two
methods.
Use WDT command STEP0 WDT END(FEND)
T1 t2
Use the set value of D1000 (default is 200ms) to change the watchdog time.
If the program scanning time is over 300ms, users can divide the program into 2 parts.
Program
Insert the Watchdog Timer in between, so both programs’ scanning time will be less
Example
than 200ms.
300ms program
END
Dividing the program to two parts
so that both parts’ scan time are
less than 200ms.
150ms program
X0
WDT Watchdog timer reset
150ms program
END


FOR Nested Loops Begin ES EP EH
08

S Continuous
FOR －－
execution
Note: The contact execution command is not necessary
Refer to each model specification for usage range. 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
: The number of repeats for the nested loop

Command
Explanation

NEXT Nested Loops End ES EP EH
09

Continuous
Note: No operand NEXT －－
execution
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
FOR and NEXT commands are used when “n” nested loops are needed.
Command
“N” may be within the range of K1 to K32767. If the range N≦K1, N will always be K1.
Explanation
When it is not desired to execute the FOR to NEXT commands, use the CJ command.
Error will occur in the following conditions:
NEXT command is before FOR command.
With FOR command, without NEXT command.
There is a NEXT command after the FEND or END command.
The numbers of FOR to NEXT commands are different.
The FOR to NEXT loop can be nested for five levels but please notice that if there are
too many loops, the PLC scanning time will increase and it may cause the watchdog
timer to be activated and result in error. User can use WDT command to modify.

After loop A operate 3 times, the program after the NEXT command will resume. For
Program
Example every completed cycle of loop A, loop B will completely executed for 4 times, therefore,
1 the total number of times that loop B operate will be 3 ×4＝12 times.
FOR K3
FOR K4
B A
NEXT
NEXT
Program which executes the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is off. It does not
Program
Example execute the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is on and CJ command jump to P6.
2
X7
CJ P6
M0
MOV K0 D0
FOR K3
M0
MOV D0 D1
INC D0
MEXT
X10
P6 Y10

When the FOR to NEXT command are not executed, CJ command can be used to
Program
Example jump. When the most internal loop of FOR to NEXT, X1 will be ON and CJ command
3 will jump to P0 and not be executed.
X0
TMR T0 K10
FOR K4X100
X0
INC D0
FOR K2
X0
INC D1
FOR K3
X0
INC D2
FOR K4
X0
WDT
INC D3
X1
CJ P0
FOR K5
X0
INC D4
NEXT
P0 NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END


CMP Comparison Output ES EP EH
10 D P

S1 Continuous Pulse
CMP CMPP
S2 execution execution
D
Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
command. Continuous Pulse
DCMP DCMPP
Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. execution execution
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Flag: None
command (CMPP, DCMPP).
: First comparison value : Second comparison value :

Command
Comparison result.
Explanation
The contents of the comparison source and are compared and
denotes the compare result.
Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two
values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit
command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.
If is set to Y0, then Y0, Y1, Y2 will work as the program example as below.
Program
When X10=On, CMP command is driven and one of Y0, Y1, Y2 is On. When X10=Off,
Example
CMP command is not driven and Y0, Y1, Y2 remain in the previous status.
The comparison result of ≧, ≦, ≠ commands can be got by the parallel connection of
Y0~Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.
X10 X10
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2


ZCP Zone Comparison ES EP EH
11 D P

S1 Continuous Pulse
ZCP ZCPP
S
D 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
Note: If operand S1, S2, S use with device F, it is only available in Continuous Pulse
DZCP DZCPP
16-bit command. execution execution
Operand S1 should be less than Operand S2. Flag: None
Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.
command (ZCPP, DZCPP).
: First comparison value (Minimum) : Second comparison value

Command
(Maximum) : Comparison value : Comparison result.
Explanation
is compared with its limits and and denotes the compare
result.
When ＞ , set as the limit to compare.
Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two
values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit
command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.
If is set to M0, then M0, M1, M2 will work as the program example as below.
Program
When X0=On, ZCP command is driven and one of M0, M1, M2 is On. When X0=Off,
Example
ZCP command is not driven and M0, M1, M2 remain in the previous status.
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 <
= C10 <
= K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.

X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2


MOV Data Move ES EP EH
12 D P

S Continuous Pulse
MOV MOVP
D execution execution
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Continuous Pulse
DMOV DMOVP
ES series models do not support the pulse execution execution execution
command (MOVP, DMOVP) Flag: None
S : Data source : Data move destination

Command
When the MOV command is driven, the data of is moved to without any
Explanation
change. If the MOV command is not driven, the content of remain unchanged.
If the calculation result is a 32-bit output, (i.e. the application MUL) and the data of a
32-bit high-speed counter, users will have to use DMOV command.
MOV command is used in 16-bit command to move data.

Program When X0=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X0=On, the data of K10 is
Example moved to D10 data register.
When X1=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X1=On, the data of T0 is
moved to D10 data register.
DMOV command is used in 32-bit command to move data
When X2=Off, the content of (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) remain unchanged. If X2=On,
the data of (D21, D20) is moved to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile, the data of C235
is moved to (D41, D40) data register.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10
X2
DMOV D20 D30
DMOV C235 D40


SMOV Shift Move ES EP EH
13 P －

S Continuous Pulse
SMOV SMOVP
m1 execution execution
m2
D 32-bit command
n －－－－
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=1~ 4 Flag: M1168 (mode setting operation
The usage range of operand m2: m2=1~ m1 of SMOV)
The usage range of operand n: n=m2 ~ 4 When M1168=On, BIN mode.
Refer to each model specification for usage range. When M1168=Off, BCD mode.
: Data movementsource : Source position of the first digit to be moved

Command
: Number of source digits to be moved : Data destination of movement
Explanation
: Destination position for the first digit
This command can arrange or combine the data.
When M1168=Off, X0=On, assign the content of the two digits from the 4th digit
Program
Example (thousands’ place digital) of D10 (decimal number) and move the assigned data to the
1 two digits from the 2nd digit (hundreds' place digits) of D20 (decimal number). Then, the
content of 103 and 100 of D20 remain unchaged after SMOV command is executed.
When BCD number is higher than 9,999 or be negative (outside range of 0 to 9,999), an
operation error will occur in PLC. Then, the command will not be executed and M1067,
M1068 will be On, D1067 record error code “0E18” (hexidecimal number).
M1001
M1168
X0
SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3
D10(BIN 16bit)
Auto conversion
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D10(BCD 4 digits)
No variation Shift move
No variation
2
10
3
10 10
1
10
0
D20(BCD 4 digits)
Auto conversion
D20(BIN 16bit)
If D10=H1234，D20=H5678 before executing, D10 won’t change and D20=H5128 after
finishing execution.
When M1168=On, if use SMOV command, the D10 and D20 do not move data in BCD
Program
Example format. However the data is moved as a 4 digit BIN number.
2

M1000
M1168
X0
SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

D10(BIN 16bit)
Shift move
D20(BIN 16bit)
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
No variation No variation
Digit switch connected to the interrupted number inputs can use SMOV command to
Program
Example combine.
3 Move the right second digit switch to the right second digit of D2 and move the left first
digit switch to the right first digit of D1.
Use SMOV command to move the first digit to the third digit of D2 and combine these
two digit switches into one group.
2 1 0
10 10 10
6 4 2
8 8
8
X13~X10 X27~X20
PLC
M1001
M1168
M1000
(X20~X27)BCD
BIN K2X20 D2 2 digits D2(BIN)
D1 (X10~X13)BCD
BIN K1X10
1 digit D1(BIN)
SMOV D1 K1 K1 D2 K3


CML Counter Transfer ES EP EH
14 D P

S Continuous Pulse
CML CMLVP
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
command.
Continuous Pulse
Refer to each model specification for usage range. DCML DCMLP
execution execution
command (CMLP, DCMLP) Flag: None
: Transfer data source : Transfer destination device

Command
Counter phase the contents of (0→1, 1→0) and have the contents transferred to
Explanation
. If the content is Constant K, this Constant K will be converted to the BIN value
automatically.
This command can be used during the counter-phase output.
Program
Example When X10=ON, contents of D1, b0~b3, will be counter transferred to K1Y0.
1 X10
CML D1 K1Y0
b 15 b3 b2 b1 b0
D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Symbol bit (0=positive, 1=negative)
0 1 0 1
No variation Transfer the

counter-phase data
The left loop shown below can be displayed as the right program example by using CML
Program
Example command.
2 X000
M0
X001
M1
X002
M2
X003
M3
M1000
CML K1X0 K1M0
X000 Normal on contact
M0
X001
M1
X002
M2
X003
M3


BMOV Block Move ES EP EH
15 P

S Continuous Pulse
BMOV BMOVP
n
32-bit command
Note: The usage range of operand n=1~ 512
－－－－
ES series models do not support the pulse execution command Flag: None
(BMOVP).
: Head source device : Head destination device : Block of multiple

Command
data
Explanation
This command is used to move an assigned block of multiple data to a new destination.
Move the contents of the register, with this register obtained from counting
the registers within the -assigned numbers, to the register within the
-assigned number. If the -assigned points exceed the usage range of this
device, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved.
When X10=On, move the contents of the four registers D0~D3 to their corresponding
Program
Example registers D20~D23.
1 X10
D20 K4 D0 D20
D1 D21 n=4
D2 D22
D3 D23
If move the specified bit device, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, the digit numbers of and
Program
Example should be the same and this also means the number of n should be the same.
2 ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.
M1000
D0 D20 K4 M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
M8 Y10
M9 Y11
M10 Y12
M11 Y13

The BMOV command has built the automatic movement as the program example below
Program
Example to prevent overwriting errors from occurring when the specified numbers of and
3 coincide.
When > , the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3
When < , the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1.
But, be sure to avoid the specified number being continuous when < in
ES series models. Otherwise, the execution result will be the same value. For
example, when the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1, the
content value of D11 to D13 will all be the content value of D10.
X10 1
BMOV D20 D19 K3 D20 D19
2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21
X11 3
BMOV D10 D11 K3 D10 D11
2
D11
1
D12 D13

FMOV Multiple Devices Movement ES EP EH
16 D P

S Continuous Pulse
FMOV FMOVP
execution execution
D
n
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit Continuous Pulse
command. DFMOV DFMOVP
execution execution
The usage range of operand n:
n=1~ 512(16-bit command), n=1~ 256 (32-bit command) Flag: None
command (FMOVP, DFMOVP)
: Source device : Head destination device : A quantity of multiple

Command
devices
Explanation
The data stored in the source device is moved to every device within the range of
destination device. Move the contents of to the register, with this
register obtained from counting the registers within the -assigned numbers. If the
-assigned devices exceed the usage range, only those that are within the enabled
range will be moved.
ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.

When X0=ON, move Constant K10 to the continuous five registers (D10~D14) starting
Program
from D10.
Example
X10
FMOV K10 D10 K5
K10 K10 D10
K10 D11
K10 D12 n=5
K10 D13
K10 D14
API ☺ Applicable models

XCH Data Exchange ES EP EH
17 D P

D1 Continuous Pulse
XCH XCHP
D2 execution execution
Note: If operand D1, D2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
Continuous Pulse
Refer to each model specification for usage range. DXCH DXCHP
execution execution
command (XCHP, DXCHP). Flag: None
: First exchange data : Second exchange data

Command
Exchange the contents of and with each other.
Explanation
This command is usually pulse execution (XCHP).
When X0=Off→On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
Program
Example X0
1 XCHP D20 D40
Before After
execution execution
D20 120 40 D20
D40 40 120 D40

When X0=Off→On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
Program X0
Example D100 D200
2
Before After
execution execution
D100 D100
D101 20 40 D101
D200 D200
D201 40 20 D201
In 16-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and
Footnote M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that specified devices will exchange.
In 32-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and
M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that 32-bit devices will exchange.
When X0=On and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of D100, D0101 will
exchange.
Before After
X0 execution execution
M1303
D100L 9 20 D100L
DXCHP D100 D100 D100H 20 9 D100H

D101L 8 40 D101L
D101H 40 8 D101H

BCD Converts BIN Data into BCD ES EP EH
18 D P

S Continuous Pulse
BCD BCDP
DBCD DBCDP
command (BCDP, DBCDP) Flag: M1067 (operation error)
M1068 (operation error)
D1067 (error code)
Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) of the source device into BCD and transfers the
Command
result to the device .
Explanation
If the BCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 9999, an operation error occurs,
the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E18”
(hexadecimal number).

If the DBCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 99,999,999, an operation error
occurs, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E18”
(hexadecimal number).
The operation value of four fundamental operations (+, −, ×, ÷), INC and DEC command
in PLC are executed in BIN format. This command can be used to output BIN format
data in BCD format value directly to a seven segment display.
When X0=ON, the binary data D10 is converted into BCD number, and stored at K4Y0
Program
(Y0~Y3).
Example
X0
BCD D10 K1Y0
When D10=001E (Hex)=0030 (decimal number), the execution result will be

Y0~Y3=0000(BIN).

BIN Converts BCD Data into BIN ES EP EH
19 D P

S Continuous Pulse
BIN BINP
DBIN DBINP
ES series models do not support pulse execution execution execution
command (BINP, DBINP) Flag: M1067 (operation error)
M1068 (operation error)
D1067 (error code)
: Data source : Converted result

Command
Converts BCD data (0 to 9,999) of the source device into BIN and transfers the
Explanation
result to the device .
The enabled range of source device : BCD (0 to 9,999), DBCD (0 to 99,999,999)
If the content of source device is not BCD value (each digit of which is
indicated as HEX being outside the range of 0 to 9), an operation error will occur, the
error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code “0E18”.
Constant K and H is automatically converted into the BIN data. There is no necessity for
constant to use this command.
When X0=ON, the BCD data K1X0 is converted to BIN data, and stored the result at
Program
D10.
Example
X0
BIN K1X0 D10

The application explanation of BCD and BIN command:

Footnote The BIN command is used to covert the source data into BIN data and store in the
PLC when PLC read a BCD format digit switch from external equipment.
The BCD command is used to convert the stored data into BCD data and transmit it
to the 7-segment display when PLC display the stored data on a BCD format
7-segment display from external equipment.
When X0=On, convert K4X0(BCD data) into BIN data and transmit it to D100. Then,
convert BIN data of D100 into BCD data and transmit it to K4Y20.
X0
BIN K4X0 D100
BCD D100 K4Y20

3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10
4 digit BCD format switch

6 6 4 2
8 8 8 8
X17 X0
4 digit BCD value
use the BIN command to

store BIN value into D100
use the BCD command to

convert the BIN value in D100
convert to be 4 digit BCD value
Y37 Y20
4 digit BCD format

7-segment display


ADD Perform the Addition of BIN Data ES EP EH
20 D P

S1 Continuous Pulse
ADD ADDP
D
Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
Continuous Pulse
16-bit command. DADD DADDP
execution execution
Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
ES series models do not support the pulse execution command
(ADDP, DADDP). M1021 (Borrow flag)
M1022 (Carry flag)
: Augend : Addend : Addition result

Command
+ = . Performs the addition on BIN data and the BIN data
Explanation
, and stores the addition result into the device .
The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculation are algebraically processed, i.e. 3 + (-9) = -6.
Flag changes of binary addition
16-bit command:
If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds -32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
32-bit command:
1. If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
2. If the operation result exceeds -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
3. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
16-bit command:
Program
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend D0 and addend D10 is combined
Example and the total is stored in the result device D20.
1 X0
ADD D0 D10 D20
(D0) + (D10) = (D20)
32-bit command:
Program
Example When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend (D31, D30) and addend (D41, D40)
2 is combined and the total is stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the
lower 16-bit data, and D31, D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data)
X10
DADD D30 D40 D50
(D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)

Flag operations:
16-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
Footnote
-2B -1B 0B -32,768 -1B 0B 1 32,767B 0B 1B 2
the most significant bit the most significant bit

Borrow flag Carry flag
becomes “1” (negative) becomes “0” (positive)
32-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
-2B -1B 0B -2,147,483,648 -1B 0B 1 2,147,483,647B 0B 1B 2
the most significant bit the most significant bit

Borrow flag Carry flag
becomes “1” (negative) becomes “0” (positive)
API Perform the Subtraction of BIN Applicable models

SUB ES EP EH
21 D P Data

S1 Continuous Pulse
SUB SUBP
D
Continuous Pulse
16-bit command. DSUB DSUBP
execution execution
ES series models do not support the pulse execution command
(SUBP, DSUBP). M1021 (Borrow flag)
M1022 (Carry flag)
Please refer to the command
explanation of ADD command
: Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result

Command
− = . Performs the subtraction of BIN data and the BIN data
Explanation
, and stores the subtraction result into the device .
The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculation are algebraically processed.
Flag changes of binary subtraction
16-bit command:
If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds –32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
32-bit command:
. If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
. If the operation result exceeds –2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.

The flag operations of SUB command please refer to the flag operations of ADD
command on the previous page.
16-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend D10 is subtracted from the data
Program
Example contained within the minuend D0 and the result of this calculation is stored in the result
1 device D20.
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
(D0) − (D10) = (D20)
32-bit command:
Program
Example When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend (D41, D40) is subtracted from
2
the data contained within the minuend (D31, D30) and the result of this calculation is
stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31,
D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data)
X10
DSUB D30 D40 D50
(D31, D30) − (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)
API Perform the Multiplication of BIN Applicable models

MUL ES EP EH
22 D P Data

S1 Continuous Pulse
MUL MULP
D
Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
16-bit command. Continuous Pulse
DMUL DMULP
If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit execution execution
command. Flag: None
In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices.
In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices.
ES series models do not support the pulse execution Command
(MULP, DMULP).
Command : Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result

Explanation × = . Performs the Multiplication of BIN data and the BIN data
, and stores the multiplication result into the device . Please pay careful
attention to the polarity display of the operation result of , and in the
16-bit and 32-bit command.
16-bit command:

+1
b15................ b00 b15................ b00 b31............ b16 b15............. b00

X =
b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
b15=0,S 1 is a positive value b15=0,S 2 is a positive value b31=0,S 2 is a positive value

b15=1,S 1 is a negative value b15=1,S 2 is a negative value b31=1,S 2 is a negative value
When is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 and produce a 16-bit result. Then, the flag
M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E19”.
32-bit command:
+1 +1 +3 +2 +1
b31.. b16 b15.. b00 b31.. b16 b15.. b00 b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00
X =
b31 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b63 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1 )
b31=0,S 1 (S 1 +1) are positive value b31=0,S 2 (S 2 +1) are positive value b63=0, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are positive value
b31=1,S 1 (S 1 +1) are negative value b31=1,S 2 (S 2 +1) are negative value b63=1, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are negative value
When is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. The
destination device is used to store low 32-bit data only.
16-bit command:
Program
A 16-bit data source, D10 is multiplied by another 16-bit data source, D0 and the total is a
Example 32-bit result, D20. The upper 16-bit data is stored in D21 and the lower one is stored in
D20. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most significant bit. OFF
indicates the value of positive 0 and ON indicates the value of negative 1.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0

(D0) × (D10) = (D21, D20)
16-bit × 16-bit = 32-bit

DIV Perform the Division of BIN Data ES EP EH
23 D P

S1 Continuous Pulse
DIV DIVP
D
Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DDIV DDIVP
If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit execution execution
command. Flag: None
In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous
devices.
In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous
devices.
Command (ADDP, DADDP).

: Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder

Command
÷ = . Performs the division of BIN data and the BIN data
Explanation
, and stores the result into the device . Please pay careful attention to the
polarity display of the operation result of , and in the 16-bit and 32-bit
command.
This command is not executed when the divisor is “0”. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will
be On and D1067 record error code “0E19”.
16-bit command:
Quotient Remainder
+1
/ =
When D
is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 to produce a 16-bit result and occupies 2
continuous groups. In regards to the operation result, the quotient and remainder are
stored.
32-bit command:
Quotient Remainder
+1 +1 +1 +3 +2
/ =
When D
is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. In regards to
the operation result, only the quotient is stored.
When X0 is ON, the primary source D0 (divisor) is divided by the second source D10
Program
(dividend). The quotient is specified to be stored in D20 and the remainder is specified to
Example
be stored in D21. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most
significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive and ON indicates the value of
negative.
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20
DIV D0 D10 K4Y0


INC Perform the Addition of 1 ES EP EH
24 D P

D Continuous Pulse
INC INCP
execution execution
Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available 16-bit
DINC DINCP
(INCP, DINCP). Flag: None
: Destination device
Command
If the command is not the pulse execution command, “1” is added to the value of
Explanation
destination device on every execution of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).
In 16-bit command, when +32,767 is reached, “1” is added and it will write a value
of –32,768 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when +2,147,483,647 is
reached, “1” is added and it will write a value of -2,147,483,648 to the destination device.
Flag M1020~M1022 won’t be influenced by the operation result of this command.
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the addition of 1.
Program X0
Example INCP D0

DEC Perform the Subtraction of 1 ES EP EH
25 D P

D Continuous Pulse
DEC DECP
execution execution
Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
DDEC DDECP
ES series models do not support pulse the execution execution execution
(DECP, DDECP). Flag: None
: Destination device
Command
If the command is not the pulse execution command, “1” is subtracted to the value of
Explanation
destination device on every execution of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).
In 16-bit command, when –32,768 is reached, “1” is subtracted and it will write a value of
+32,767 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when -2,147,483,648 is reached,
“1” is subtracted and it will write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination device.

Flag M1020~M1022 won’t be influenced by the operation result of this command.
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the subtraction of 1.

Program X0
Example DECP D0
API W Perform the Logical Product Applicable models

AND ES EP EH
26 D P (AND) Operation

S1 Continuous Pulse
WAND WANDP
D
Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DAND DANDP
Refer to each model specification for usage range. execution execution
ES series models do not support the pulse execution Flag: None
(WANDP, DANDP)
: First data source device : Second data source device

Command
: Operation result
Explanation
Performs the logical product of the data source device and , and stores the
operation result into the device .
General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is “0”,
then the operation result is also “0”.
When X0 is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the
Program
Example operation result of the logical WAND command is stored in the device D4.
1 X0
WAND D0 D2 D4
b15 b00
D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
WAND
execution
D2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After
execution D4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed
Program
Example and the operation result of the logical DAND command is stored in the device (D41,
2 D40).
X1
DAND D10 D20 D40
b31 b15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
D11 D10 DAND
execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D21 D20
After
execution 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
D41 D40
API W Perform the Logical Sum (OR) Applicable models

OR ES EP EH
27 D P Operation

S1 Continuous Pulse
WOR WORP
D
Continuous Pulse
16-bit command. DOR DORP
execution execution
(WORP, DORP)
: First data source device : Second data source device

Command
: Operation result
Explanation
Performs the logical sum of the data source device and , and stores the
operation result into the device .
General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is “1”,
then the operation result is also “1”.
Program
Example operation result of the logical WOR command is stored in the device D4.
1 X0
WOR D0 D2 D4
b15 b00
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
execution WOR
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution D4 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

Program
Example and the operation result of the logical DOR command is stored in the device (D41, D40).
2 X1
DOR D10 D20 D40
b
b31 b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
execution D11 D10 DOR
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
D21 D20
After
execution 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
D41 D40
API W Perform the Exclusive Logical Applicable models

XOR ES EP EH
28 D P Add (XOR) Operation

S1 Continuous Pulse
WXOR WXORP
D
Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DXOR DXORP
Refer to each model specification for usage range. execution execution
(WXORP, DXORP).
: First data source device : Second data source device :

Command
Operation result
Explanation
Performs the exclusive logical add of the data source device and , and
stores the operation result into the device .
General operation rule: If both of the bit contained within the two data source devices are
the same, then the operation result is “0”. But if both of the bit contained within the two
data source devices are different, then the operation result is “1”.
Program
Example operation result of the logical WXOR command is stored in the device D4.
1 X0
WXOR D0 D2 D4
b15 b00
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
execution WOR
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution D4 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Program
Example and the operation result of the logical DXOR command is stored in the device (D41,
2 D40).
X1
DXOR D10 D20 D40
b
b31 b15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
execution D11 D10 DXOR
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D21 D20
After
execution 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
D41 D40

NEG Complement of 2 ES EP EH
29 D P

D Continuous Pulse
NEG NEGP
execution execution
Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
DNEG DNEGP
ES series models do not support pulse execution (NEGP, execution execution
DNEGP). Flag: None
: Once the command is executed, the specified device, , will be served as

Command
the complement of 2.
Explanation
This command can convert the negative BIN value to the positive number, and that is, to
get its absolute value.
This command is usually pulse execution (NEGP, DNEGP).
When X goes from OFF → ON, every bit of the D10 contents will be countered (0→1,
Program
Example 1→0) and be added with 1, and will then be saved in the original register, D10.
1 X0
NEGP D10
Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value:

Program
1. When the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. (D0 is a negative value).
Example 2. When M0 is ON, the absolute value of D0 can be obtained using the NEG command.
2 M1000
BON D0 M0 K15
Normal ON contact
M0
NEGP D0

Obtaining the absolute value by the result of the subtraction

Program
1. When D0>D2, M0=ON.
Example 2. When D0=D2, M1=ON.
3 3. When D0<D2, M2=ON.
4. Then D4 can be obtained and it will be a positive value.
X0
CMP D0 D2 M0
M0
SUB D0 D2 D4
M1
M2
SUB D2 D0 D4

Indication of the negative value and absolute value

Footnote The content of the most significant bit of the register indicates the positive and
negative value. It is a positive value when the content is “0” and it is a negative
value when the content is “1”.
If it is a negative value, the absolute value can be obtained by using the NEG
command (API 29).
(D0=2)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0=1)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0=0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(D0=-1) (D0)+1=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0=-2) (D0)+1=2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0=-3) (D0)+1=3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
(D0=-4) (D0)+1=4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
(D0=-5) (D0)+1=5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
(D0=-32,765) (D0)+1=32,765
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
(D0=-32,766) (D0)+1=32,766
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
(D0=-32,767) (D0)+1=32,767
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(D0=-32,768) (D0)+1=32,768
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max. absolute value is 32,767


ROR Rotate to the Right ES EP EH
30 D P

D Continuous Pulse
ROR RORP
n execution execution
command.
Continuous Pulse
If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 DROR DRORP
execution execution
(16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid.
Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit)
ES series models do not support pulse execution (RORP,
DRORP).
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation

Command
The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the right on every
Explanation
operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (RORP, DRORP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the right, as
Program shown in the diagram, and b3 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the
Example
carry flag (CY) M1022.
X0
RORP D10 K4
Rotate to the right

upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Carry
* flag


ROL Rotate to the Left ES EP EH
31 D P

D Continuous Pulse
ROL ROLP
command.
Continuous Pulse
If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 DROL DROLP
execution execution
ES series models do not support pulse execution (ROLP,
DROLP).
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation

Command
The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the left on every
Explanation
operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (ROLP, DROLP).
When X0 goes from OFF → ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the left, as
Program shown in the diagram, and b12 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the
Example
carry flag (CY) M1022.
X0
D10 K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag 16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag

API ☺ Rotate to the Right with the Carry Applicable models

RCR ES EP EH
32 D P flag

D Continuous Pulse
RCR RCRP
command.
Continuous Pulse
If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) DRCR DRCRP
execution execution
and K8 (32-bit) are valid.
ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCRP,
DRCRP).
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation
Command
The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated
Explanation
bit places to the right on every operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (RCRP, DRCRP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry
Program flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the right, as shown in the diagram, and b3 that
Example
located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the
original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b12.
X0
D10 K4
Rotate to the right

upper bit lower bit
D10 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
upper bit to the right lower bit
D10 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Carry
flag

API ☺ Rotate to the Left with the Carry Applicable models

RCL ES EP EH
33 D P flag Attached

D Continuous Pulse
RCL RCLP
command.
Continuous Pulse
If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 DRCL DRCLP
execution execution
Flag：M1022 (Carry flag)
ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCLP,
DRCLP).
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation
Command
The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated
Explanation
bit places to the left on every operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (RCLP, DRCLP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry
Program flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the left, as shown in the diagram, and b12 that
Example
located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the
original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b3.
X0
RCLP D10 K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag

API ☺ Shifts the Data of Device Applicable models

SFTR ES EP EH
34 P Specified to the Right

S Continuous Pulse
SFTR SFTRP
n1
n2 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Essential condition: 1≤n1≤1024, 1≤ n2≤n1
In ES series models: 1≦n2≦n1≦512 Flag: None
ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTRP).
: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of

Command
specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length
Explanation
: Bit places after one time shift
Shifts data bits of device to the right by bits. bits, which
begin with , are shifted to the right.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFTRP).
When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will shift 4 bits to the right.
Program Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTR command of one time scan.
Example
M3~M0 → carry
M7~M4 → M3~M0
M11~M8 → M7~M4
M15~M12 → M11~M8
X3~X0 → M15~M12 complete
X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4
4 bits in a group shift to the right

X3 X2 X1 X0
5
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 carry
4 3 2 1

API ☺ Shifts the Data of Device Applicable models

SFTL ES EP EH
35 P Specified to the Left

S Continuous Pulse
SFTL SFTLP
n1
n2 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Essential condition: 1≤n1≤1024, 1≤ n2≤n1
In ES series models: 1≦n2≦n1≦512 Flag: None

ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTLP).

Command
Explanation
: Bits after one time shift
Shifts data bits of device to the left by bits. bits, which
begin with , are shifted to the left.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFTLP).
When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will rotate 4 bits to the left.
Program Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTL command of one time scan.
Example
M15~M12 → carry
M11~M8 → M15~M12
M7~M4 → M11~M8
M3~M0 → M7~M4
X3~X0 → M3~M0 complete
X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4
4 bits in a group shift to the left

X3 X2 X1 X0
5
carry M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
1 2 3 4


WSFR Shift the Register to the Right ES EP EH
36 P －

S Continuous Pulse
WSFR WSFRP
n1
n2 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the specified device must be equal, for Flag: None
example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other
kind is T, C, D.
When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the Kn value must be equal.
Essential condition: 1≤n1≤512, 1≤ n2≤n1
ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFR,
WSFRP).

Command
Explanation
: Words after one time shift
Shifts data words of device to the right by words. words,
which begin with , are shifted to the right.
This command is usually pulse execution (WSFRP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift
Program
area and shift 4 register to the right.
Example
1 Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one times.
D23~D20 → carry
D27~D24 → D23~D20
D31~D28 → D27~D24
D35~D32 → D31~D28
D13 ~D10 → D35~D32 complete
X0
WSFRP D10 D20 K16 K4
D13 D12 D11 D10 4 registers in one group shift to the right
5
D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 Carry
4 3 2 1

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the word register data of Y10~Y27 are paralleled a
Program
shift area and shift 2 digits to the right.
Example
2 Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one time shift.
Y17~Y10 → carry
Y27~Y20 → Y17~Y10
X27~X20 → Y27~Y20 complete
When using Kn device, the specified value must be equal
X0
WSFRP K1X20 K1Y10 K4 K2
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 2 digits shift to the right
3
Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Carry
2 1

WSFL Shift the Register to the Left ES EP EH
37 P －

S Continuous Pulse
WSFL WSFLP
n1
n2 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the specified device must be equal, for Flag: None
example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other
kind is T, C, D.
When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the Kn value must be equal.
Essential condition: 1≤n1≤512, 1≤ n2≤n1
ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFL,
WSFLP)
: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified

Command
shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Words after
Explanation
one time shift
Shifts data words of device to the left by words. words, which
begin with , are shifted to the left.
This command is usually pulse execution (WSFLP).

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift area
Program and shift 4 register to the right.
Example
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFL command of one time shift.
D35~D32 → carry
D31~D28 → D35~D32
D27~D24 → D31~D28
D23~D20 → D27~D24
D13~D10 → D23~D20 complete
X0
WSFLP D10 D20 K16 K4
4 registers in one group shift to the left D13 D12 D11 D10
5
Carry D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20
1 2 3 4

SFWR Displacement is Wrote ES EP EH
38 P －

S Continuous Pulse
SFWR SFWRP
n
32-bit command
Note: Essential condition: 2≤n≤512
－－－－
ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFWR, Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
SFWRP).
: Source device which the data is written in : Head address device :

Command Data length
Explanation
is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the destination device is
the head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device
as the pointer and add 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this
command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position
specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the
pointer exceed the value “n-1”, the insertion into the First-in/First-OUT stack will
stop and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFWRP).
First, reset the content of D0 to 0. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the content of D0
Program becomes 1 when the content of D20 is created and built in D1. After changing the
Example
content of D20, X0 is executed to goes from OFF to ON again, then the content of D0
becomes 2 when the content of D20 is created and built in D2.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFWR command.

The content of D20 is created and built in D1.
The content of D0 becomes 1.
X10
RST D0 reset the content of D0 to 0 (zero) previously
X0
SFWRP D20 D0 -K10
n = 10 points
D20 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
pointer
D0 = 3 2 1
This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute
Footnote the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.

SFRD Displacement is Read ES EP EH
39 P －

S Continuous Pulse
SFRD SFRDP
n
32-bit command
Note: Essential condition: 2≤n≤512
－－－－
ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFRD, Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
SFRDP).
: Head address device : destination device : Data length

Command
is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the source device is the
Explanation
head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device
as the pointer and subtract 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this
command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position
specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the pointer
are equal to 0 (zero), the First-in/First-OUT stack will be empty and the carry flag
M1022 will be turned ON.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFRDP).

When X1 goes from OFF to ON, D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right and the
Program content of D0 is substracted by 1 when the content of D1 is read and moved to D21.
Example
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFRD command.
The content of D1 is read and moved to D21.
D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right.
The content of D0 is substracted by 1.
X0
SFRDP D0 D21 K10
n = 10 points
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D21
pointer
data read
This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute
Footnote the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.

ZRST Resets a Range of Device Specified ES EP EH
40 P

D1 Continuous Pulse
ZRST ZRSTP
D2 execution execution
Note: Essential condition: D1 must be less than or equal to (≦) D2.
32-bit command
Operand D1 and D2 must be in the same category. －－－－
ES series models do not support pulse execution command Flag: None
(ZRSTP).
: First destination device : Second destination device

Command
For ES series models, standard and High speed counters cannot be mixed.
Explanation
For EH/EP series models, standard and High speed counters can be mixed use.
When > , then only device is reset.
This command is usually pulse execution (ZRSTP).

When X0 is ON, M300 to M399 (auxiliary relays) will be reset to OFF.

Program
When X1 is ON, C0 to C127 (16-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and
Example
contact and coil will be reset to OFF)
When X10 is ON, T0 to T127 (timer) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and
coil will be reset to OFF)
When X2 is ON, the status of S0 to S127 will be reset to OFF.
When X3 is ON, the data of D0 to D100 (data register) will be reset to 0.
When X4 is ON, C235 to C254 (32-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and
contact and coil will be reset to OFF)
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X2
ZRST S0 S127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
X4
ZRST C235 C254
The RST command can be independently used in the bit device, i.e. Y, M, S and in
Footnote word device, i.e. T, C, D.
API 16 FMOV command can also be used to transmit the data of K0 to word device,
i.e. T, C, D or to bit register, i.e. KnY, KnM, KnS, just as RST command.
X0
RST M0
RST T0
RST Y0
FMOV K0 D10 K5


DECO 8 → 256 Bits Decoder ES EP EH
41 P

S Continuous Pulse
DECO DECOP
n
32-bit command
Note: When operand D is bit device, n=1~8
－－－－
When operand D is word device, n=1~4
Flag: None
ES series models do not support pulse execution command
(DECOP).
: Decode source device : Destination device for storing the encode result
Command
: Decode data length
Explanation
Decodes the data of lower “n” bit of source device and stores the result of “2 n”
bit at device .
This command is usually pulse execution (DECOP).
is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error
Program
Example will occur.
1 When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points. (Must notice the range
of the stored device after decoding. Please do not use repeatly.)
When X10 goes from Off → On, the data of X0~X2 will be decoded to M100~M107.
If data source is 1+2=3, M103 at the third position from M100 turns ON and is set to 1.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been
decoded is still action.
X10
DECOP X0 M100 K3
X2 X1 X0
0 1 1
4 2 1
3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100

is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦4, but if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error will
Program
Example occur.
2 When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points.
When X10 goes from Off → On, the data in D10 (b2 to b0) will be decoded and stored
at D20 (b7 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b8) will be all set to 0.
Decodes three lower bits in D10 and stores at eight lower bits in D20 (one bit will be 1)
and the content of eight upper bits are all 0.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been
decoded is still action.
X10
DECOP D10 D20 K3
D10
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 When 3 is specified
at b2 to b0 of D10
4 2 1
all be 0 (zero)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 result after decoding
b15 b0
D20
When 3 is specified as effective
b3 at the third position from bits, 8 points are occupied.
b0 turns ON and is set to 1

ENCO 256 → 8 Bits Encoder ES EP EH
42 P

S Continuous Pulse
ENCO ENCOP
n
32-bit command
Note: When operand S is bit device, n=1~8
－－－－
When operand S is word device, n=1~4
Flag: None
(ENCOP).
: Encode source device : Destination device for storing encode data

Command
: Encode data length
Explanation
Encodes the data of lower “2 n” bit in source device and stores the result at
device .
If the source device is a multiple bit and its value is 1, processing is performed
for the last bit position.
This command is usually pulse execution (ENCOP).

is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error
Program
Example will occur.
When X0 goes from Off → On, the data of 2 3 (M0 to M7) will be decoded and stored
at three lower bits of D0 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D0 (b15 to b3) will be all set to
0.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in
remain unchanged.
X0
ENCOP M0 D0 K3
When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.
M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
all be 0 (zero)
4 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 result after encoding
b15 D0 b0
Which point, counting from M0, is ON and stored in BIN.
is used in case of a word device, 0<n≦4. But if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error
Program
Example will occur.
When X0 goes from Off → On, the data of 2 3 (b0 to b7) in D10 will be decoded and
stored at three lower bits (b2 to b0) at D20. The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b3) will be
all set to 0. (b8 to b15 in D10 is not available)
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in
remain unchanged.
X0
ENCOP D10 D20 K3
Data inactivated
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
b15 D10
7
all be 0 (zero)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 result after encoding

b15 D20 b0
When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.


SUM Sum of ON Bits ES EP EH
43 D P

S Continuous Pulse
SUM SUMP
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
Continuous Pulse
Refer to each model specification for usage range. DSUM DSUMP
execution execution
ES series models do not support pulse execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
command (SUMP, DSUMP).
: Source device : Destination device for storing counted number

Command
If the contents of these 16 bits are all “0”, the “Zero” flag, M1020=ON.
Explanation
will occupy two registers when using in 32-bit command.
When X10 is ON, all the bits that with “1” as its content within D0 will be counted and
Program have this counted number stored in D2.
Example X10
SUM D0 D2
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3
D0 D2

BON Determine the ON Bits ES EP EH
44 D P

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command (7 STEP)
S Continuous Pulse
BON BONP
n
Note: If operand S uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
Continuous Pulse
command. DBON DBONP
execution execution
Essential condition: n=0~15 (16-bit), n=0~31 (32-bit)
Flag: None
(BONP, DBONP).
: Source device : Result device for storing determined bit :

Command
Specified determined bit
Explanation
When X0 is ON, and if the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. But if the 15th bit of D0 is “0”,
Program
M0 is OFF.
Example
Once X0 is switched to OFF, M0 will stay at its previous ON/OFF status.

X0
BON D0 M0 K15
b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=Off
D0
b15 b0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=On
. D0

MEAN Mean Value ES EP EH
45 D P

S Continuous Pulse
MEAN MEANP
n
Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in
Continuous Pulse
16-bit command. DMEAN DMEANP
execution execution
Essential condition: n=1~64
Flag: None
ES series models do not support pulse execution
command (MEANP, DMEANP).
: Starting device for taking mean value : Destination device for storing
Command
the mean value : Device number for taking mean value
Explanation
Add the contents of registers specified by , and have the sum divided by
to take a mean value. To save this mean value in the designated .
If there is remainder in this calculation, ignore the remainder.
If the specified device number exceeds the normal usable range, only those that within
the range could be processed.
If the value of is out of the stated range (1~64), an “operation error” will be
generated.
When X10 is ON, add up the contents of the three registers starting from D0 (specified
Program
by this command), and divide the sum by three to take the mean vlaue. Then store this
Example
mean value in the specified device D10 and ignore the remainder.
X10
MEAN D0 D10 K3
(D0+D1+D2)/D3 D10
D0 K100
D1 K113 K112 D10
reminder = 3, be ignored
D2 K125


ANS Alarm Device Output ES EP EH
46 －

S Continuous
ANS －－
m execution
D
32-bit command
Note: Operand S available range: for EP series: T0~T191
－－－－
for EH series: T0~T199.
Operand m available range: K0~K32,767, in units of 100 ms Flag: M1048 (Alarm point is activated)
Operand D available range: S900~S1023 M1049 (Monitor is valid)
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Refer to following for detail.
(ANS).
Command : A timer which detect alarm : Time setting : Alarm device

Explanation ANS command is used to drive the output alarm device.
If alarm device S999=On when X3 is On for more than 5 seconds, S999 will keep
being On afterward even X3=Off later. (but T10 will be reset to Off, present value=0)
X3
Program ANS T10 K50 S999
Example

ANR Alarm Device Reset ES EP EH
47 P －

Continuous Pulse
Note: No operand ANR ANRP
execution execution
command (ANR, ANRP).
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
ANR command is used to reset alarm device.

Command
When several alarm devices are ON, the lower number of alarm device will be reset.
Explanation
This command is usually pulse execution (ANRP).
When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON more than 2 seconds, the alarm device
Program
S910 is ON. Then even if X10 and X11 are changed to OFF, the alarm device S910
Example
will still remain ON. (But T10 will reset to OFF, present value is 0.)
When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON less than 2 seconds, the present value of
T10 is reset to 0.

When X3 goes from Off → On,

for EP series, the activated alarm device S896~S1023 will be reset.
for EH series, the activated alarm device S899~S1023 will be reset.
When X3 goes from Off → On again, the second lower alarm device will be reset.
X10 X11
ANS T10 K20 S910
X3
ANRP
Flag:
Footnote 1. M1048 (Alarm device is activated): When M1049 is driven to be ON, if any one alarm
device of S899~S1023 (in EP series)/ S899~S1023 (in EH series) outputs, M1048 is
ON.
2. M1049(Monitor is valid): When M1049 is driven to be ON, D1049 will automatically

display the lowest number during the execution of this command.
Application of alarm device:
I/O devices arrangement:
X0: forward switch, X1: backward switch, X2: front location switch, X3: back location
switch, X4: alarm device reset button, Y0: forward, Y1: forward, Y2: alarm indicator,
S910: forward alarm device, S920: backward alarm
M1000
M1049
Y0 X2
ANS T0 K100 S910
Y1 X3
ANS T1 K200 S920
X0 X2
Y0
Y0
X1 X3
Y1
Y1
M1048
Y2
X4
ANRP

1. When M1049=On, M1048, D1049 is valid.

2. If Y0=ON more than 10 seconds and not reach the front location X2, S910=ON.
3. If Y1=ON more than 20 seconds and not reach the back location X3, S920=ON.
4. When backward switch X1=ON, backward device Y1=ON and the signal reach
the back location switch X3, Y1 is switched to be OFF.
5. If there is a driven alarm device, alarm indicator Y2=ON.
6. The alarm device which have been activated will be reset one by one, each time
the reset button X4 of alarm device is ON during the execution of this command.
The lower activated alarm device is reset on every execution of this command.

SQR Square Root of BIN ES EP EH
48 D P －

S Continuous Pulse
SQR DSQR
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
Continuous Pulse
Refer to each model specification for usage range. SQRP DSQRP
execution execution
(SQR, SQRP, DSQR, DSQRP).
M1021 (Borrow flag)
M1067 (Operation error)
: Source device : Destination device which store the result

Command
This command performs a square root operation on source device and stores
Explanation
the result at the destination device .
only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a
negative value will result in an “operation error” this command will not be
executed.The error flag M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code
“0E1B” (hexadecimal).
The operation result of is calculated as the integer only, decimal is ignored. If
there is decimal ignored, the Borrow flag M1021=ON.
When operation result of is 0, the Zero flag M1020=On.
When X10=On, the content of D0 will be stored in D12 after the operation of square
Program
root.
Example X10
SQR D0 D12
D0 D12

API Convert BIN Integer to Binary

Applicable models
FLT ES EP EH
49 D P Floating Point
－－

S Continuous Pulse
FLT DFLT
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support pulse execution Continuous Pulse
command (FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP). FLTP DFLTP
execution execution
Flag: M1081 (FLT command function
exchange)
: Source device : Destination device which store the converted result

Command
When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating
Explanation
point. At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT occupies 1 register
and Destination device occupies 2 registers.
If absoluted value of conversion result is larger than max. floating value, carry flag
M1022=On.
If absoluted value of conversion result is less than min. floating value, carry flag
M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
When M1081 is ON, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN
integer. (ignore the decimal) At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT
occupies 2 registers and Destination device occupies 1 register. The action is
the same as command INT.
If conversion result exceeds BIN integer range of (16-bit is -32,768~32,767 and
32-bit is -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647), it wil be represented with max. value or min.
value. Then carry flag will be set to M1022=On.
If the decimal of conversion result is ignored, borrow flag M1021=On.
After conversion, is saved by 16 bits.
When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating
Program
Example point.
1 When X10 is ON, D0 (BIN integer) is converted to D13, D12 (binary floating point).
When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (BIN integer) are converted to D21, D20 (binary floating
point).
If D0=K10, X10 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after conversioin will be H41200000
and it will be saved in 32-bit register D12(D13).
If 32-bit register D0(D1)=K100,000, X11 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after
conversioin will be H4735000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D20(D21).

M1002
RST M1081
X10
FLT D0 D12
X11
DFLT D0 D20
When M1081 is On, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN
Program
Example integer. (ignore the decimal)
2 When X10 is ON, D0 and D1(binary floating point) are converted to D12 (BIN integer).
If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The execution result will be
D12=K32,767, M1022=On due to the value exceeds max. value of 16-bit register D12.
When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (binary floating point) are converted to D21, D20 (BIN
integer). If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The result will be saved
in 32-bit register D20(D21).
M1002
SET M1081
X10
FLT D0 D12
X11
DFLT D0 D20
Please use this application command to complete the following operation.

Program
Example
3 (D10) (X7~X0) K61.5 (D21,D20)
16 bit BIN 2 bit BCD 6
7
1 2 5 4 (D31,D30)
decimal floating point (for monitor)
(D101,D100) (D200) BIN (D301,D300) 8
(D41,D40)
binary floating point binary floating point
3 32 bit integer
(D203,D202)
(D401,D400)

M1000
FLT D10 D100
1
BIN K2X0 D200
2
FLT D200 D202
3
DEDIV K615 K10 D300
4
DEDIV D100 D202 D400
5
DEMUL D400 D300 D20
6
DEBCD D20 D30
7
DINT D20 D40
8
1. Covert D10 (BIN integer) to D101, D100 (binary floating point).
2. Covert the value of X7~X0 (BCD value) to D200 (BIN value).
3. Covert D200 (BIN integer) to D203, D202 (binary floating point).
4. Save the result of K615 ÷ K10 to D301, D300 (binary floating point).
5. The division of binary floating point:
Save the result of of (D101, D100) ÷ (D203, D202) to D401, D400 (binary floating
point).
6. The multiplication of binary floating point:
Save the result of (D401, D400) × (D301, D300) to D21, D20 (binary floating point).
7. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to decimal floating point (D31, D30).
8. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to BIN integer (D41, D40).


REF I/O Refresh Immediately ES EP EH
50 P

D Continuous Pulse
REF REFP
Note: Operand D should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…
32-bit command
etc., so it should be X0, X10, Y0, Y10… etc., please refer to
－－－－
the command explanation.
Essential condition: n=8~256, and should be a multiple of 8, Flag: None
i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32…etc.
(REFP).
: Starting device of I/O refresh : Refreshed I/O number

Command
The state of all PLC inputs and outputs will be refreshed after scanning to END. The
Explanation
state of inputs is read from external inputs to save in inputs memory. The output
terminals send outputs memory to output device after END command. Therefore, this
command can be used during algorithm process when need to input/output the newest
data.
The state of all inputs and outputs may change immediately after they are scanned.
If the user does not want to wait for the next scan time, the REF command may be
used.
should always be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be X0,
X10, Y0, Y10… etc. should always be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32…etc.
and its available range is 8~256. If the value of is out of the stated range
(8~256) or not a multiple of 8, an “operation error” will be generated. The usage range
may be different by various models, please refer to the footnote for detail.
When X0 = ON, PLC will read the state of X0~X7 input points immediately and
Program
Example refreshed. There is no input delay occurs.
1 X0
REF X0 K16

When X0 = ON, the output signal Y0~Y7 (8 points) are sent to output terminal
Program
Example immediately and refreshed. It desn’t need to output till END command.
2 X0
REF Y0 K8
For ES and EP series models, the input and output points processed by this command
Footnote are the I/O points of MPU: X0~X17, Y0~Y17 and n=K8 or K16.
API Refresh and Adjust the Response

Applicable models
REFF ES EP EH
51 P Time of Input Filter
－

n Continuous Pulse
REFF REFFP
execution execution
Note: None
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
: Response time setting, in units of ms.

Command
PLC is provided with the input filter to prevent the noises or interferences. The input
Explanation
filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC are digital filters and using REFF
command can adjust the response time of the input filters. Command will set in
D1020 and D1021 directly and adjust reaction time of X0~X7 and X10~X17
separately.
The operation rules when the input filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC adjust
the response time:
When the power of PLC turns from Off to On or execute to END command,
response time is decided by the content value of D1020 and D1021.
During the program, the setting value can be moved to D1020 and D1021by using
MOV command.
The response time can be changed by using REFF command in the execution of
the program. At this time, the response time specified by REFF command will be
moved into D1020, D1021and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.

When the power of PLC turns from Off to On, the X20
Program REFF K5
Example response time of X0~X17 inputs is decided by the
X0
content value of D1020 and D1021. Y1
When X20=On, REFF K5 command is executed, X20
respone time is changed to 5 ms and and it will REFF K20
be adjusted again in the next scan. X1
Y2
When X20=Off, the REFF command will not be
executed, the response time is changed to 20ms
and it will be adjusted again in the next scan. END
When using the interrupt parameters, or high-speed counter, or SPD command (API
Footnote 56), the response time of corresponding input terminals won’t delay and its action has
no ralation with this command.

MTR Input Matrix ES EP EH
52 －

S Continuous
MTR －－
D1 execution
D2
n 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Operand S should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…
etc., so it should be X0, X10… etc. and occupies 8 Flag: M1029 Execution completed
continuous devices. flag
Operand D1 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…
etc., so it should be Y0, Y10… etc. and occupies n
continuous devices
Operand D2 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…
etc., so it should be Y0, M0, S0… etc.
Essential condition: n=2~8
Command : Head address of input matrix : Head address of output matrix :

Explanation Corresponding head address of matrix scan : Number of banks for the matrix
is the head address that specify all inputs of the matrix. Once the input is
specified, a selection of 8 continuous input devices is called as “input matrix”.
is the head address of transister output Y of the matrix.

This command allows a selection of 8 continuous input devices (head address )

to be used multiple ( ) times. Each input has more than one and different
signal being processed. Each set of 8 input signals are grouped into a “bank” and
there are number of banks. Each bank is selected by the quantity of outputs
from , used to achieve the matrix are equal to the number of banks . The
result is stored in a matrix-table which starts at corresponding head address .
The maximum inputs can achieve 64 inputs (8 inputs’ 8 banks).
When this command is used on an interrupt format, processing each bank of inputs
every 25msec. This would result in an 8 bank matrix, i.e. 64 inputs (8 inputs’ 8 banks)
being read in 200msec. Hence, this command is not available for the input signal
which its On/Off speed is over than 200ms.
It is recommended to use special auxiliary relay M1000, normally open contact.
After the completion of performing MTR command, the command execution completed
flag M1029 is turned ON and this flag is automatically reset when the MTR command
is turned OFF.
This command can only be used ONCE.
When X0=On, MTR command starts to execute. The external 2 banks, total 16
Program
Example devices are read by order and the result are stored in the internal relay M10~M17,
M20~M27.
M1000
MTR X40 Y40 M10 K2
The figure below is an example wiring diagram for the operation of MTR command.
The external 2 banks consist of X40~47 and Y40~41 and total 16 devices correspond
to the internal relay M10~M17, M20~M27 are used with MTR command. For a general
precaution to aid successful operation, diodes should be placed after each input
devices. These diodes should have a rating of 0.1A, 50V.

Diode
0.1A/50V
M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27
Input devices X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47
M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17
COM X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47
COM Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y46 Y47
When output Y40 is ON, only those inputs in the first bank are read. These result are
stored in auxiliary coils M10~M17. The second step involves Y40 going OFF and Y41
coming ON and this time only inputs in the second bank are read. These results are
stored in M20~M27.
Read input signal in the first bank
Y40 1 3
Read input signal in the second bank
Y41 2 4
25ms
Processing time of each bank is about 25ms

API High-speed Counter Comparison Applicable models

HSCS ES EP EH
53 D SET

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command
S1 －－－－
S2
Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, Continuous
DHSCS －－
C246~C249, C251~C254 or available high-speed execution
counters, please refer to the footnote for details. Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the
The usage range of operand D: I010 to I060 can be set, footnote for details.
also can use index register E, F to modify. M1289~M1294. High-speed
There is no 16-bit command for API 53, only 32-bit counter interrupt disabled
command DHSCS is available. flags in EH series models.
Refer to the program example
3 below.
In ES and EP series models, operand S2 and D cannot use
index register E, F to modify.
: Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare

Command
result
Explanation
All high-speed counters use an interrupt process, therefore, all compare result devices
are updated immediately.
HSCS command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter
against a selected comapre value . When the counters currrent value
changes to a value equal to , the device specified as is set ON. Even if
the compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be ON.
If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value
and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will
immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17, and other Y devices will be affected
by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output, not being affected by
the scan cycle.
After PLC perform the RUN command, if M0=On, DHSCS command starts to operate.
Program
Example Y10 will ON immediately when C235’s present value stepped from 99→100 or 101→
1 100 and be ON constantly.
M1000
DCNT C235 K1000
M0
DHSCS K100 C235 Y10 On immediately

Difference between Y output of DHSCS command and general Y output:

Program
Example When C249’s value stepped from 99→100 and 101→100, Y10 output of DHSCS
2 command immediately output to the external output by using interrupt process so it
is irrelevant to the program scan time. However, there will still be a delay due to the
output of module relay (10ms) or transistor (10us).
When the present value of high-speed timer C249 changes from 99 to 100, C249
will be activated, and Y17 will be ON after END command due to the program scan
time.
M1000
DCNT C249 K100
DHSCS K100 C249 Y10 ON immediately

C249
SET Y17
High-speed counter interrupt:

Program
Example ES series models do not support high-speed counter interrupt function.
3 The limit when EP series models using high-speed counter interrupt
When using DHSCS command to specify I interrupt, the specified high-speed
counter can not be use in other DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ command. If using it, it
will result in error.
The interrupt pointers I010 to I060 can be used as D operand of DHSCS command
and this enables the interrupt routine to be executed when the value of the
specified high-speed counter reaches the value in DHSCS command.
In EP series models, there are six high-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030,
I040, I050, I060 6 points can be used. I010 is used with C235, C241, C244, C246,
C247, C249, C251, C252, C254. I020 is used with C236; I030 is used with C237,
C242; I040 is used with C238; I050 is used with C239 and I060 is used with C240.
When the present value of C251 changes from 99→100and 101→100, the
program will jump to the interrupt pointer I010 to execute the interrupt routine.

M1000
DCNT C251 K1000
DHSCS K100 C251 I010
FEND
M1000
I010 Y1
IRET
END
In EP series models, M1059 is high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag.

In EH series models, M1289~M1294 are high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag, I010
to I060 masked. For example, when M1294 is On, Interrupt pointer I060 masked.
Interrupt pointer interrupt inhibit Interrupt pointer
interrupt inhibit flag
I Number flag I Number
I010 M1289 I040 M1292
I020 M1290 I050 M1293
I030 M1291 I060 M1294
The ouput contact of high-speed counter and the compare output of DHSCS (API 53)
command, DHSCR (API 54) command and DHSZ(API 55) command are all activated
Footnote
when there are counted inputs. If using data operation command, such as DADD,
DMOV…etc. commands to change the present value of high-speed counter equal to
the setting value, there is comparsion will be set or output because there is no counted
inputs.
High-speed counter provided in ES series models: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.
Type 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
Input
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input

D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input
1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up
to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or
equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will
be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is
almost 7KHz.
2. In ES series models, DHSCS and DHSCR command can not be used more than 4
times.

High-speed counter provided in EP series models:

1-phase high-speed counter: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.
Type 1-phase 2
1-phase 1 input 2-phase inputs
inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
Input
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
X4 U/D
X5 U/D
1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up
to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or
equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will
be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is
almost 7KHz.
2. Input X5 has two functions.
• When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.
• When M1260=On, X5 is the global reset of C235~C239.
3. In EP series models, DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ command can not be used more
than 6 times.
High-speed counter provided in EH series models:
1. Program interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter, C235~C240: general counting
frequency is up to 10KHz, maximum total counting frequency is 20 KHz.
2. DVP-EH series has four Hardware high-speed counter (hereinafter referred to as
HHSC), HHSC0~3 and available device number for HHSC0~3 are C241~ C254.
Pulse output frequency of each group can reach 250 KHz.
Available device number for HHSC0: C241, C246, C251
• Each HHSC can only be specified one time for one device number. Use
DCNT command to specify the HHSC.
• Available counter modes of each HHSC:
1). 1-phase 1 input, also called as Pulse/Direction mode
2). 1-phase 2 inputs, also called as CW/CCW mode.
3). 2-phase 2 inputs, also called as AB phase mode.

3. Please refer to the following table for the available high-speed counters:
Counter Program interrupt type
Type Hardware high-speed counter
1-phase high-speed counter
Type 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase input
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
X0 U/D U/D U A
X1 U/D D B
X2 U/D R R R
X3 U/D S S S
X4 U/D U/D U A
X5 U/D D B
X6 R R R
X7 S S S
X10 U/D U A
X11 D B
X12 R R R
X13 S S S
X14 U/D U A
X15 D B
X16 R R R
X17 S S S

4. In the program of DVP EH series models, there is no limited using time for
hardware high-speed counter related commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and
DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands
simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one group setting and DHSZ
command will use two groups settings. When these commands are executed
simultaneously, the total used groups settings can not exceed eight groups
settings. If exceeding eight groups settings, system will totalize the used memory
units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will
be ignored.
5. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:

Current value Comparison value
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D of counter reached setting
Counting pulse U
X0 X4 X10 X14 HHSC0
A
HHSC1
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Comparator
HHSC2
Counting pulse B
X1 X5 X11 X15
D HHSC3
DHSCS occupies one group setting value

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 DHSCR occupies one group setting value
Counting mode Counting Comparison value DHSCZ occupies two groups setting value
D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228
up/down flag reached output
Setting value:0~3 respectively selection
represent Mode 1~4
(1~4 frequency mode )
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D mode setting flag HHSC0 M1246 M1251 High speed Comparison value
comparison reached operation
C241 C242 C243 C244 HHSC1 M1247 M1252 command
M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244
DHSCS SET/RESET
HHSC2 M1248 M1253
DHSCR I 010 ~ I 060 interrupt
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 HHSC3 M1249 M1254 counting value reset
DHSCZ
X2 X6 X12 X16
AND Reset signal R
M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270 OR
Interrupt inhibit flag

M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278 I 010 M1289
I 020 M1290
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 I 030 M1291
X3 X7 X13 X17 I 040 M1292
AND Start signal S
M1265 M1267 M1269 M1271 OR I 050 M1293
I 060 M1294
M1273 M1275 M1277 M1279
6. HHSC0~3 all have reset and start signal of external input. Reset signal (R) can be
set by M1272/M1274/M1276/M1278 (belong to HHSC0 ~3) and start signal can be
set by M1273/M1275/M1277/M1279 (belong to HHSC0 ~3). When using
high-speed counter, if do not use the external signal input of R and S, you can set
M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270 and M1265/M1267/M1269 /M1271 as TRUE. Close
the operation of the input signal and the corresponding external inputs can be used
as general inputs. Please refer to the above example figure for usage.
7. Select counter modes

High-speed conter of ES / EP series is 2-phase 2 inputs counter mode and set by
special device D1022 with four double frequency modes. The content value of
register D1022 is loaded at the first scan time when PLC controller switch from
Stop to Run status. (Only V5.5 and above of DVP-ES series MPU support this
function)
Device No. Function Explanation
Use counting method of counter to set
D1022
double frequency
D1022=K1 Select (normal frequency) mode
D1022=K2 Select (double frequency) mode
D1022=K4 Select (4 times frequency) mode

Double frequency mode:

Counter
Signal Diagram
mode
1 A-phase
(normal frequency)
B-phase
Counting up Counting down
2 A-phase
(double frequency)
2-phase 2 inputs
B-phase
4
A-phase
(four times frequency)
B-phase
According to the different type of counter modes, HHSC 0~3 of EH series models can set
normal, double, thriple and four times these four frequency modes by using special
device D1225 to D1228:
Counter mode Signal Diagram

Setting value
Type Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)
of special D
0 U/D
(normal
frequency) U/D FLAG
1-phase
1 input 1 U/D
(double
frequency) U/D FLAG
0 U
(normal
frequency) D
1-phase
2 inputs 1 U
(double
frequency) D

Counter mode Signal Diagram

Setting value
Type Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)
of special D
0 A
((normal
frequency)) B
1 A
(double
2-phase frequenc) B
2 inputs 2 A
(thriple
frequenc) B
3 A
(four times
frequenc) B
U/D FLAG are special M device, M1241~M1244 and each indicates the setting flag of
C241~C244 counting up and down.
Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:
Flag Function Explanation
Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting
M1150
value compare mode
DHSZ command multi groups setting value compare mode
M1151
execution completed
Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control
M1152
mode
M1153 Frequency control mode execution completed
Specify counting direction of C235 ~ C244 high-speed counter
M1235 ~ M1244 When M12□□=Off, C2□□ counting up
When M12□□=On, C2□□ counting down
Monitor counting direction of C246~C249, C251~C254
M1246 ~ M1249 high-speed counter
M1251 ~ M1254 When C2□□ counting up, M12□□=Off.
C2□□ counting down, M12□□=On.
M1260 X5 is the reset input signal of all high-speed counters
M1261 High-speed compare flag of DHSCR command
HHSC0 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact
M1264
disable


M1265 HHSC0 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disable
M1266 HHSC1 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable
M1272 HHSC0 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact
M1273 HHSC0 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact
M1312 C235 Start input control
M1320 C235 Reset input control

Special
Function Explanation
register
D1022 Double frequency selection of AB phase counter in ES/EP series models
DHSZ command for table counting register of multi-group setting
D1150
comparison mode
D1151 DHSZ command for table counting register of frequency control mode
D1152
(lower-bit) DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence
D1153 from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152.
(upper-bit)
D1225 First counter counting method setting, C241, C246, C251 counter mode
D1226 Second counter counting method setting, C242, C247, C252 counter mode
D1227 Third counter counting method setting, C243, C248, C253 counter mode
D1228 Forth counter counting method setting, C244, C249, C254 counter mode
Counter mode of Hardware high-speed counter, HHSC0~HHSC3 of EH
series model
D1225 ~ When setting value is 0, it is normal frequency counter mode.
D1228 When setting value is 1, it is double frequency counter mode.
When setting value is 2, it is triple frequency counter mode.
When setting value is 3, it is four times frequency counter mode.
API 32-bit High-speed Counter Applicable models

HSCR ES EP EH
54 D Comparison Reset

S1 －－－－
S2
D 32-bit command (13STEPS)
Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, Continuous
DHSCR －－
C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of execution
API 53 DHSCS command for details. Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the
Operand D uses the same counter as S2 operand. footnote of API 53 DHSCS
command for details.
There is no 16-bit command for API 54, only 32-bit
command DHSCR is available. M1261. High-speed counter
external reset mode selection.
ES and EP series models
In ES and EP series models, D operand cannot use C doesn’t support. Refer to the
device. footnote for details.
In ES and EP series models, S2, D operand cannot use
index register E, F to modify.
: Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare

Command
result
Explanation
HSCR command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter
against a selected comapre value . When the counters currrent value
changes to a value equal to , the device specified as is set Off. Even if the
compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be Off.

If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value
and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will
immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17 (specified Y output will be reset),
and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are
immediate output, not being affected by the scan cycle.
When M0=On and C251’s present value stepped from 99→100 or 101→100, Y10 will
Program
Example be set Off.
1 When C251’s present value change from 199 to 200, the contact C251 will be On and
force Y0=On, but there will still be a program scan time delay output.
Y10 is status immediately reset device when specified counter reach. It also can be
used to specify the same number high-speed counter. Please refer to the program
example 2.
M1000
DCNT C251 K200
M0
DHSCR K100 C251 Y10
C251
SET Y0
When specifing the same number high-speed counter, the current value of high-speed
Program
Example counter C251 will change from 999 1000 or 1001 1000 and C251 contact will be
2 reset to Off.
M1000
DCNT C251 K200
DHSCR K1000 C251 C251

1000
200
output it doesn’t affect by scan time

C251 contact
affect by scan time

Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for the high-speed counters
Footnote and their usage range provided in each series models.
For EH series, M1261 is used to specify the external reset mode of high-speed
counter. Some high-speed counters provide input points for external reset. When
these input points being On, the corresponding current value of high-speed counter
will all be reset to 0 and the output contacts will turn Off. Therefore, user must use flag
M1261 to specify the external reset mode of high-speed counter and force the external
output being executed.

The function limit of M1261: Only can be used in hardware high-speed counters
C241~C254.
The followings are the using example:
The input point of external reset of C251 is X2.
If Y10=On.
When M1261=Off, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact
turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, there is no counter input
and the compared result does not output. Therefore, Y10=On will remain
unchaged.
When M1261=On, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact
turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, although there is no
counter input, but compared result will still output. Therefore, the content of Y10
will be reset.
M1000
DCNT C251 K1000
DHSCR K0 C251 Y10

X10
M1261
API Zone Comparison (High-speed

Applicable models
HSZ ES EP EH
55 D Counter)
－

S1 －－－－
S2
S 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
D Continuous
DHSZ －－
Note: Operand S1 should be equal to or smaller than operand S2 execution
(S1 ≤ S2) Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the
Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, footnote of API 53 DHSCS
C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API command.
53 DHSCS command for details. M1150, M1151. DHSZ command
Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. execute multi devices comparison
mode. Refer to the program 3 below.
There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command
EP series models do not support
DHSZ is available.
these flags.
M1152, M1153 DHSZ command has
In EP series models, operand D cannot use index register E, been used as frequency control
F to modify. mode. Refer to the program 4 below.
EP series models do not support
these flags.
Command : Lower-limit value of zone comparison : Upper-limit value of zone

Explanation comparison : Number of high-speed counter : compared result
should be equal to or smaller than (S1 ≦ S2).
Output operation won’t be affected by the scan time.
All outputs and zone comparison all use interrupt operation.

The specified device is Y0, then Y0~Y2 will be occupied automatically.

Program
Example When DHSZ command has been executed and high-speed counter C246 is counting,
1 if the upper- and lower limit value is reached, one of Y0~Y2 will be On.
M1000
DCNT C246 K20000
DHSZ K1500 K2000 C246 Y0

Y0
When current value of C246 < K1500, Y0On
Y1
When K1500 < current value of C246 < K2000, Y1=On
Y2
When current value of C246 > K2000, Y2=On
When using DHSZ command to control and stop high/low speed, C251 is AB phase
Program high-speed counter. There will be comparison value output of DHSZ command only
Example when counting pulse is stored in C251. Therefore, even the counting current value is
2
0, Y10 will not be On.
When X10=On, DHSZ command force Y10=On when counting current value ≦
K2,000. In order to improve this problem, use DZCPP command to compare C251
against and K2,000 when the program RUN at the beginning. When counting current
value ≦ K2,000, Y10=On and DZCPP command is Pulse execution command.
Command DZCPP only can be executed ONCE in program and Y10 will be still be On.
When drive contact X10=Off, Y10~Y12 will be reset to Off.
X20
RST C251
ZRST Y10 Y12

M1000
DCNT C251 K10000
X10
DZCPP K2000 K2400 C251 Y10
DHSZ K2000 K2400 C251 Y10

Timing diagram
Speed of variable
speed rotational
equipment
0
X10
high speed
forward Y10
low speed
forward Y11
Stop Y12
2400
current value of 2000
C251 counter
0
When using the multi groups setting value comparison mode of DHSZ command, if
Program of DHSZ command is specified as special auxiliary relay M1150, it can execte a
Example current value of high-speed counter and has the function which can compare and
3
output multi groups setting value.
Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can
be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified
by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is
defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80
and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been
executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of
high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It
only can be M1150 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1150,
then will be disabled.
The comparison table of high-speed counter consists of the head number of register
specified by and bank numbers (groups number) specified by .
Please input the setting value of each register before the command being executed.
When current value of C251 high-speed counter specified by is equal to the
setting value of (D1, D0), output Y specified by D2 will be reset to Off (D3=K0) or On
(D3=K1) and latched. All of output Y use interrupt operation.

When the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value of the first groups in the
comparison table, D1150=K1. If the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value
of the second groups, D1150=K2. Then the comparison will continute to execute in the
above described order. After the comparison operation of all groups are completed,
M1151=On for one scan cycle and D1150 will be reset to 0, then jump back to the first
groups to execute.
When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be
interruptted and the content of table counting register D1150 will be reset to 0. But the
ON/OFF state is unchanged at that time.
When this command command has been executed and first scan to END command,
all setting value inside of the diagram are valid.
This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series
models, this function does not provided.
This function of this command only can be used in hard ware high-speed counter
C241~C254.
X10
DHSZ D0 K4 C251 M1150
Comparison table
32-bit comparison data Number of output On/Off Table counting
High word Low word Y indication register D1150
D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D2 (K10) D3 (K1) 0
D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D6 (K11) D7 (K1) 1
D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D10 (K10) D11 (K0) 2
D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D14 (K11) D15 (K0) 3
K10:Y10 K0:Off 0→1→2→3→0
K11:Y11 K1:On Cyclic scan
C251
current value
400
300
200
100
Y10
Y11
M1151
3
2
1
D1050 0 0


Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting
M1150
value compare mode
For DHSZ command, Multi groups setting value compare mode
M1151
execution completed
Special register Function Explanation

D1150 For DHSZ command, Table index of DHSZ Y output
Frequency control operation (Combined DHSZ and DPLSY command): When

Program
Example of DHSZ command is special auxiliary relay M1152, it can execte a current value of
4 high-speed counter and has the function which can control pulse output frequency of
DPLSY command.
Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can
be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified
by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is
defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80
and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been
executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of
high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It
only can be M1152 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1152,
then will be disabled.
This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series
models, this function does not provided. For EH series models, it only can be used in
hardware high-speed counters C241~C254. Please input the setting value of each
register before the command being executed.
When the current value of C251 specified by is within the range between the
upper- and lower-limit of (D1, D0), the setting value of (D3, D2) will be converted to
pulse output frequency of DPLSY command. Then, the second groups in the
comparison table will continue to execute. After the comparison operation of all groups
are completed, M1153=On for one scan cycle and D1151 will be reset to 0, then jump
back to the first groups to execute.
If desiring to stop the execution at the last group, Please set the content of the last
group as KO.
When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be
interruptted and the content of table counting register D1151 will be reset to 0.

X10
DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152
PLS M0
M0
DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0
Comparison table
32-bit comparison data Pulse output frequency Table counting
High word Low word 0~250KHz register D1151
D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D3, D2 (K5,000) 0
D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D7, D6 (K10,000) 1
D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D11, D10 (K15,000) 2
D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D15, D14 (K6,000) 3
D17 (K0) D16 (K0) D19, D18 (K0) 4
0→1→2→3→4
Cyclic scan
C251 500
current value
400
300
200
pulse output frequency
100
0
(Hz)
15000
10000
5000
0
M1153
4
3
2
1
D1051 0 0
Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control
M1152
mode
For DHSZ command, frequency control mode execution
M1153
completed

D1151 Table index changed by DHSZ D value
D1152 (low word) DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read
in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in
D1153 (high word) D1153 and D1152.
D1336 (low word)
Pulse numbers of DPLSY command output
D1337 (high word)

The completed program is shown below:

X10
DMOVP K5000 D2
DMOVP K10000 D6
DMOVP K15000 D10
DMOVP K6000 D14
DMOVP K0 D18
DMOVP K100 D0
DMOVP K200 D4
DMOVP K300 D8
DMOVP K400 D12
DMOVP K0 D16
DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152
PLS M0
M0
DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0
frequency pulse output

number
Please do not change the setting value in this comparison table during the execution
of DHSZ command.
When the program has been executed to END command, the specified data will be
operated shown as the above example program. Therefore, DPLSY command should
be executed after the execution of DHSZ command.


SPD Speed Detection ES EP EH
56

S1 Continuous
SPD －－
S2 execution
D
32-bit command
Note: The usage of Operand S1: In ES and EP series models, －－－－
operand S1 only can be specified as X1~X2. In EH series Flag: M1100. SPD command sampling
models, operand S1 only can be specified as X0~X3. one time flag
: External pulse input : Pulse reveived time(ms) : Detection

Command
result
Explanation
: Specify the input of external pulse
Pulse inputs of each series models
ES series models
Models EH series models
(V5.7 and above) and EP series models
Available
X1, X2 X0~X3
inputs
Count the number of pulse received at the inputs specified by during the time
specified by (unit is ms) and store te result in the register specified by .
occupies 5 registers, +1, indicate the detection value of previous
pulse, +3, +2 indicate the present accumulated count value of pulse and
+4 indicates the remaining count time, the max. can be 32767ms.
Measured pulse frequency:
Pulse speed of each series models
ES series models
Models EH series models
(V5.7 and above) and EP series models
Max. measured X1(30KHz), X2(10KHz) X0/X1 (250KHz)
frequency Total frequency is less than 30KHz X2/X3 (10KHz)
When using this command in EH series models, the pulse frequency of external input
X0~X3 and the frequency of hardware high-speed counter are the same and both of
them all can reach 250KHz.
This command is mainly used to obtain a proportional value of rotation speed. The
result and rotation speed are in proportion. The following equation can used to
obtain the rotation speed of motor.
60(D0) N: Rotation speed
N= × 10 3 (rpm ) The number of pulses per rotation of rotation
nt n:
equipment
t: Detection time specified by (ms)
If one of X0~X3 is specified, the specified device can not be used as the pulse input of
high-speed counter or external interrupt signal.

When SPD command has been executed and M1100 (SPD command sampling one
time flag)=On, SPD command will execute sampling one time. SPD command will
collect data one time when the movement of M1100 turning from Off to On, then stop.
If desiring to continue the collection, be sure to turn M1100 Off and execute SPD
command again.
When X7=On, D2 will count the high-speed pulse input from X1. After 1,000ms, it will
Program
stop counting automatically and store the result in D0.
Example
After 1000ms counting completed, the content of D2 will be reset to 0. When X7 turns
On again, D2 will recount.
X7
SPD X1 K1000 D0
X7
X1
D2: current
value D0: detection
value
D2: content
value
1000ms 1000ms
1000
D4: content
D4:remaining time (ms)
value
In ES series models (V5.7 and above), if X1 or X2 is used in SPD command, then the
Footnote related high-speed counters or external interrupts I101, I201 can not be used.

PLSY Pulse Output ES EP EH
57 D

S1 Continuous
PLSY －－
S2 execution
D
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to
Continuous
the command explanation for details. DPLSY －－
execution
Flag: M1010~M1345. Refer to the
In ES series models, PLSR command can be used twice but footnote.
the output cannot be repeat.

: Pulse output frequency : Pulse output number : Pulse output

Command
device (Please use the transistor output as output module)
Explanation
specified as the pulse output frequency
Output frequency range of each series models
EP series
Models ES series models EH series
models
Output
1~10,000Hz 1~32,000Hz 1~200,000Hz
frequency range
specified as the pluse output number. 16-bit command: 1~32,767. 32-bit
command: 2,147,483,647.
Numbers of continuous pulses of each series models
ES series models and EP series EH series models (TR
Models
models models)
Specified method of M1010（Y0） ON Designated pulse output
continuous pulses M1023（Y1） ON number is set to K0
If designated pulse output number is set to “0” (zero) in EH series models, it means
that unlimit numbers of pulses will continuously output. M1010(Y0) or M1023(Y1)
should be On when unlimt numbers of pulse continuously output .
specified as the pulse output device. In EH series models, only Y0 and Y2 can
be specified. In EP/ES series models, only Y0 and Y1 can be specified.
When PLSY command has been executed, a specified quantity of pulses will
be output through pulse output device at the specified pulse output frequency
.
When using PLSY command in progam, the outputs of PLSY command, API 58 PWM
command and API 59 PLSR command cannot be the same.
In EP/ES series models, after Y0 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,
after Y1 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command is
Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.
In EH series models, Y0 and Y1 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,
after Y2, Y3 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command
is Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.
The execution completed flag M1029, M1030 should be clear by user after the
execution of the command has been completed.
When command PLSY has been executed, Y start to output pulse. At this time, the
output will not be affected if is changed. If desiring to change pulse output
number, stop command PLSY, then change the pulse number.
can be changed when command PLSY has been executed. It can change the
effective time. is changed when the program is executed to the executed
command PLSY.
The ratio of Off TIME and On TIME of the pulse output is 1:1.

The actual output pulse numbers are stored in special registers D1336~D1339 when
the program is executed to the command PLSY. Refer to the footnote for details.
The special register D and M which are allowed to be changed during the execution of
the command. Refer to the footnote for details.
When X0=On, the pulse of 1KHz for 200 times is generated from output Y0, after the
Program
pulse has been completed, M1029=On trigger Y10=On.
Example
When X0=Off, pulse output Y0 immediately stop. When X0 turns On again, the first
pulse start to output.
X0
PLSY K1000 K200 Y0
M1029
Y100
0.5ms
Output Y0 1 2 3 200
1ms
Flags description:
Footnote M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
automatically turn Off.
In EP/ES series MPU, when M1010=On, Y0 can output limitless continuous
pulses. When M1010=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y0 are decided by
.
M1023: In EP/ES series MPU, when M1023=On, Y1 can output limitless continuous
pulses. When M1023=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y1 are decided by
.
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete.
In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete.
M1078: In EP/ES series, Y0 pulse output stop.
M1079: In EP/ES series, Y1 pulse output stop.
M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange.
M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop.
M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag.
M1338: In EH series MPU, CH0 offset pulse start flag.
M1339: In EH series MPU, CH1 offset pulse start flag.
M1340: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I110) occur after CH0 pulse output complete.
M1341: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I120) occur after CH1 pulse output complete.
In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I130) occur simultaneously when CH0 pulse
M1342:
transmit.
In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I140) occur simultaneously when CH1 pulse
M1343:
transmit.
M1344: In EH series MPU, CH0 compensation pulse start flag.
M1345: In EH series MPU, CH1 compensation pulse start flag.

Special registers description of EP series MPU:

D1030: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (LOW WORD).
D1031: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (HIGH WORD).
D1032: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (LOW WORD).
D1033: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (HIGH WORD).
Special registers description of EH series MPU:
D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits
of D1220, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output
2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B
3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A
4. K3: Y1 output
D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two
bits of D1221, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y2 output
4. K3: Y3 output
D1328: CH0 offset pulse number (Low word)
D1329: CH0 offset pulse number (High word)
D1330: CH1 offset pulse number (Low word)
D1331: CH1 offset pulse number (High word)
D1332: CH0 remaining pulse number (Low word)
D1333: CH0 remaining pulse number (High word)
D1334: CH1 remaining pulse number (Low word)
D1335: CH1 remaining pulse number (High word)
D1336: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (LOW WORD).
D1337: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (HIGH WORD).
D1338: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(LOW WORD).
D1339: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(HIGH WORD).
D1344: CH0 compensation pulse number (Low word)
D1345: CH0 compensation pulse number (High word)
D1346: CH1 compensation pulse number (Low word)
D1347: CH1 compensation pulse number (High word)
When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to
output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning
cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
The explanation of PLSY pulse output command and related devices of EH series
MPU:
Explanation of PLSY command
Operand S1 S2 D
Explanation Frequency setting Pulse quantity Output device
16-bit 0~32,767Hz 0~32,767
Range Y0~Y3
32-bit 0~200KHz 0~2,147,483,647
K0: No output K0: Continuous pulse Refer to the
Definition Kn: Specified output setting of D1220,
frequency output Kn: Specified pulse output D1221

Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special D)

Data Initial
Device No. Attribute Content
format value
The phase setting of the first output pulse
D1220 16-bit R/W K0
group
The phase setting of the second output
D1221 16-bit R/W K0
pulse group
D1328 Low word The offset pulse number of the first pulse
32-bit R/W K0
D1329 High word group
D1330 Low word The offset pulse number of the first pulse
32-bit R/W K0
D1331 High word group
D1332 Low word The remaining pulse number of the first
32-bit R/W K0
D1333 High word pulse group
D1334 Low word The remaining pulse number of the second
32-bit R/W K0
D1335 High word pulse group
D1336 Low word The current value of the first pulse group
32-bit R/W K0 (The accumulated value of pulse output
D1337 High word
numbers)
D1338 Low word The current value of the second pulse
32-bit R/W K0 group (The accumulated value of pulse
D1339 High word
output numbers)
D1341 Low word
32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency
D1342 High word
D1344 Low word The compensation pulse number of the
32-bit R/W K0
D1345 High word first pulse group
D1346 Low word The compensation pulse number of the
32-bit R/W K0
D1347 High word second pulse group
Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special M)

Device Related
Attribute Content
No. setting device
M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously
M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group
M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group
M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group
M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group
M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group
M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group
M1338 R/W OFFSET start flag of the first pulse group D1328, D1329
M1339 R/W OFFSET start flag of the second pulse group D1330, D1331
Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output
M1340 R/W I110
complete.
M1341 R/W I120
complete.
M1342 R/W I130
complete.
M1343 R/W I140
complete.
M1344 R/W Compensation start flag of the first pulse group D1344, D1345
M1345 R/W Compensation start flag of the second pulse group D1346, D1347
M1347 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the first pulse group
M1348 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the second pulse group


PWM Pulse Width Modulation Output ES EP EH
58

S1 Continuous
PWM －－
S2 execution
D
32-bit command
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer
－－－－
to the command explanation.
The content value of operand S1 should be smaller than the Flag: M1010~M1337. Refer to the
content value of S2. footnote.
In ES / EP series models, command PWM only can be used
ONCE in program.
: Pulse output width : Pulse output cycle : Pulse output device

Command
(Please use transistor output as the output module)
Explanation
is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.
is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms, ≦ .
is specified as pulse output device. In EH series MPU, can be specified
as Y0, Y2. In EP/ES series models, can be specified as Y1.
Modulated pulse output of each series models
Models ES/EX series models and EP series models EH series models
PWM output Y1 Y0, Y2

PWM command can be used TWICE in the program of EH series models. PWM
command can be used ONCE in the program of EP/ES series models.
The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR command
while PWM command is used in program.
When PWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse
output cycle is output through pulse output device .
If > , an operation error will occur, M1067 =On. When is 0, there is
no pulse output from the pulse output device. When = , the pulse output
device will be always On.
, can be changed during the execution of PWM command.
When X0=On, Y1 output the following pulse. When X0=Off, output Y1 will also turn
Program
Off.
Example X0
PWM K1000 K200 Y1
t=1000ms
Output Y1
T=2000ms

Flags description:
Footnote M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
M1067: In EH series MPU, when operand is error, M1067=On.
M1070: In EP/ES series MPU, When PWM command output Y1, the pulse unit will
exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the
pulse unit is 1ms.
In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command
output Y0, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is
100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
M1071: In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command
output Y2, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1071=On, the pulse unit is
100µs, when M1071=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
Explanation of PWM command and the related device of EH series models.

Device Data Related setting
Functions of Attribute
No. Format device
EH series MPU M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously
M1070 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse time unit exchange
M1071 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse time unit exchange
M1258 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse output signal exchange
M1259 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse output signal exchange
M1344 R/W Output indication flag of the second pulse group D1344, D1345
API Pulse Wave Output with Applicable models

PLSR ES EP EH
59 D Acceleration/Deceleration Speed

S1 Continuous
PLSR －－
S2 execution
S3
Continuous
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer DPLSR －－
execution
to the command explanation. Flag: M1029, M1030. Execution
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Completed flag.
In ES series models, PLSR command can be used TWICE
in program but the output can not be the same.

: Maximum speed (HZ) : Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS)

Command
: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms) : Pulse output device (Please use
Explanation
transistor output as output module)
: the maximum frequency (Hz) of output pulse. Settings: In 16-bit command: 10
to 32,767 Hz. In 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000 Hz. The maximum speed is deemed
to be the multiples of 10, if not, the first unit will be discarded automatically. 1/10 of the
maximum speed is the one time variation of the accel/decel speed. Note that the
condition meets the acceleration requirement of the step motor and would not result in
the step motor crash..
: Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS). Settings: In 16-bit command:
110~32,767 (PLS). In 32-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647(PLS). If the setting is
below 110, the pulse cannot output normally.
: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms). Settings: below 5,000ms. The accel time
and the decel time have to be the same and cannot be set without one another.
1. The accel/decel time has to be over 10 times the maximum scan time (contents of
D1012). If the setting is below 10 times, the slope of the accel/decel speed will be
inaccurate.
2. Minimum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following
equation.
90000
If the setting is smaller than the result of the above-mentioned equation, the
acceleration/deceleration time will be greater, and if the setting is smaller than the
9000/ , the result value of 9000/ will be treated as its regular setting.
3. Maximum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following
equation.
818
4. Number of the accel/decel speed variation steps is fixed to be 10. If the input
acceleration/deceleration time is greater than the maximum setting, the maximum
setting will be treated as its regular setting. If the setting is smaller than the
minimum setting, the minimum setting will be treated as its regular setting.

PLSR command is the pulse output command with the accel/decel speed function.
The acceleration is conducted when the pulse wave goes from the static status to
reaching its targeted speed, and getting faster when the targeted speed is to be
reached. The pulse wave will stop its output once the targeted distance is reached.
When PLSR command has been executed, after set the maximum frequency ,a
quantity of total pulse numbers and accel/decel time , then output them through
pulse output device . The output frequency is first raised up in 1/10 of the
maximum frequency /10 and the time of each output frequency is fixed as 1/9 of
.
Even user change , or when PLSR command has been executed,
the output will not be affected.
After the pulse numbers of the first output pulse group (Y0, Y1) set by has been
completely output, M1029=On. After the pulse numbers of the second output pulse
group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output, , M1030=On. When the
command PLSR is activated again, M1029 or M1030 will turn to 0, then turn to 1 after
the PLSR command has been completed.
The output pulse of the first output group (Y0, Y1) and the cueent value of he second
output group (Y2, Y3) are stored in the special regisers D1336~D1339.
During the acceleration of each step, the pulse numbers (each frequency x time) may
not all be integer, but the output operation of PLC is conducted in whole integer
number. Therefore, the time of each interval may not be the same and has some
deviation. The offset is determined by the frequency value and the discarding decimal
point value. In order to ensure the output pulse numbers are correct, PLC will fill the
insufficiency pulse numbers to the last interval.
When X0=On, the maximum frequency of command PLSR is 1,000Hz. The quantity of
Program
total pulse numbers D10, accel/decel time is 3,000ms and pulses output from output
Example
Y0. The pulses are output and the output frequency is 1,000/10 Hz every time. The
time of output pulse of each frequency is fixed as 3,000/9.
When X10 is OFF, output will be interrupted, and when turned ON again, counting of
the pulse will be counted from 0.
X0
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0

Outputs: Y0 or Y2
Pulse speed(Hz)
The time interval of the Targeted speed: 10~200,000Hz

one time pulse output
is 1/9 of 1010
9 9 The max. speed of the
8 8 one time speed variation
7 Output pulses7 is 1/10 of
6 6
10-step 10-step
5 variations variations
5
4 4
3 3
16-bit command:110~32,767PLS
2 32-bit command:110~2,147,483,647PLS
2
1 1
Time(Sec)
Accel time Decel time
below 5000ms below 5000ms
The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM command
Footnote while PLSR command is used in program.
Explanation of the command and related devices in EH series MPU

X0
Functions of
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0
EH series MPU
The speed range for the pulse of this command is 10~200,000Hz. And if the settings
for the high speed and the accel/decel time exceed this range, use the allowable
setting within this range for operation.
Command Explanation
Operand S1 S2 S3 D
Accel/Decel
Explanation Max. frequency Total pulse quantity Output device
Time
16-bit 10~32,767Hz 110~32,767
Range 1~5000ms Y0~Y3
32-bit 10~200KHz 110~2,147,483,647
K0: Continuous pulse
K0: No output Flag: Refer to the
output
Definition Kn: Specified M1067 setting of
Kn: Specified pulse
frequency output M1068 D1220, D1221
output
Frequency F
Maximum speed: 10~200,000Hz
Total output pulses
F0
16-bit command: 110~32,767PLS
Start
frequency 16-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647PLS
Accel time Decel time
1~5000ms 1~5000ms

Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special D)

Data
Initial
Device No. forma Attribute Content
value
t
The phase setting of the first output
D1220 16-bit R/W K0
pulse group
The phase setting of the second
D1221 16-bit R/W K0
output pulse group
D1336 Low word The current value of the first pulse
32-bit R/W K0 group (The accumulated value of
D1337 High word pulse output numbers)
D1338 Low word The current value of the second
32-bit R/W K0 pulse group (The accumulated value
D1339 High word of pulse output numbers)
D1340 16-bit R/W K200 Start frequency
D1341 Low word
32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency
D1342 High word
Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special M)

Device Related
Attribute Content
No. setting device
M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously
M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group
M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group
M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group
M1067 R/W Program execution error flag
M1068 R Execution error latch D1068
In EH series models, if the acceleration/deceleration time cannot reach the maximum
acceleration frequency, the acceleration/deceleration time and maximum frequency
will be adjusted automatically. The related functions are listed as follows:
Step 1: First, use the following equations to obtain the result of (1), (2) and (3) to adjust
acceleration time.
S1
F0 = D1340 if F0 + 60 > S1 or F0 = 0 ⇒ F0 = …………..(1)
60
S3 <
(30 × S 2 ) ……………..(2)
(30 × F0 + 29 × S1 )
600000
S3 ≥ ……………………….….(3)
F0
Step 2: Calculates the interval of the acceleration of each step, FG by using the following
S1
equation. The interval of each step are the same: FG = …..(4)
59

Step 3: Calculates the max. output pulse numbers of acceleration/ deceleration

S2
time: PG = − 2 ……(5)
2
Step 4: Set the following variables.
Fi: The frequency of each acceleration/deceleration interval, i = 1~59,
F1 = F0 + FG , Fi = Fi −1 + FG ……(6)
TG: The acceleration/deceleration time of each acceleration/deceleration
S3
interval TG = ………… (7)
59
Step 5: Entering the result of (5), (6), (7) to the following equation can get the result as
59
follows: ∑ F ×T
i =0
i G ≤ PG …………….. (8)
Step 6: In the equation of (8), if the value of the calculation result has been greater than the
PG value before item 59 has been calculated.
In EH series models, the commands that are related to acceleration and deceleration
all can use the above equations.
The parameters of command PLSR must be input before the command has been
executed.
All acceleration and deceleration commands are with brake function. When the PLC
acceleration is executed but the switch contact is Off suddenly, the brake function is
activated and PLC will decelerate in the same slope of acceleration speed.
Frequency F
Origin acceleration path

Brake path
S1
F0
Time T

IST Manual/Auto Control ES EP EH
60

S Continuous
IST －－
D1 execution
D2
32-bit command
Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.
－－－－
The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and
D2＞D1. Flag: M1040~M1047.
IST command only can be used one time in program.

: The starting input number of the designated operation mode. : The

Command
smallest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode. : The
Explanation
greatest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode.
The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step
ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient
auto control command.
Program M1000
Example IST X10 S20 S60
1
X10: Individual operation (Manual operation) X14: Continuous operation
X11: Zero point return X15: Zero point return start switch
X12: Step operation X16: Start switch
X13: One cycle operation X17: Stop switch
When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited S0: Manual operation/initial state step point
M1041: Movement start S1: Zero point return/initial state step point
M1042: Status pulse S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
M1047: STL monitor enable
When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step
point of this state can’t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9
step points, S0 initiates “manual operation”, S1 initiates “zero point return operation”
and S2 initiates “auto operation”. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three
initial state step points first written in program.
When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won’t have any
actions once one of S10~S19 is On.
When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won’t have any actions
once one of between to is On or M1043=On
Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command):
Program
Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and
Example moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control.
2 Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,
lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order.
I/O Device:
Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3
Left-limit X1 (big balls) (small balls)
Y0
Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y2
Y1
Upper-limit X5
Big/small Big Small
sensor X0

Control panel
Power start Zero return X15 Auto start X16
Power stop Auto stop X17
Collect Raise Shift

balls robot arm to right Step X12
Zero return X11 One cycle

X20 X22 X24 operation X13
Release Lower Shift
balls robot arm to left Continuous
Manual
operation X10 operation X14
X21 X23 X25
Big/small sensor X0.

The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3
(small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5.
Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and
collect balls Y4.
START circuit:
X0 X1 Y4
M1044
M1000
IST X10 S20 S80
Manual operation mode:

S0 X20
X21
RST Y4 Release balls
X22 Y1
Y0 Raise robot arm
X23 Y0 Condition interlock
Y1 Lower robot arm
X24 X4 Y3
Y2 Shift to right Condition interlock
X25 X4 Y2 Raise robot arm to the
Y3 Shift to left upper-limit (X4 is ON)
Zero point return mode:

SFC figure:
S1
X15
S10 RST Y4 Release balls

X4 Y0
S11 RST Y2 Stop shifting to right
Shift to left and shift to

Y3
X1 the left-limit (X1 is On)
S12 SET M1043 Start zero return completed flag

Ladder Diagram:
S1 X15
S SET S10 Enter zero return operation mode
S10

X4
SET S11
S11
S RST Y2 Stop shifting to right
Y3
X1 Shift to left and shift to
SET S12 the left-limit (X1 is On)
S12
S SET M1043 Start zero return completed flag
Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):
SFC figure:
S2
M1041
M1044
S20 Y1
X5 X5
X0 X0
S30 SET Y4 S40 SET Y4

T0 T1
S31 Y0 S41 Y0
X4 X4
X2 X3
S32 Y2 S42 Y2
X2 X3
S50 Y1
X5
S60 RST Y4
TMR T2 K30
T2
S70 Y0
X4
X1
S80 Y3
X1
S2

Ladder Diagram:
S2 M1041 M1044
S SET S20 Enter auto operation mode
S20
X5 X0
SET S30
X5 X0
SET S40
S30
TMR T0 K30
T0
SET S31
S31
X4
SET S32
S32 X2
S Y2 Shift to right
X2
SET S50
S40
TMR T1 K30
T1
SET S41
S41
S Raise robot arm to the
X4
SET S42
S42 X3
S Y2 Shift to right
X3
SET S50
S50
X5
SET S60
S60
TMR T2 K30
T2
SET S70
S70
X4
SET S80
S80 X1
S Y3 Shift to left and shift to
the left-limit (X1 is On)
X1
S2
RET
END

Flag explanation:
Footnote M1040: step point movement inhibited. When M1040=ON, all movements of the step point
are inhibited.
1. Manual operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON.
2. Zero point return mode/one cycle operation mode: During the time of pressing
STOP button and pressing START button again, M1040 will keep being ON.
3. Step operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON, and will only be OFF when the
START button is pressed.
4. Continuous operation mode: When PLC goes from STOP→RUN, M1040 keeps
being ON, and will be OFF when the START button is pressed.
M1041: Step point movement start: the special auxiliary relay that reflects the movement of
the primary step point (S2) to the next step point.
1. Manual operation mode/Zero point return mode: M1041 keeps being OFF.
2. Step operation mode/One cycle operation mode: M1041 will only be OFF when
the START button is pressed.
3. Continuous operation mode: Keeps being ON when the START button is pressed,
and keeps being OFF when the STOP button is pressed.
M1042: START pulse: Only one pulse will be sent out when the button is pressed.
M1043: Zero point return complete: Once M1043 =ON is driven, it means that the RESET
motion has been executed.
M1044: Conditions of the origin: Under the continuous operation mode, conditions of the
origin, M1044, have to be driven to ON to execute the motion of initial step point (S2)
moving to the next step point.
M1045: All output reset inhibit.
If executing conditions: A. from manual control S0 to zero point return S1
B. from auto operation S2 to manual operation S0
C. from auto operation S2 to zero point return S1
1. When M1045=Off and one of S of D1~D2 is ON, step point of SET Y output and
actions will be cleared to Off.
2. When M1045 =On, SET Y output will be reserved and step point during action will
be cleared to Off.
3. If executing from zero point return S1 to manual operation S0, no matter
M1045=On or M1045=Off, SET Y output will be reserved and step point action will
be cleared to Off.
M1046: Setting STL state to On: If one of step point S is On, M1046=On. After M1047 forces
to be On, M1046 will be On once one of S is On. Besides, 8 points numbers before S
is on will be recorded in D1040~D1047.
M1047: STL monitor enabled. When IST command starts executing, M1047 will be forced to
be On and it will be forced to On for each scan time once IST command is still On.
This flag is used to monitor all S.
D1040~D1047: ON state number 1-8 of step point S.


SER Multiple Devices Comparison ES EP EH
61 D P －

S1 Continuous
SER －－
S2 execution
D
N 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
Continuous
Note: If operand S2 uses with device F, it is only available in DSER －－
execution
16-bit command.
Flag: None
The usage of operand n: n=1~256 (16-bit command),
n=1~128 (32-bit command)
Command : Starting device of data stack for multiple devices comparison : Value
Explanation data for comparison : Starting device for storing compared result : Data
stack length for comparison
specify the numbers of compared registers and specify the compared
numbers. The specified data is compared against the data specified by and the
compared result is stored in several registers specified by .
When using 32-bit command to designate registers, , , and
specify 32-bit register.
When X0=On, the data stack consist of D10~D19 are compared against D0 and the
Program
Example result is stored in D50~D54. If the equal value does not exist, the content of D50~D52
will all be 0.
The data is compared in algebra formate. (-10＜2)
The largest value of all compared data will be record in D53 and the samllest value of
all compared data will be record in D54. When the numbers of largest value and
smallest are more than one, only the numbers of largest value will be recorded.
X0
SER D10 D0 D50 K10
Content value Compared data Data number Result

D10 88 0
D11 100 1 Equal
D12 110 2
D13 150 3
n D14 100 D0=K100 4 Equal
D15 300 5
D16 100 6 Equal
D17 5 7 Smallest
D18 100 8 Equal
D19 500 9 Largest

Content value Explanation

D50 4 The total data numbers of equal value
D51 1 The number of the first equal value
D52 8 The number of the last equal value
D53 7 The number of the smallest value
D54 9 The number of the largest value

ABSD Absolute Cam Control ES EP EH
62 D －

S1 Continuous
ABSD －－
S2 execution
D
n 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
Continuous
Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4 DABSD －－
execution
should be specified in 16-bit command and K8 should be
specified in 32-bit command. Flag: None
The usage range of n: n=1~64
Command : Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter :

Explanation Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison
The ABSD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in
absolute cam control.
of DABSD command can specify high-speed counter. However, when the
current value of high-speed counter is compared against the setting value, the result
can not output immediately because it is influenced by the scan time. If immediate
output is desired, please use the DHSZ command, the specific comparison command
for high-speed counter.
Before executing the ABSD command, use MOV command to write each setting value
Program
Example into D100~D107 in advance. The content of the even number D is the lower-limit value
and the content of the odd number D is the upper-limt value.
When X0=On, the current value of counter C10 is compared against the upper- and
lower-limit value of D100~D107 four groups. The compared result is showed in
M10~M13.
When X10=Off, the origin On/Off state of M10~M13 will not be changed.
X10
ABSD D100 C10 M10 K4
C10 X11
RST C10
X11
CNT C10 K400

M10~ M13 will be On when the current value of C10 is equal to or higher than the
lower-limit value and equal to or lower than the upper-limit value.
Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output
D100= 40 D101=100 50≦C10≦100 M10=On
D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=On
D104=140 D105= 170 140≦C10≦170 M12=On
D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=On
When the lower-limit value is higher than the upper-limit value, if the current value of
C10 is higher than the lower-limit value and lower than the upper-limit value
(C10>140), M12=On.
Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output
D100= 40 D101=100 50≦C10≦100 M10=On
D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=On
D104=140 D105= 60 60≦C10≦140 M12=Off
D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=On

40 100
M0
120 210
M1
60 140
M2
150 390
M3
0 200 400

INCD Relative Cam Control ES EP EH
63 －

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command ( 9 STEPS)
S1 Continuous
INCD －－
S2 execution
D
N 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4
should be specified. Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
In 16-bit command, operand S2 should be C0~C198 and will
occupy 2 continuous counters.
The usage range of operand n: n=1~64

Command : Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter :

Explanation Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison
The INCD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in relative
cam control.
The current value of is compared against the setting value of . Once the
current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of will be reset to 0
and be compared again. The return times will be stored in +1.
When the comparison of groups data has been completed, the execution
completed falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.
Before executing the INCD command, use MOV command to write each setting value
Program
Example into D100~D104 in advance. D100=15, ,D101=30, D102=10, D103=40, D104=25.
The current value of counter C10 is compared against the setting value of
D100~D104. Once the current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of
C10 will be reset to 0 and be compared again.
The return times will be stored in C11.
When the content of C11 increase 1, M10~M14 will also change in response. Please
refer to the following timing diagram.
When the comparison of 5 groups data has been completed, the execution completed
falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.
When X0 turns from On to Off, C10 and C11 will all bereset to 0 and M10~M14 all turn
Off. When X0 turns On again, this command will be executed again from the
beginning.
X0 M1013
CNT C10 K100
INCD D100 C10 M10 K5

X0
40
30 30
25
C10 15 10 15 15
Current value
4
C11 3
2
Current value 0 1 0 1 0 1
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M1029


TTMR Alternate Timer ES EP EH
64 －

D Continuous
TTMR －－
n execution
Note: Operand D will occupy 2 continuous devices.
32-bit command
The usage range of operand n: n=0~2 －－－－
Flag: None
It only can use TTMR command eight times in program.
: Device number for storing the On duration of the button switch : Multiple
Command
setting
Explanation
The On duration of external button switch is measured and stored in the number of
+1, the measured unit is 100ms periods. The content of +1 in seconds is
multiplied by and stored in .
When multiple setting n=0, the measured unit of is in seconds. When n=1, the
measured unit of is 100ms periods (is multiplied by 10). When n=2, the
measured unit of is 10ms periods (is multiplied by 100).
The time that the button switch X0 is pushed (On duration of X0) will be stored in D1, n
Program
Example is used to specify the multiple of the time and the total bit time is stored in D0. Then the
1 button switch can be used to adjust the setting value of timer.
When X0 turns Off, the content of D1 will be reset to 0 but the content of D0 is
unchanged.
X0
TTMR D0 K0
X0
D1
D0
D1
D0
T T
pushed time (sec) pushed time (sec)
If On duration of X0 is T seconds, the relation between D0, D1 and n are shown as the
table below.
n D0 D1(unit: 100 ms)
K0 (unit: s) 1×T D1=D0×10
K1 (unit: 100 ms) 10×T D1=D0
K2 (unit: 10 ms) 100×T D1=D0/10

Using TTMR command to write 10 groups setting time.

Program
Example Write the setting value into D100~D109 in advance.
2 The measured unit of the following timers T0~T9 is 0.1 second and the measured unit
of the alternate is 1 second.
Connect one bit digital switch to X0~X3 and use BIN command to convert the setting
value of digital switch to BIN value and store in E.
The On duration (in sec) of X10 is stored in D100.
M0 is the pulse of one time scan cycle generated when the alternate timer button is
released.
Use the setting number of digital switch as the pointers of index register, and then
transmit the content of D100 to D200E (D200~D209).
M10
TMR T0 D100
M11
TMR T1 D101
M19
TMR T9 D109
M1000
BIN K1X0 E
X10
TTMR D200 K0
X10
PLF M0
M0
MOV D100 D200E
For EP series models, it can only use TTMR command eight times in program. If used
Footnote in subroutine or interrupt subroutine, it only can use ONCE.
For EH series models, the maximum TTMR command groups it can only use at the
same time is eight groups.


STMR Special Timer ES EP EH
65 －

S Continuous
STMR －－
M execution
D
32-bit command
Note: The operand S: EP series models can use T0~T191, EH
－－－－
series models can use T0~T199
The usage range of operand m: m=1~32767 Flag: None
: Number of timer : Setting value of timer, unit is 100ms : Starting

Command
device of output device
Explanation
STMR command is a command which provides Off-delay, one shot and flash loop.
The number of timer specified by STMR command can not be reapeat.
When X10=On, the settting value of the timer T0 specified by STMR command is 5
Program
seconds.
Example
Y0 is the contact of Off-delay: When X10 turns from Off to On, Y0= On. When X10
turns On to Off and delay 5 seconds, Y0=Off.
When X10 turns from On to Off, Y1= On output one time for 5 seconds.
When X10 turns from Off to On, Y2=On output one time for 5 seconds.
When X10 turns from Off to On, Y3= On after delay 5 seconds. When X10 turns from
On to Off, Y3=Off after delay 5 seconds.
X10
STMR T0 K50 Y0
X10
Y0 5 sec 5 sec
Y1 5 sec 5 sec
Y2 5 sec
Y3 5 sec

Add a b contact of Y3 after the drive contact X10, ans then Y1, Y2 can be used as the
output of flash loop. When X10 turns Off, Y0, Y1 and Y3 will be Off and the content of
T10 will be reset to 0.
X10 Y3
STMR T10 K50 Y0
X10
Y1
Y2 5 sec 5 sec

ALT ON/OFF Alternate ES EP EH
66 P

D Continuous Pulse
ALT ALTP
execution execution
ES series models do not support pulse execution command 32-bit command
(ALTP).
－－－－
Flag: None
: Dentisation device
Command
This command is usually pulse execution command (ALTP).
Explanation
When X0 turns from Off to On for the first time, Y0=ON. When X0 turns from Off to On
Program
Example for the second time, Y0=OFF.
1 X0
ALTP Y0
X0
Y0

The ALT command is a command, which use one switch to control start and stop mode.
Program
Example In the beginning, M0=Off, so Y0=On, Y1=Off. When X10 is activated for the first time,
2 M0=ON, Y1=ON and Y0=OFF. When X10 is activated for the second time, M0=OFF,
Y0=ON, Y1=OFF.
X10
ALT M0
M0
Y0
M0
Y1
Output Y will flash. When X10= On, T0 will generate a pulse every two seconds and
Program
Example output Y0 will be switching between On and Off mode depending on the pulse of T0.
3 X10 T0
TMR T0 K20
T0
ALTP Y0

RAMP Ramp Signal ES EP EH
67 －

S1 Continuous
RAMP －－
S2 execution
D
N 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~32767
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Flag: M1026 Starting mode (Please
refer to the footnote)
M1029 Execution completed flag
: Start setting of ramp signal : End setting of ramp signal : Current

Command
value of ramp signal : Scan times
Explanation
This command is used to get a ramp signal. A ramp signal has a strong connection
with linear and scan time. Therefore, must fix the scan time before using this RAMP
command.
Write the start setting value of ramp signal to D10 and end setting value of ramp signal
to D11 in advance. When X0 is On, the setting value is forwarding from D10 to D11
(setting value in D10 will be increased) and the proceeding time (n= 100 times scans)
is stored in D12.

The scan time can be fixed if set M1039=On in the program previously. Then, using
MOV command to write the setting value of the fixed scan time into special register
D1039. Take the above program as an example, if the setting value is 30ms and
n=K100, the time between D10 and D11 is 3 second (D3: 30ms×100).
During the execution of this command, when starting signal X10 turns Off, this
command will stop the operation. When X10 turns On again, the content value of D12
will be reset to 0(zero) and calculated again.
After the execution of this command has been completed, M1029= On and the
content value of D12 will be reset to the setting value of D10.
Using this command with analog signal output can execute the operation of Sort
Start/Stop.
If start PLC from STOP to RUN when X10= On, please reset the content value of D12
to 0(zero) in the beginning of the program. (If D12 is a latched area.)
X10
RAMP D10 D11 D12 K100
D11
D10
D12
D12
D11
D10
“n” times scans “n” times scans

D10<D11 D10> D11
The scan times is stored in D13
On/Off condition of starting mode flag M1026 and the change of the content value in
Footnote D12 are shown below:
M1026=ON M1026=OFF
X10 Starting signal X10 Starting signal
D11
D11
D12 D12
D10 D10
M1029 M1029


SORT Data Sort ES EP EH
69 －

S Continuous
SORT －－
m1 execution
m2
D 32-bit command
n －－－－
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1 =1~32 Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
The usage range of operand m2: m2 =1~6
The usage range of operand n: n=1~ m2
: Starting device of source data table : Sort data grops : Column

Command
numbers of each data : Starting device for storing sort data : Reference
Explanation
value of sort data
The resulting sorted data is stored in the m1 × m2 registers counted from the starting
device specified by . Therefore, if the device and specify the same
register, the resulting sorted data will be the same as the content of source device
.
An ideal most right number of the head number specified by is 0.
The data sort will be completed after the SORT command being processed m1 times.
Once the SORT command has been completed, the Flag M1029= On.
When X0 is On, it starts to sort specified data. After the data sort is completed,
Program
M1029= On. During the execution of the SORT command, do not change the sort
Example
data. If user want to re-sort the data, be sure to turn X0 from Off to On again.
X0
SORT D0 K5 K5 D50 D100

Example table of data sort

Data numbers: m2
Data Column
Column 1 2 3 4 5
Row Students Physis and
Chinese English Mathematics
No. Chemistry
1 （D0）1 （D5）90 （D10）75 （D15）66 （D20）79
Data numbers: m1
2 （D1）2 （D6）55 （D11）65 （D16）54 （D21）63
3 （D2）3 （D7）80 （D12）98 （D17）89 （D22）90
4 （D3）4 （D8）70 （D13）60 （D18）99 （D23）50
5 （D4）5 （D9）95 （D14）79 （D19）75 （D24）69
Sort data table when D100=K3.

Data numbers: m2
Data Column
Column 1 2 3 4 5
Students Physis and
Row Chinese English Mathematics
No. Chemistry
1 （D50）4 （D55）70 （D60）60 （D65）99 （D70）50
Data numbers: m1
2 （D51）2 （D56）55 （D61）65 （D66）54 （D71）63
3 （D52）1 （D57）90 （D62）75 （D67）66 （D72）79
4 （D53）5 （D58）95 （D63）79 （D68）75 （D73）69
5 （D54）3 （D59）80 （D64）98 （D69）89 （D74）90
Sort data table when D100=K5.

Data numbers: m2
Data Column
Column 1 2 3 4 5
Students Physis and
Row Chinese English Mathematics
No. Chemistry
1 （D50）4 （D55）70 （D60）60 （D65）99 （D70）50
Data numbers: m1
2 （D51）2 （D56）55 （D61）65 （D66）54 （D71）63
3 （D52）5 （D57）95 （D62）79 （D67）75 （D72）69
4 （D53）1 （D58）90 （D63）75 （D68）66 （D73）79
5 （D54）3 （D59）80 （D64）98 （D69）89 （D74）90


TKY 10-Key Keyboard Input ES EP EH
70 D －

S Continuous
TKY －－
D1 execution
D2
Note: Operand S occupies 10 continuous devices Continuous
Operand D2 occupies 10 continuous devices DTKY －－
execution
Refer to following for detail. Flag: None
: Head input device : Destination device for storing key input value
Command
: Key input signal
Explanation
This command can specify ten external input devices from and these ten
external input devices is identified as decimal value of 0 to 9. These ten external input
devices are connected to ten keys respectively. When one of the ten keys is pressed,
the value of decimal numbers from 0 to 9,999 (max. 4 digits in 16-bit command) or from
0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits in 32-bit command) can be inputted and stored in
destination device . The device is used to store the condition of that key
has been pressed.
Using this command can specify ten input terminals from X0 to connect to ten keys
Program
which number is from 0 to 9. When X20=On, the command is executed and it will store
Example
the BIN value which is inputted by keys into D0 and M10~M19 is used to store the
condition of that key has been pressed.
X20
TKY X0 D0 M10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0V +24V S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11
PLC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 number key
BCD value one digit number BCD code
3 2 1 0
overflow 10 10 10 10
BCD value
BIN value D0

As the time chart shown below, the four keys are connected to X5, X3, X0, X1 of
number keyboard. After pressing the four keys in that order of 1234 and the number
5,301 will be entered into D0. The max. number which can be entered in D0 is 9,999 i.e.
4 digits. If the entered number exceeds the above allowable range, the highest digits will
overflow.
After X2 is pressed, M12=On untill other keys are pressed. The situation of other press
keys are the same.
When any key of X0~X11 is pressed, one device of M10~M19 will be On.
If any key is pressed, M20=On.
When the drive contact X20 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M10~M20
all turns Off.
X0 l
X1 m
X3 k
X5 j
M10
M11
M13
M15
Key output
signal
M20 j k l m


HKY 16-Key Keyboard Input ES EP EH
71 D －

S Continuous
HKY －－
D1 execution
D2
D3 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
Continuous
Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices DHKY －－
execution
Operand D1 occupies 4 continuous devices Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
Operand D3 occupies 8 continuous devices M1167 HKY input mode switch
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Please refer to the footnote
Command : Head scan input device : Head scan output device : Destination
Explanation device for storing key input value : Key input signal
This command can create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous
external input devices from and 4 continuous external output devices from
by matrix scan. The key input value will be stored in and is used to
store the condition of that key has been pressed.
When this command is executed every time, the execution completed flag M1029 will
be On for the duration of that key pressed (one scan cycle).
If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is
effective.
When HKY command is used in 16-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to
9,999 (max. 4 digits). When DHKY command is used in 32-bit command, can
store numbers from 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits). If the entered number exceeds the
above allowable range, the highest digits will overflow.
Using this command to create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous
Program
Example external input devices X10~X13 and 4 continuous external output devices Y10~Y13.
When X4=On, the command is executed and it will store the BIN value which is
inputted by keys into D0 and M0~M7 is used to store the condition of that key has been
pressed.
X4
HKY X10 Y10 D0 M0

Number input:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 number key
BCD value one digit number BCD code
3 2 1 0
overflow 10 10 10 10
BCD value
BIN value D0
Function key input:

When press A key, M0=On and latch. Next, press D key and then M0=Off, M3=On
and latch.
If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is
effective.
F E D C B A
M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Key output signal:

When any key of A to Fis pressed, M6=On one time.
When any key of 0 to 9 is pressed, M7=Onone time.
When the drive contact X4 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M0~M7 all
turns Off.
External wiring:
C D E F
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
COM X10 X11 X12 X13
COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13
PLC( Transistor output )

When this command is executed, 8 times scan cycles is required to read the input
Footnote value of keys sucessfully. If the scan cycle is too long or too short, it may cause the key
to input incorrectly. Therefore, user can use the following command to avoid it.
When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not response in time and can not
read the key input correctly. At this time, user can fix the scan time to avoid it.
When the cycle is too long, the response of key may become slow. User can avoid
this by writing this command in a time interrupt subroutine and executing this
command in the fix time.
The function of flag M1167:
When M1167=On, HKY command can input hexadecimal value of 0~F.
When M1167=Off, A~F of HKY command are used as function keys.

DSW Digital Switch Input ES EP EH
72 －

S Continuous
DSW －－
D1 execution
D2
n 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~2
Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
Command : Head input device : Head output device : Destination device for
Explanation storing the setting value : Number of digits
This command is used to read one or two groups of 4 digits switch through 4 or 8
continuous external input devices from and 4 continuous external devices from
and store the setting value in destination device . When is 1, only
one group of digital switches is read. When is 2, two groups of digital switches
are read.
The first group of switches consists of X20~X23 and Y20~Y23. The second group of
Program
Example switches consists of X24~X27 and Y20~Y23. When X10=On, the command starts to
execute. The setting value of the first group of switches are read and converted to BIN
value and stored in D20. The setting value of the second group of switches are read
and converted to BIN value and stored in D21.
X10
DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2

When X10=On, Y20~Y23 will be On and scan in circles automatically. After the
completion of each circle scan, execution completed falg M1029=ON is a scan period
after a circle scan.
Outputs Y20~Y23 please use transistor output. Besides, please make sure that every
1, 2, 4, 8 terminal should connect a diode (0.1A/50V) to the inputs of PLC in serial as
shown in the example below.
X10
operation start
Y20 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Y21 0.1s
interrupt
Y22 0.1s
Y23 0.1s
M1029 execution com pleted
Wiring diagram of digital switch
0 1 2 3
BCD digital 10 10 10 10
switches
should connect
a diode (1N4148)
in serial
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
0V +24V S/S X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27
The first group The second group
PLC
C Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23
0 1 2 3
10 10 10 10

When the scan terminals are relay outputs, the following program technique is used
Footnote with this command to operate successfully:
When X10=On, DSW command is executed. When X10 turns Off, M10 will be On
until the scan terminals of DSW command complete one output scan cycle. Then,
M10 will turn Off.
If the drive contact X10 use button switch, every time when X10 is pushed, M10,
the scan terminals specified by DSW command, will be reset to Off after the
completion of one output scan cycle. Then, the command will stop executing, the
data of digital switch will be read completely and the scan terminals will be activated
while the button switch is pushed. Therefore, even relay output is used in this
situation, the relay can be used for long because the operation of relay is not
frequent.
X10
SET M10
M10
DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2
M1029
RST M10
API Decode the 7-segment Display

Applicable models
SEGD ES EP EH
73 P Panel

S Continuous Pulse
SEGD SEGDP
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. 32-bit command
ES series models do not support pulse execution command －－－－
(SEGDP) Flag: None
Command : Source device for decoding : Output device after decoding

Explanation
When X10=On, contents (0~F: 16 bits) of the lower 4 bits (b0~b3) of D10 will be
Program
Example decoded as readable in the 7-segment display panel for output. The decoding results
will be stored in Y10~Y17.
X10
SEGD D10 K2Y10

Decoding Chart of the 7-segment Display Panel:

Bit Composition Status of Every Step
16 Data
Combi- of the 7-Step
bits Displayed
nation Display Panel
0 0000 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
1 0001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 0010 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
3 0011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
4 0100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
5 0101 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
6 0110 a ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON
7 0111 g b ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
8 1000 c ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
d
9 1001 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
A 1010 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
B 1011 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
C 1100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
D 1101 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
E 1110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
F 1111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

SEGL 7-segment Display Scan Output ES EP EH
74

S Continuous
SEGL －－
D execution
n
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=0~7. Please refer to 32-bit command
the footnote. －－－－
In EH series models, SEGL command can only be used Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
twice.
Command : Display source device of 7-segment display : Start device of

Explanation 7-segment display scan output : Polarity setting of output signal and scan
signal
8 or 12 continuous external output points that start from this command can be
regarded as display and scan signal output of 1 or 2 groups of 4 digits of 7-segment
display. 7-segment display module has function to convert input BCD code to
7-segment display and has control signal to latch or not.

will decide the numbers of groups of 4 digits of 7-segment display and also
indicate the polaritys of PLC output terminal and 7-segment display input terminal.
The points number of 7-segment display output command that a group of 4 digits use
is 8 points and 2 groups of 4 digits use are 12 points.
Scan output terminal will circulate in sequence when this command executes. The
drive contact will be changed from Off to On and scan output execute again.
When X10=ON, command will start to execute. 7-segment display scan loop is
Program
Example composed of Y10~Y17. The value of D10 will be converted to BCD code and send to
the first group of 7-segment display to display. The value of D11 will be converted to
BCD code and send to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If any value
of D10 or D11 is greater than 9999, operation error will occur.
X10
SEGL D10 Y10 K4
When X10=ON, Y14~Y17 will scan in circles automatically. Each circle scan needs 12
scan time. M1029=ON is a scan period after a circle scan.
4 digits of a group, n=0~3.
After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in
parallet, they should connect to Y10~Y13 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number
connects to Y14~Y17 of PLC individually.
When X10=ON, the content of D10 will be transmitted to 7-segment display to
display in sequently according to Y14~Y17 circulates in sequence
4 digits of 2 groups, n=4~7.
After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in
parallet, they should connect to Y20~Y23 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number
and the first group share Y14~Y17 of PLC.
The content of D10 will be transmitted to the first group of 7-segment display and
the content of D11 will be transmitted to the second group of 7-segment display to
display. If D10=K1234 and D11=K4321, the first group will display １２３４ and
the second group will display will display ４３２1.
7-segment display scan output wiring
COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 COM Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 COM Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23
0 1 2 3
1 2 4 8
10 10 10 10
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1 1
2 V+ 2
V+
4 4
8 8
The first group The second group

The V4.9 and above of ES series provide this command (SEGL).

Footnote Version 4.9 of ES series only provide a group of 4 digits of 7-segment display and use
8 points to output. SEGL command only can be used once in the program and the
usage range of operand n is 0 to 3.
Scan time must be longer than 10ms while this command is executed. If scan time is
shorter than 10ms, please use fixed scan time function to fix scan time on 10ms.
Please use suitable 7-segment display for the transistor that PLC uses to output.
Settings of n: it is used to set the polarity of transistor output loop. It can be set to
positive polarity or negative polarity. What 7-segment display it connects is a group of
4 digits or two groups of 4 digits.
PLC transistor output is NPN type and it is open collect output. When wiring,
output should connect a step up resistor to VCC (less than 30VDC). Therefore,
when output point Y is On, output will be low potential.
VCC
step up resistor
Y drive
Y
signal output
On
PLC
Output loop of PNP transistor: when inner signal is “1”, it will output high potential.
This logic is called positive polarity.
+24V
positive On
HIGH
Logic 1
Step down
resistor
PLC

Positive logic (Negative polarity) output of BCD code
BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output

b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Negative logic (Positive polarity) output of BCD code
BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output

b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Display scan (latch) signal
Positive logic (Negative polarity) Negative logic (Positive polarity)

output output
Output control Output control
Y output (Latch) Y output (Latch)
signal signal
1 0 0 1
Parameter n settings:
groups number of
A group Two groups
7-segment display
Y of BCD code outputs ＋－＋－
Display scan latch signal ＋－＋－＋－＋－
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
’＋’: Positive logic (Negative polarity) output
‘－’: Negative logic (Positive polarity) output
The combination of output polarity of PLC transistor and input polaity of 7-segment
display can be set by settings of n.


ARWS Arrow Keyboard Input ES EP EH
75 －

S Continuous
ARWS －－
D1 execution
D2
n 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for
The usage range of operand n: n=0~3 (Refer to API 74 SEGL usage range.
footnote). ARWS command only can be used once in the Output point that designated by this
program. command should use transistor to
In EP series models, operand D2 do not provide index output.
register E, F to modify and it only can be specified as a When using this command, please fix
multiple of 10, e.g. Y0, Y10…etc. scan time or put this command into time
interrupt subroutine (I6□□~I8□□) to
execute.
: Start device of key input : Display device on 7-segment display

Command
: Scan output start device of 7-segment display : Polarity setting of output
Explanation
signal and scan signal
When the command is executed, X20 is defined as the down key, X21 is defined as
Program
Example the up key, X22 is defined as the right key and X23 is defined as the left key. These
keys are used to edit and display the external setting value. The setting value is stored
in D20 and its setting range is from 0 to 9,999.
When X10=On, 103 is a effective setting digit number. If pressing left key, the effective
setting digit number will be displayed and jump by the direction from 103→100→101
→102→103→100.
If pressing the right key, the effective setting digit number will be displayed and jump
by the direction from 103→102→101→100→103→102. Meanwhile, the digit position
LED connected from Y24 to Y27 will also be Onto indicate the effective setting digit
number.
If pressing the up key to increase , the effective number will change from 0→1→2→…
8→9→0→1. If pressing the down key, the effective number will change from 0→9→8
→…1→0→9, meanwhile, the changed value will be displayed on the 7-segment
display.
X10
ARWS X20 D20 Y20 K0

Y24 Increase digit value
Y25 Digit
Y26 position
LED X21
Y27
move move
10
3 2
10
1
10 10
0 to X23 X22 to
the left the right
1
Y20 X20
2
Y21
4
Y22
8
Y23
decrease digit value
7-step display which displays The 4 switches is used to move
setting value (4 digits data) digit position to the left or to the
right and increase or decrease
the setting value of the digits

ASC ASCII Code Conversion ES EP EH
76 －

S Continuous
ASC －－
D execution
Note: Operand S is 8 alphanumeric character string inputted by
32-bit command
WPLSoft software from PC, or ASC II code inputted by
－－－－
HPP02.
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Flag: M1161 8/16 mode exchange
: The alphanumeric character which can be converted to its ASC II code :

Command
The destination device for storing ASC II code.
Explanation
The alphanumeric character can be used to display error message directly if connect
7-segment display when using this command.
When X0=On, A~H is converted to ASCII code and stored in D0~D3.
Program X0
Example ASC ABC D EFGH D0
b15 b0
D0 42H (B) 41H (A)
D1 44H (D) 43H (C)
D2 46H (F) 45H (E)
D3 48H (H) 47H (G)
high byte low byte

When M1161=On, the ASCII code converted from every character will occupy lower
8-bit (b7~b0) of one register. The high byte will be invalid and its content is filled as 0.
This also means that one register only can be used to store one character.

b15 b0
D0 00 H 41H (A)
D1 00 H 42H (B)
D2 00 H 43H (C)
D3 00 H 44H (D)
D4 00 H 45H (E)
D5 00 H 46H (F)
D6 00 H 47H (G)
D7 00 H 48H (H)
high byte low byte

PR ASCII Code Output ES EP EH
77 －

S Continuous
PR －－
D execution
Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices.
32-bit command
Operand D occupies 10 continuous devices. －－－－
PR command only can be used twice in the program.
Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
M1027
In EP series models, operand D does not provide index
register E, F to modify.
: The device for storing ASCII code : The external output device which
Command
outputs ASC II code.
Explanation
This command will output ASCII codes stored in 4 registers from device in
order of the output devices specified by .
First, using API 76 ASC command convert A~H to ASCII code and store them in
Program
Example D0~D3. Then, using this command output them in the order of A~H.
1 When M1027=Off, X10 turns from Off to On, the command is executed, Y10(low byte)
to Y17(high byte) is specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan
signal and Y21 is specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed.
This mode can execute 8 character string output operation.
If X10 turns from Off to On while the command being executed, the data output will be
interrupt. When X10 is On once more, the data will be sent again.
X10
PR D0 Y10

X10 start signal
Y10~Y17 data A B C D H
T : scan time (ms)
T T T
Y20 scan singal
Y21 being executed
PR command provide 8 serial string output operation. When M1027=Off, maximum 8

Program character string can be outputted in serial. When M1027=On, 1 to 16 character string
Example output operation can be executed.
2
When M1027=On, X10 turns from Off to On, Y10(low byte) to Y17(high byte) is
specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan signal and Y21 is
specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed. This mode can
execute 16 character string output operation.
If the character string 00H (NUL) has been sent, it means the end of the character
string and the operation of PR command won’t be continous.
The drive contact X10 is always On but it will automatically stop after one time
operation of data output. However, if X0 is always On, M1029 won’t be activated.
M1002
SET M1027
X10
PR D0 Y10
X10 start signal
Y10~Y17 data first character last character
T T T T : scan time or
interrupt time
Y20 scan singal
Y21 being executed
M1029 execution
is completed
This command should only use transistor output.
Footnote When using this command, please fix the scan time or execute this command in a time
interrupt subroutine.


FROM Read Special Module CR Data ES EP EH
78 D P

m1 Continuous Pulse
FROM FROMP
D
Continuous Pulse
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7 DFROM DFROMP
execution execution
The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48 Flag: When M1083=On, it allows to
The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) insert interrupt during command
Refer to each model specification for usage range. FROM/TO. Refer to following
For ES series, it doesn’t support pulse execution explanation for detail.
command (FROMP, DFROMP).
: Number for special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of

Command
special module that will be read : Location to save reading data : Data
Explanation
number of reading one time
DVP PLC uses this command to read CR data of special module.
When indicates bit operand, you can use K1~K4 for 16-bit command and
K5~K8 for 32-bit command.
Please refer to the following footnote to see the detail of the numbering rule of special
module.
To read the content of CR#29 of special module#0 to D0 of PLC and to read the
Program
content of CR#30 of special module#0 to D1 of PLC. It can read 2 data at one time
Example
(n=2).
The command will be executed when X0=ON. The command won’t be executed when
X0=OFF and the content of previous reading data won’t change.
X0
FROM K0 K29 D0 K2

TO Special Module CR Data Write in ES EP EH
79 D P

m1 Continuous Pulse
TO TOP
S
Continuous Pulse
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7 DTO DTOP
execution execution
The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48
Flag: M1083 FROM/TO mode
The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) exchange
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Refer to following for detail.
For ES series, it doesn’t support pulse execution command
(TOP, DTOP)

: Number of special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of special

Command
module that will be wrote in : Data to write in CR : data number to write in
Explanation
one time.
When assigns bit operand, K1~K4 can be used for 16-bit command and K1~K8
can be used for 32-bit command.
DVP-series PLC uses this command to write data into CR of special module.
Using 32-bit command DTO, program will write D11 and D10 into CR#13 and CR#12 of
Program
special module#0. It only writes a group of data at one time (n=1)
Example
The command will be executed when X0=ON and it won’t be executed when X0=OFF.
The data that wrote in previous won’t have any change.
X0
DTO K0 K12 D10 K1
The rule of command operand:

m1: arrangement number of special module. The number of special module that
connects to PLC MPU. The numbering rule of special module from the near to the
distant of MPU is from 0 to 7. The maximum is 8 special modules and won’t occupy
I/O point.
m2: the number of CR. Built-in 16-bit of 36 groups memory of special module is
called CR (Control Register). The number of CR uses decimal digits (#0~#35). All
running status and setting values of special module have included.
If using FROM/TO command, the unit of read/write of CR is one number for one time.
If using DFROM/DTO command, the unit of read/write of CR is two numbers in one
Footnote time.
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit
CR #10 CR #9 Specified CR number
The number of transmission groups n. The meaning of n=2 of 16-bit command and
n=1 of 32-bit are the same.
Specified device Specified CR Specified device Specified CR
D0 CR #5 D0 CR #5
D1 CR #6 D1 CR #6
D2 CR #7 D2 CR #7
D3 CR #8 D3 CR #8
D4 CR #9 D4 CR #9
D5 CR #10 D5 CR #10
16-bit command when n=6 32-bit command when n=3

In ES series models, flag M1083 is not provided. When FROM/TO command is executed,
all interrupts (including external or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All
interrupts will be executed after FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO
command also can be executed in the interrupt subroutine.

The function of the flag M1083 (FROM/TO mode exchange) provided in EP/EH series
models:
1. When M1083=Off, FROM/TO command is executed, all interrupts (including external
or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All interrupts will be executed after
FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO command also can be
executed in the interrupt subroutine.
2. When M1083=On, if a interrupt occurs while FROM/TO command has been

programmed, FROM/TO command will be interruptted to execute the interrupt.
However, FROM/TO command cannot be executed in the interrupt subroutine
Application program example of FROM/TO command:

Example 1: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting
OFFSET value of CH1 to 0V(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH1 to 2.5V(=K2000LSB).
M1002
TO K0 K1 H0 K1
TO K0 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K0 K18 K0 K1
TO K0 K24 K2000 K1
1. Write H0 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH1 to mode 0 (voltage
input : -10V to +10V).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K0LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#18
and K2000LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#24.
Example 2: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting

OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400 LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to 18
mA(=K3600LSB).
M1002
TO K0 K1 H18 K1
TO K0 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K0 K19 K400 K1
TO K0 K25 K3600 K1

1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH2 to mode 3 (current
input : -20mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K400LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in
CR#19 and K3600LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#25.
Example 3: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting

OFFSET value of CH2 to 0mA(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to
10mA(=K1000LSB).
M1002
TO K1 K1 H18 K1
TO K1 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K1 K22 K0 K1
TO K1 K28 K1000 K1
1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 3
(current input : 0mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.
Example 4: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to
18mA(=K3600LSB).
M1002
TO K1 K1 H10 K1
TO K1 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K1 K23 K400 K1
TO K1 K29 K3600 K1
1. Write H10 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 2
(current input : +4mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.

Example 5: Program example when DVP-04AD and DVP-02DA module are used
together
M1000
FROM K0 K0 D0 K1
LD= H88 D0 TO K0 K1 H3030 K1
TO K0 K2 K32 K2
FROM K0 K6 D20 K4
M1000
FROM K1 K0 D0 K1
CMP H49 D0 M0
M1013
INC D100
ADD D101 K5 D101
LD= K4000 D100 RST D100
LD= K4000 D101 RST D101

M1
TO K1 K1 H10 K1
M1
TO K1 K10 D100 K2
END
1. Read the data of model type from extension module K0 and distinguish if the data is
H88 (DVP-04AD model type).
2. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:
(CH1, CH3)= mode 0, (CH2, CH4)= mode 3.
3. Set the mode of CR#2 and CR#3. The average times of CH1 and CH2 is K32.
4. Read the input signal average value of CH1~CH4 (4 data) from CR#6~CR#9 and
store them in D20 to D23.
5. Read the data of model type from extension module K1 and distinguish if the data is
H49 (DVP-02DA model type).
6. D100 will increase K1 and D101 will increase K5 every second.
7. When value of D100 and D101 attain to K4000, they will be reset to 0.
8. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:
CH1 mode to 0, CH2 mode to 2.
9. Write output setting CR#10 and CR#11 to D100 and D101. Analog output will change
with D100 and D101 value.


RS Serial Data Communication ES EP EH
80

S Continuous
RS －－
m execution
D
n 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Operand m available range: m=0~256
Operand n available range: n=0~256 Flag: M1120~M1131,
M1140~M1143, M1161
Please refer to the footnote.
: Start device of transmitting data : Transmitting data group number

Command
: Start device of receiving data : receiving data group number
Explanation
This command is a convenience command for MPU to use RS-485 to connect
communication interface in series. It stores words data in source data register
and sets length . It also can set to receive data register and length .
If it doesn’t need to transmit data, can be indicated to K0 and if it doesn’t need
to receive data, can be indicated to K0.
RS command can be used in the program unlimitedly, but you can’t execute two or
more RS commands at the same time.
It is invalid to change transmitting data during executing RS command.
Use this RS command to transmit and receive data of PLC and external/peripheral
equipment (AC drive, etc.) when external/peripheral equipment has RS-485 serial
communication and communication format of this equipment is public.
If communication format of external/peripheral equipment corresponds with
communication format of MODBUS, DVP series PLC provides several convenience
communication commands, API 100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR and API 150
MODRW, for user to use. Please refer to individual command explanation for detail.
Please refer to following footnote for more information of special auxiliary relay
M1120~M1161 and special data register D1120~D1131 related to RS-485
communication command.
Writing data into the register that starts from D100 and set M1122 (send request flag)
Program
Example to ON.
1 If RS command is executed when X10=ON, PLC will in the state of waiting for
transmitting and receiving data. It will start to transmit 10 continuous data that start
from D100. M1122 will be set to OFF at the end of transmitting (Please do not use
program to execute RST M1122). After 1ms, it will start to receive external 10 data and
store them into continuous registers that start from D120.

When receiving data complete, M1123 will be set to ON. (Program will set M1123 to
OFF when receiving data complete and in the state of waiting for transmitting and
receiving data. Please do use not PLC program to execute RST M1123 continuously.
M1002 Setting communication
MOV H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
SET M1120 Communication

protocol latched
Setting communication
MOV K100 D1129 time out 100ms
transmission
request
write transmitting data
in advance
pulse
SET M1122 sending request
X10
RS D100 K10 D120 K10
receiving
completed
Process of receiving data
M1123
receiving completed
RST M1123
and flag reset
8-bit mode (M1161=ON) / 16-bit mode (M1161=OFF) switch:
Program
Example 《8-bit mode》:
2 Head code and tail code of PLC transmission data will be set by using M1126 and M1130
according to D1124~D1126. After setting, PLC will send head code and tail code that set
by user automatically when executing RS command.
When M1161=ON, the conversion mode will be 8-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high
byte and low byte. High byte will be ignored and low byte will be received and
transmitted.
M1000
M1161
X0
RS D100 K4 D120 K7
Transmit data: (PLC → external equipment)
STX D100L D101L D102L D103L EXT1 EXT2
Head source data register will start from Tail code Tail code
code low byte of D100 1 2
length = 4
Receive data: (external equipment → PLC)

D120L D121L D122L D123L D124L D125L D126L
Head receive data register will start from Tail code Tail code
length = 7
PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code
and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length .
《16-bit mode》:
Head code and tail code of PLC transmitting data is set by using M1126 and M1130 with
D1124~D1126. After complete the setting, PLC will send head code and tail code set by
user automatically when executing RS command.
When M1161=OFF, the conversion mode will be 16-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high
byte and low byte for data transmitting and receiving.
M1001
M1161
X0
RS D100 K4 D120 K7
Transmit data: (PLC → external equipment)
STX D100L D100L D101L D101L EXT1 EXT2
Head source data register will start from Tail code Tail code
length = 4
Receive data: (external equipment → PLC)
D120L D120H D121L D121H D122L D122H D123L
Head receive data register will start from Tail code Tail code
length = 7
PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code
and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length .

When PLC connects to VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=OFF), (16-bit
Program
Example Mode, M1161=OFF), it will transmit data to read 6 continuous data that start from
3 VFD-B parameter address H2101.
MOV H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1

protocol latched
transmission MOV K100 D1129
time out 100ms
request
in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K17 D120 K35
receiving
completed
M1123
receiving completed
RST M1123
and flag reset
PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF “
VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: “: 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 3B CR LF “

PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)
Register DATA
D100 low byte ‘: ’ 3A H STX
D100 high byte ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D101 low byte ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D101 high byte ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
CMD (1,0) is command code
D102 low byte ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D102 high byte ‘2’ 32 H
D103 low byte ‘1’ 31 H
Start data address
Number of data (count by word)
D106 high byte ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error check
D107 low byte ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0 code
D107 high byte CR AH
END
D108 low byte LF DH
PLC receiving data register (VFD-B response messages)
Register DATA
D120 low byte ‘: ’ 3A H STX
D120 high byte ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D121 low byte ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D121 high byte ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D122 low byte ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
Number of data (count by byte)
D123 low byte ‘C’ 43 H
D124 low byte ‘1’ 31 H Content of address 2101 H

Register DATA
Content of address 2102 H
D135 high byte ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1
D136 low byte ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0
D136 high byte CR AH
END
D137 low byte LF DH
When PLC connects to VFD-B AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,
Program M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-B parameter address
Example H2000.
4
MOV H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication
SET M1120
protocol latched
MOV K100 D1129
time out 100ms
SET M1143 RTU Mode
SET M1161 8 bits Mode

transmission
request
in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K8 D120 K8
receiving
completed
M1123
RST M1123 receiving completed
and flag reset

PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
Register DATA
D100 low byte 01 H Address
D101 low byte 06 H Function
D102 low byte 20 H
Data address
D103 low byte 00 H
D104 low byte 00 H
Data content
D105 low byte 12 H
D106 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low
D107 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High
PLC receiving data register (response messages of VFD-B)
Register DATA
D120 low byte 01 H Address
D121 low byte 06 H Function
D122 low byte 20 H
Data address
D123 low byte 00 H
D124 low byte 00 H
Data content
D125 low byte 12 H
D126 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low
D127 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High

RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST /

Footnote RSTEF / MODRW commands relation flags:
Flag Function Explanation Action
Communication protocol holding. It is used to hold communication
setting. PLC will reset communication protocol setting according to
special data register D1120 after first program scan. When second
program scan starts and RS command is executed, it will reset
User setting
M1120 communication protocol setting according to special data register
and clear
D1120. If communication protocol is fixed, M1120 can be set to
ON. At this time, communication protocol setting won’t be reset as
RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF /
MODRW is executed even if D1120 setting is changed.
When it is off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication
M1121 System acts
information.
Sending request. Users need to set M1122 to ON by pulse
command when using RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV /
User setting
STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command to transmit and
M1122 and system
receive data. If above command starts to execute, PLC will
clears auto
transmit and receive data. M1122 will be reset after above
commands complete transmitting.
Receiving completed. M1123 will be set to ON after RS / MODRD /
System
MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW
auto setting
M1123 commands complete executing. User can process receiving data
and user
when M1123 is set to ON and reset M1123 to OFF when the
clear
process of receiving data is completed.
Receiving wait. When M1124 is set to ON, it means PLC is waiting
M1124 System acts
for receiving data.
Communication reset. When M1125 is set to ON, the
M1125 communication of PLC will be reset. After resetting, M1125 must
be reset to Off.
User setting
STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting
M1126 and clear
user/system definition and STX/ETX.
STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting
M1130
user/system definition and STX/ETX.
Communication command finishes transmitting and receiving. RS
M1127 System
command is not included.
auto setting
Receiving time out. This flag will be activated if D1129 is set and and user
M1129 the process of receiving data is not completed within the setting clear
time. After resetting, M1129 should be reset to OFF.
M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication
M1131=ON during MODRD / RDST / MODRW convert to HEX.
M1131
Otherwise M1131 will be OFF.
M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data received error System acts
M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command error
M1142 VFD-A command data received error
ASCII / RTU mode selection, ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII

M1143 User setting
mode. (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW commands)
and clear
M1161 8/16-bit mode setting. ON is 8-bit mode and OFF is 16-bit mode

Special register related to RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD /

REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command:
For ES/EP models, data response delay time setting when PLC
D1038
MPU is slave. Time unit (0.1ms).
After executing MODRD/RDST command, PLC will convert ASCII
D1050~D1055 data of D1070~D1085 to HEX and store hexadecimal data to
D1050~D1055.
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command.
Executing this command will receive feedback (return) messages
D1070~D1085
from receiver. The messages will be stored at D1070~D1085. User
can check return data by viewing the content of the register.
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. The
transmitting message will be stored in D1089~D1099 when this
D1089~D1099
command is executed. Users can check if the command is correct
by the content of the register.
Please refer to the following table for RS-485 communication
D1120
protocol.
D1121 Communication address of PLC MPU when PLC MPU is slave.
D1122 Residual words of transmitting data.
D1123 Residual words of receiving data.
D1124 Start word definition (STX). Please refer to the table above.
D1125 First end word definition (ETX1). Please refer to the table above.
D1126 Second end word definition (ETX2). Please refer to the table above.
Communication time out is abnormal. Time unit (ms). It is used to
set time of time out. If the value of the time is 0, it means there is no
time out. PLC will set M1129 to be ON if receiving time of the first
word or between any two words is more than setting after executing
D1129
RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF /
MODRW commands to enter received mode when the value of the
time is more than 0. User can use M1129 to handle communication
time out but be sure to remember to reset M1129 after handling.
D1130 MODBUS return error code record.
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command
MODRW. The characters transmitted by this command will be
D1256~D1295
stored in D1256~D1295 when this command is executed. User can
check if the command is correct by the content of the registers.
PLC will automatically convert ASCII data in the receiving register
D1296~D1311
specified by user to HEX, hexadecimal value.

D1120: RS-485 communication protocol. For the settings, please refer to following
table:
Content 0 1
b0 Data length 7 8
00 : None
b1
Parity bits 01 : Odd
b2
11 : Even
b3 Stop bits 1 bit 2 bit
b4 0001 (H1) : 110
b5 0010 (H2) : 150
b6 0011 (H3) : 300
b7
0100 (H4) : 600
0101 (H5) : 1200
0110 (H6) : 2400
0111 (H7) : 4800
1000 (H8) : 9600
1001 (H9) : 19200
1010 (HA) : 38400
1011 (HB) : 57600 (only in EH/EP series models)
1100 (HC) : 115200 (only in EH/EP series models)
Start word
b8 None D1124
selection
First end word
b9 None D1125
selection
Second end word
b10 None D1126
selection
b15~b11 No definition
Start word and end word of control characters will be defined in the communication
format of peripheral equipment when using RS command. Start word and end word
can be set in D1124~D1125 by user or defined by machine/equipment. When using
M1126, M1130, D1124~D1125 to set start and end word, b8~b9 of D1120 of RS485
communication protocol should be set to 1. For the settings, please refer to the
following table:
M1130
0 1
D1124: user define D1124: H 0002
0 D1125: user define D1125: H 0003
D1126: user define D1126: H 0000（no setting）
M1126
D1124: user define D1124: H 003A（’:’）

1 D1125: user define D1125: H 000D（CR）
D1126: user define D1126: H 000A（LF）
Example for communication format setting:
Communication format: Baud rate 9600 7, N, 2
STX : “: “
ETX1 : “CR”
EXT2 : “LF”
You can get the communication format H788 via check with table and write into D1120.

b15 b0
D1120 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0
7 8 8
Don t care
M1002
MOV H788 D1120
When using STX, EXT1 and EXT2 should pay attention to the On/Off relationship
between special auxiliary relay M1126 and M1130.
M1143: ASCII / RTU mode selection. ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode.
Take standard MODBUS format to explanation:
ASCII mode (M1143=Off):
STX Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH)
Address Hi Communication address:
Address Lo 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Hi Function code:
Function Lo 8-bit function code consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1) Data content:
n × 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes
…….
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum:
LRC CHK Lo 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll code
END Hi End word:
END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
END Lo
Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters. For example: a
1-byte data 64 Hex shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). The
table below identifies the usable hexadecimal characters and their associated ASCII
codes.
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
Start word (STX): ‘: ’ (3AH)
Communication address (Address):
‘0’ ‘0’: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast)
‘0’ ‘1’: toward the drive at the 01 address
‘0’ ‘F’: toward the drive at the 15 address
‘1’ ‘0’: toward the drive at the 16 address﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒and consequently, the Max. address
can be reached is 255 (‘F’ ‘F’).
Function code (Function):
‘0’ ‘3’: read contents of many registers
‘0’ ‘6’: write one WORD into the register
‘1’ ‘0’: write contents of many registers

Data content:
The content of transmitting data send by user
LRC check:
LRC check is the added sum from “Address” to “Data contents”. For example, the 01H +
03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H.
End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 data contents that exist
successively within the register, as shown follows: the address of the start register is
2102H.
Inquiry message: Response message:
STX ‘: ’ STX ‘: ’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of data ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Start address ‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of start address ‘7’
‘0’ 2102H ‘7’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ Content of address ‘0’
‘D’ 2103H ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode (M1143=On):

START Please refer to following explanation
Address Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function Function code: 8-bit binary
……. n × 8-bit data
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC check:
CRC CHK High 16-bit CRC consists of 2 8-bit binary
END Please refer to following explanation
START:
ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms
EH series:
Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)
300 40 9600 2
600 21 19200 1
1200 10 38400 1
2400 5 57600 1
4800 3 115200 1

Communication Address (Address):

00 H: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast)
01 H: toward the drive at the 01 address
0F H: toward the drive at the 15 address
10 H: toward the drive at the 16 address﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒and consequently, the Max. address
can be reached is 255 (‘F’ ‘F’)
Function code (Function):

03 H: read contents of many registers
06 H: write one WORD into the register
01 H: write contents of many registers
Data content:
The content of transmitting data send by user
CRC check:
CRC check starts from “Address” and ends in “Data content”. Its calculation is as
follows:
Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC
register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from
step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC
register, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message
commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is
the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must
be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.
END:
ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms
EH series:
Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)
300 40 9600 2
600 21 19200 1
1200 10 38400 1
2400 5 57600 1
4800 3 115200 1

For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 continuous data of the
register shown follows: the address of the start register is 2102H
Inquiry message: Response message:
Address 01 H Address 01 H
Function 03 H Function 03 H
21 H Number of data 04 H
Start data address
02 H (count by byte)
Number of data 00 H Content of data address 17 H
(count by word) 02 H 8102H 70 H
CRC CHK Low 6F H Content of data address 00 H
CRC CHK High F7 H 8103H 00 H
CRC CHK Low FE H
CRC CHK High 5C H
Timing chart of RS-485 communication program flag:

MOV H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication
SET M1120 protocol latched
MOV K100 D1129
transmission time out 100ms
request
in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K2 D120 K8
receiving
completed
M1123 receiving completed

RST M1123
and flag reset

Timing chart:
SET M1122 X0
RS command executes X10

Transmission ready M1121
Sending request M1122 Auto reset after transmitting data completed
Receiving completed M1123 User must reset in program
Receiving wait M1124
Communication reset M1125 User will reset to the transmit

standby status in program
MODRD/RDST/MODRW data
ASCII data converted to hexadecimal,
receiving and conversion M1127
Change less than a scan period
completed
direction
immediately
Transmitting and receiving M1128 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receiving time out M1129 It will be activated when receiving time out message
Receive time out Stop to count time after
timer set by D1129 receiving data completed
Covert MODRD/RDST M1131 Conversion data
/MODRW to hexadecimal 3
2
Residual words of 1
transmitting data D1122 0
8
7
6
5
4
3
Residual words of 2
receiving data D1123 1
0
API Octal Number System

Applicable models
PRUN ES EP EH
81 D P Transmission
－

S Continuous Pulse
PRUN PRUNP
Note: X, Y, M of word device KnX, KnY, KnM should be a multiple
of 10, e.g. X10, M10, Y10.
Continuous Pulse
When operand S is specified as KnX, operand D should be DPRUN execution DPRUNP execution
specified as KnM.
Flag: None
When operand S is specified as KnM, operand D should be
specified as KnY.
: Transmission source device : Transmission destination device

Command
Transmit the the content of to in octal number system format.
Explanation

When X3=On, transmit the content of K4X10 to K4M10 in octal number system
Program
Example format.
1 X3
PRUN K4X10 K4M10
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
NO CHANGE
When X2=On, transmit the content of K4M10 to K4Y10 in octal number system format.
Program X2
Example PRUN K4M10 K4Y10
2
These two devices won’t be transmitted
M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

ASCI Convert HEX into ASCII ES EP EH
82 P

S Continuous Pulse
ASCI ASCIP
n
32-bit command
Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256
－－－－
ES series models do not support pulse execution command Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting
(ASCIP)
: Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result
Command
: Converted digits
Explanation
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, read hexadecimal data characters
from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store
the result into high and low byte of device .
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, read hexadecimal data characters
from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store
the result into low byte of device (high byte of device are all set to 0).

When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.

Program
Example When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into
1 ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.
M1001
M1161
X0
ASCI D10 D20 K4
Supposed condition:
(D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H
(D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H
(D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H
(D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H
When n is 4, the bit structure is:

D10=0123 H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
D20 high byte low byte

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 31H 0 30H
D21 high byte low byte
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 33H 2 32H

b15 D10 = H 0123 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
b15 D11 = H 4567 b0

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
4 5 6 7
Convert to
b15 D20 b0
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
7 H 37 6 H 36
b15 D21 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 H 31 0 H 30
b15 D22 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 H 33 2 H 32

When n = 1 to 16:
n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
D
D20 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D20 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D21 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D21 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D22 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0”
D22 high byte “3” “2” “1”
D23 low byte “3” “2”
D23 high byte “3”
D24 low byte
D24 high byte no
D25 low byte change
D25 high byte
D26 low byte
D26 high byte
D27 low byte
D27 high byte
n
K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
D
D20 low byte “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C”
D20 high byte “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D”
D21 low byte “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E”
D21 high byte “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F”
D22 low byte “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8”
D22 high byte “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9”
D23 low byte “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A”
D23 high byte “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B”
D24 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D24 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D25 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D25 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D26 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0”
no
D26 high byte “3” “2” “1”
change
D27 low byte “3” “2”
D27 high byte “3”
When M 1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode.

Program
Example When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into
2 ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.
M1000
M1161
X0
ASCI D10 D20 K4

Supposed condition:
(D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H
(D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H
(D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H
(D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H
D10=0123 H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
ASCII code of D20=2 is 32H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 2
ASCII code of D21=3 is 33H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3 3
b15 D10 = H 0123 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
Convert to
b15 D20 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 H 30
b15 D21 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
1 H 31
b15 D22 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
2 H 32
b15 D23 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3 H 33

When n = 1 to 16:
n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
D
D20 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D21 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D22 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D23 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D24 “3” “2” “1” “0”
D25 “3” “2” “1”
D26 “3” “2”
D27 “3”
D28
D29 no
D30 change
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
n
K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
D
D20 “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C”
D21 “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D”
D22 “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E”
D23 “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F”
D24 “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8”
D25 “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9”
D26 “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A”
D27 “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B”
D28 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D29 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D30 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D31 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D32 “3” “2” “1” “0”
no
D33 “3” “2” “1”
change
D34 “3” “2”
D35 “3”

HEX Convert ASCII to HEX ES EP EH
83 P

S Continuous Pulse
HEX HEXP
n
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode
exchange
(HEXP).
: Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result
Command
n : number of converted ASCII codes.
Explanation

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Convert

16-bit ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and
then transmit to per 4-bit for one time. Number of converted ASCII codes is set
by .
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode Convert 16-bit
ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and then
transmit to low byte of . Number of converted ASCII codes is set by . (high
byte of are all 0)
Program
Example When X0=On, read ASCII bytes of the register started from D20 and convert them to
1 hexadecimal characters. Then, store the converted data to four registers started from
D10. (The converted data is four characters converted as one segment of data)
M1001
M1161
X0
HEX D20 D10 K4
Supposed condition:
S HEX S HEX
ASCII code ASCII code
conversion conversion
D20 low byte H 43 “C” D24 low byte H 34 “4”
D20 high byte H 44 “D” D24 high byte H 35 “5”
D21 low byte H 45 “E” D25 low byte H 36 “6”
D21 high byte H 46 “F” D25 high byte H 37 “7”
D22 low byte H 38 “8” D26 low byte H 30 “0”
D22 high byte H 39 “9” D26 high byte H 31 “1”
D23 low byte H 41 “A” D27 low byte H 32 “2”
D23 high byte H 42 “B” D27 high byte H 33 “3”
D20 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
41H A 30H 0
D21 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
43H C 42H B
D10 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
0 A B C

When n = 1 to 16:
n D D13 D12 D11 D10

1 ***C H
2 **CD H
3 *CDE H
4 CDEF H
5 The used ***C H DEF8 H
6 registers which **CD H EF89 H
7 are not *CDE H F89A H
specified are all
8 0 CDEF H 89AB H
9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H
10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H
11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H
12 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H
13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H
14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H
15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H
16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H
When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode.

Program M1000
Example M1161
2
X0
HEX D20 D10 K4
Supposed condition:
HEX HEX
ASCII code ASCII code
conversion conversion
D20 H 43 “C” D28 H 34 “4”
D21 H 44 “D” D29 H 35 “5”
D22 H 45 “E” D30 H 36 “6”
D23 H 46 “F” D31 H 37 “7”
D24 H 38 “8” D32 H 30 “0”
D25 H 39 “9” D33 H 31 “1”
D26 H 41 “A” D34 H 32 “2”
D27 H 42 “B” D35 H 33 “3”
When n is 2, the bit structure is
D20 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
3 0
D21 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
4 1
D10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
0 A

When n = 1 to 16:
n D D13 D12 D11 D10

1 ***C H
2 **CD H
3 *CDE H
4 CDEF H
5 The used ***C H DEF8 H
6 registers which **CD H EF89 H
7 are not *CDE H F89A H
specified are all
8 0 CDEF H 89AB H
9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H
10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H
11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H
12 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H
13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H
14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H
15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H
16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H

CCD Check Sum ES EP EH
84 P －

S Continuous Pulse
CCD CCDP
n
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode
ES series models do not support this command (CCD,
exchange
CCDP)
: Start device of source data : Result device for storing check sum
Command
: Number of data
Explanation
This command is used to check sum of words to ensure the truth of transmission data
during communication.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Check the
sum of words (8-bit in one byte) from the register specified by source devcie
and store the sum to the register specified by device while the parity bits
are stored in +1.
8-bit conversion mode : When M1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode. Check the sum
of words (8-bit in one byte, only low byte are available) from the register
specified by source devcie and store the sum to the register specified by device
while the parity bits are stored in +1.


Program
Example When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one
1 byte, n=6 means to specify D0~D2) and store the sum in the register specified by
D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.
M1000
M1161
X0
CCD D0 D100 K6
(S) Content of data(words)

D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
D0 high byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
D1 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
D1 high byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
D2 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
D2 high byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
D100 K867 Total
D101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
An even result is indicated

by the use of 0(zero)
An odd result is indicated
by the use of 1(one)
D100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
D101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Parity
Program
Example When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one
2 byte, n=10 means to specify D0~D4) and store the sum in the register specified by
D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.
M1000
M1161
X0
CCD D0 D100 K6
(S) Content of data(words)

D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
D1 low byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
D2 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
D3 low byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
D4 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
D5 low byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
D100 K867 Total
D101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
An even result is indicated

by the use of 0(zero)
An odd result is indicated
by the use of 1(one)
D100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
D101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Parity


VRRD Volume Read ES EP EH
85 P －

S Continuous Pulse
VRRD VRRDP
Note: Operand S available range: n=0~7
32-bit command
Refer to each model specification for usage range. －－－－
ES series models do not support this command (VRRD,
VRRDP) Flag: M1178 and M1179.
Please refer to following footnote.
: Volume number : Destination device for storing read volume

Command
VRRD command is used to read the two volumes of PLC main processing unit and the
Explanation
number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the six volumes of function card and the
number is No.2 to No.7. The read data will be converted as value from 0 to 255 and
stored in destination device .
If regarding the volume as the setting value of timer, the setting time of timer can be
changed by truning VR. If desiring to get the value more than 255, please multiply
by some constant.
When X0=On, the volume of No.0 of VR specified by VRRD command will be
Program
Example converted to BIN value (0~255) in an 8-bit format and stored in D0 temporarily.
1 When X1=On, timer T0 regards the content of D0 as the setting value of timer and
starts to count time.
X0
VRRD K0 D0
X1
TMR T0 D0
Volume read in order: S=K0 to K7 corresponding to the 8 volumes, No.0 to No.7. The
Program
Example following program example use E (E=0~7) to modify, K0E=K0 to K7.
2 The loop of timer convert the volume scale 0~10 to 0~255. The time unit of T0 to T7 is
0.1 second, therefore, the setting value is 0 to 25.5 seconds.

M1000
RST E
FOR K8
M1000
VRRD K 0E D100E
INC E
NEXT
X10
TMR T0 D100
T0
Y000
X11
TMR T1 D101
T7
Y007
END
Operation of FOR~NEXT command:

1. In FOR~NEXT command area, FOR command specify K8 indicates the loop
between FOR~NEXT command is executed 8 times repeatly. After 8 times of
execution, it will continue to execute.
2. Between FOR~NEXT command (INC E), the content of E will be 0, 1, 2…7 and
increased by 1(one). Therefore, 8 volume scale will also show as VR0→D100,
VR1→D101, VR2→D102…VR7→D107 in order and be read into the specified
register.
VR means VARIABLE RESISTOR SCALE.

Footnote For EP/EH models, built-in 2 points VR volume can be used with special D and special
M.
Device Function
D1178 VR0 value
D1179 VR1value


VRSC Volume Scale ES EP EH
86 P －

S Continuous Pulse
VRSC VRSCP
Note: S operand available range: n=0~7
32-bit command
Refer to each model specification for usage range. －－－－
ES series models do not support this command (VRSC, VRSCP).
Flag: None
: Volume number : Destination device for storing volume scale

Command
VRRD command is used to read the volume scale value of two volumes on PLC main
Explanation
processing unit and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the volume
scale value of six volumes on function card and the number is No.2 to No.7 (volume
scale value is from 0 to 10). The read data will be stored in destination device
as an integer from the range 0 to 10.
When X0=On, the volume scale value (0 to10) of No. 0 specified by VRSC command
Program
Example is stored in device D10.
1 X0
VRSC K0 D10
Regrad as digital switch: Correspond volume scale 0 to 10. Only one contact is On
Program
Example between M10 to M20. Using DECO command (API 41) can decode the volume scale
2 into M0~M15.
When X0=On, store the volume scale value (0 to 10) of specified No. 1 volume to D1.
When X1=On, use DECO command (API 41) to decode the volume scale into
M10~M25.
X0
VRSC K1 D1
X1
DECO D1 M10 K4
M10
On when volume scale is 0
M11
M20


ABS Absolute Value ES EP EH
87 D P

D Continuous Pulse
ABS ABSP
execution execution
ES series models do not support this command (ABSP, DABSP). 32-bit command (5 STEPS)
Continuous Pulse
DABS DABSP
execution execution
Flag: None
: Specified device for taking absolute value

Command
When the command is executed, take the absolute value of the specified device,
Explanation
.
This command is usually pulse execution (ABSP).
When X0 goes from OFF→ON, take the absolute value of the D0 contents.
Program X0
Example ABS D0

PID PID Calculation ES EP EH
88 D

S1 Continuous
PID －－
S2 execution
S3
D 32-bit command
Continuous
Note: Operand S3 uses 14 continuous devices DPID －－
execution
Flag: None
For the information of the PID usage times during the
program, please refer to the footnote.
: Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter

Command
: Output value (MV)
Explanation
Specific command for PID calculation control. This scan will execute PID operation
when sampling time reaches. PID means Proportion, Integration and Differential. PID
control is widely applied on many applications of machine equipments, pneumatic
equipments and electric equipments.

: Target value (SV), : Present measured value (PV), for 16-bit command:
~ +14, for 32-bit command: ~ +20: PID command will start to
execute after completing all parameters setting and the result will be stored in .
Please give no latch register area for content. (if you want to give
content a latch register, please reset latch to 0 when program runs.)
Please complete the parameter settings before executing PID command.
Program
Example This command will be executed when X0=ON and the result will be stored in D150.
The command will not be executed when X0=OFF and the previous data won’t have
any change.
X0
PID D0 D1 D100 D150
PID command is only available in V5.7 and above of ES series models and it is not
Footnote available for other version.
There is no time limit for using PID command but the register number specified by
cannot be repeated.
For 16-bit commands, uses 15 registers. In above program, the parameter
setting area of PID command that indicates are D100~D114. You should use
MOV command to transmit settings to the indication register to set before PID
command executes. If the registers that parameters indicate are latch area, please
use MOVP to execute transmitting.
Parameter table of 16-bit :
Device No. Function Setting range Explanation
: Sampling time (TS) If TS is less than one program scan

(unit: 10ms) 1~2,000 time, PID command will execute one
(unit: 10ms) program scan time. If TS=0, PID
command won’t be activated.
+1: Propotional gain (KP) 0~30,000(%) When setting exceeds 30,000,
setting will be regarded as 30,000.
+2: Integral gain (KI) 0~30,000(%)
+3: Differential gain (KD)0~30,000(%)
+4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control
1: Forward control (E=SV-PV)
2: Inverse control (E=PV-SV)
+5: The range that Error For example: if the range of error
value (E) doesn’t 0~32,767 value (E) is 5, output value MV of E
work between –5~5 is 0.
+6: For example: if upper bound is set
to 1000 and once output (MV) is
Upper bound of
-32,768~32,767 larger than 1000, it will output 1000.
saturated output (MV)
(upper bound should larger than
lower bound, i.e. S3+6 > S3+7.)
+7: For example: if lower bound is set
Lower bound of
-32,768~32,767 to –1000, once output (MV) is less
saturated output (MV)
than –1000, it will output –1000.

+8: For example: if upper bound is

set to 1000 and once output is
Upper bound of larger than 1000, it will output
-32,768~32,767
saturated integration 1000 and doesn’t integrate.
(upper bound should larger than
lower bound, i.e. S3+8 > S3+9.)
+9: For example: if lower bound is set
Lower bound of to –1000, once output is less
-32,768~32,767
saturated integration than –1000, it will output –1000
and doesn’t integrate.
+10, 11: For example: It is accumulated
Save accumulation integration. It is usually for
32-bit floating
integral value reference but user can clear or
point range
temporality modify by requirement. (needs to
modify by 32-bit floating point)
+12: For example: It is present
Save previous PV measured value and usually for
－
value temporality reference. But user can modify by
requirement.
+13:
For system use, please don’t use it.
~
+14:
When parameter setting is out of setting range, it will be set to upper bound or lower
bound. But if operation method is out of range, it will be set to 0.
PID commands can be used in interrupt subroutine, step point and CJ command.
Max. range of sampling error time TS is （
- a scan time+1ms）~+（a scan time）. If error
value has influence on output, please keep the scan time fixable or execute PID
command in interrupt subroutine of timer.
If the settings of sampling time TS ≦ a scan time, CPU will have error code K6740
(PID operation error). At this time, CPU will reset TS = a scan time to execute PID
operand. In this situation, please execute PID command in time interrupt subroutine
(I6□□~I8□□).
The present measured value (PV) must be a stable value before the execution of PID
command. If using input value of DVP-04AD / DVP-04XA / DVP-04PT / DVP-04TC
these modules to perform the PID calculation, please pay attention to the A/D
conversion time of the above-mentioned modules.
32-bit command occupies 21 registers. If parameter setting area of PID
command that designated by is D100~D120, it needs to use MOV command to
send setting to designated registers before executing PID command.

Parameter table of 32-bit :

: Sampling time (TS) 1~2,000 If TS is less than one program

(unit: 10ms) (unit: 10ms) scan time, PID command will
execute one program scan time.
If TS=0, PID command won’t be
activated.
+1: Propotion gain (KP) 0~30,000(%) When setting exceeds 30,000,
setting will be regarded as
+2: Integration gain (KI) 0~30,000(%) 30,000.
+3: Differential gain (KD) 0~30,000(%)
+4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control
1: Forward control (SV→PV)
2: Inverse control (PV→SV)
+5, 6: The range that For example: if the range of
32-bit Error value (E) 0~2,147,483,647 error value (E) is 5, output value
doesn’t work MV of E between –5~5 is 0.
+7, 8: For example: if upper bound is
set to 1000 and once output
Upper bound of
-2,147,483,648~ (MV) is larger than 1000, it will
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647 output 1000. (upper bound
output (MV)
should larger than lower bound,
i.e. S3+7, 8 > S3+9, 10.)
+9, 10: For example: if lower bound is
Lower bound of
-2,147,483,648~ set to –1000, once output (MV)
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647 is less than –1000, it will
output (MV)
output –1000.
+11, 12: For example: if upper bound is
set to 1000 and once output is
Upper bound of larger than 1000, it will output
-2,147,483,648~
32-bit saturated 1000 and doesn’t integrate.
2,147,483,647
integrator (upper bound should larger than
lower bound, i.e. S3+11, 12 >
S3+13, 14.)
+13, 14: For example: if lower bound is
Lower bound of
-2,147,483,648~ set to –1000, once output is less
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647 than –1000, it will output –1000
integrator
and doesn’t integrate.
+15, 16: For example: It is accumulated
integration. It is usually for
32-bit temporary
32-bit floating reference but user can clear or
accumulation integral
point range modify by requirement. (needs
value
to modify by 32-bit floating
point)
+17, 18: For example: It is previous test
32-bit save previous value and usually for reference.
－
PV temporality But user can modify by
requirement.
+19:
For system uses, please don’t use it.
~
+20:
Explanation of 32-bit and 16-bit are almost the same. The different is
that capacity of +5 ~ +20.

This command executes PID calculation according to speed and differential type of
PID
Equations measured value.
PID operation has three control methods: normal, forward and inverse controls. The
control method is set by +4. Besides, the settings that have relation to PID
operation is set by ~ +5.
PID equations:
1
MV = K P * E (t ) + K I * E (t ) + K D * PV (t )S
S
Control Method PID Equations
Forward control, normal

control E (t ) = SV − PV
Inverse control
E (t ) = PV − SV
1
Besides, PV (t )S means the differential value of PV (t ) and E (t ) means the
S
integral value of E (t ) .
You can know that this command is different from general PID command from above
equation. The difference is the change on differential usage. To avoid transient
differential value is too large when executing general PID command at the first time, this
command willl lower output (MV) value once the change of present measured value (PV)
is too large by monitoring differential value of present measured value (PV).
Symbols explanation:
MV : Output value
KP : Porprotional gain
Error value. Forward control E (t ) = SV − PV , Inverse control
E (t ) :
E (t ) = PV − SV
PV : Present measured value
SV : Target value
KD : Differential gain
PV (t )S : Differential value of PV (t )
KI : Integral gain
1
E (t ) : Integral value of E (t )
S

Control diagram:
In dotted-line is PID command
1/S KI
+
+ +
KP G(s)
+
KD
Note and suggestion:
1. When adjusting three major parameters, KP, KI and KD, please adjust KP first (set
by experience) and set 0 to KI and KD. When adjusting to control, adjust KI (order
from small to big) and KD (order from small to big). Refer to example 4 for adjusting.
If KP=100, it means 100%. When KP is less than 100%, error value will attenuate
and when KP is more than 100%, error value will amplify.
2. This command should be controlled with many parameters. Please follow setting
rule to avoid error occurs.
Example 1: block diagram for using PID command to control position (control method
S3+4 should be set to 0)
Position command MV
(SV) PID Plant
Encoder
PV
Example 2: block diagram for using PID command to control speed (control method
S3+4 should be set to 0)

speed command S+MV

AC drive
(S)
Accel/Decel
output (MV)
speed
Accel/Decel detection
PID equipment (P)
command (SV)
actual accel/decel
speed (PV=S-P)
Example 3: block diagram for using PID command to control temperature (action
direction S3+4 should be set to 1)
add temperature
(MV) heater
temperature PID equipment
command (SV)
temperature
detection
actual temperature(PV) equipment
Example 4: suggested steps of PID adjustment

b
Consider that transfer function of plant G (s ) = (most general AC drive model is this
s+a
function) in control system, command value SV is 1 and sampling time Ts is 10ms.
Suggested steps are in the following:
Step1: set KI and KD to 0 first, then set KP to 5, 10, 20 and 40 in order and record (SV)
and (PV) state. The result will be shown as following figure.
1.5
K P =40 SV=1
K P =20 K P =10
1
KP =5
0.5
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Time (sec)

Step 2: In above figure, we will choose the situation when KP is 10. The reason is in the
following:
When KP is 40, response has overshoot situation. So we won’t use it.
When KP is 20, PV response is close to SV and won’t have overshoot but transient MV
will be great due to start-up too fast. We also won’t use it.
When KP is 10, PV response is close to SV and is smooth. So we consider to use it.
When KP is 5, the response is too slow. So we won’t use it.
Example 3: When deciding to use the curve KP=10, arrange KI in order from small to big
(such as 1, 2, 4, 8) and not to large than KP. Then arrange KD in order from small to big
(such as 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2) and not to exceed 10% KP. Finally, you can get
following PV and SV relation figure.
1.5
PV=SV
0.5
KP =10,KI =8,KD =0.2
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Time (sec)
Note: This example is only for reference. Therefore, user should adjust suitable control
parameters by himself according to real control system.
Application 1: using PID command in pressure control system. (use block diagram of
example 1)
Applications
Control destination: make control system reach pressure target value.
Control characteristics: this system should reach to control destination step by step,
therefore, it may cause system out of control or overload if reaching control destination
too fast.
Recommend solve method:
Method 1: reach by using long sampling time.
Method 2: reach by using delay command and its control block diagram is shown in the
following.
0 0rpm
0 0V

0 0rpm
0 0V
511 3000
rpm 255 5V
pressure
pressure MV speed
command SV MV convert convert
AC
command delay PID
value (D0)
D1 D5 to to Drive
PV speed voltage D1116
A voltage
B convert
wave
wave D1110 to pressure
command meter
value
0 0V
511 10V
command command
value value
280 280
250
200 D2 is command interval value
150 D3 is command interval time
100 user can adjust by require
50
0 t t
0
A wave B wave
Program application of command delay is in the following:
M1002
MOV K10 D3
M0
TMR T0 D3
T0
RST T0
> D0 D1 MOV K50 D2
< D0 D1 MOV K-50 D2
= D0 D1 MOV K0 D2
ADD D2 D1 D1
CMP D2 K0 M10
M10
< D1 D0 MOV D0 D1
M12
> D1 D0 MOV D0 D1
M0
PID D1 D1116 D10 D5

Application 2: speed control and pressure control system is controlled separately. (use
block diagram of example 2)
Control destination: Adding pressure control system (PID command) after using open
loop to control speed for a period time to reach pressure control.
Control characteristics: This architecture should use open loop to reach speed control
and then reach control target by close loop pressure control due to there is no relation
between speed and pressure of these two systems. Besides, you can add command
delay function of application 1 to avoid control command of pressure control system
changes too fast. Control block diagram is shown in the following.
0
255
M3 M2=ON
D40 speed
Speed + D32 convert D1116 AC
command D30 to drive
+ voltage
D31
0rpm
3000rpm MV
convert to
accel/decel
D0 M0=ON D5 MV
delay SV PV D1110 pressure
pressure D1
function PID
command meter
(optional)
M1=ON
Partial program application is in the following:

M1002
MOV K1000 D40
M0
MOV D0 D1
M1
MOV K0 D5
M3
MOV D40 D30
M2
ADD D30 D31 D32
> D32 K3000 MOV K3000 D32
< D32 K0 MOV K0 D32
DIV D32 K11 D32
> D32 K255 MOV K255 D32
MOV D32 D1116
M1
PID D1 D1110 D10 D5


MODRD MODBUS Data Read ES EP EH
100

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
MODRD －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
n ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K255
－－－－
Operand n available range: K1＜n≦K6
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS
command
: Communication address. : Address for reading data : Read data

Command
length.
Explanation
MODRD is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode
communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except
VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODRD command can be
used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to the
Delta VFD series manual for more details.
is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be
informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141 turn
to be ON.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1085.
After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback
(return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.
If using ASCII mode, PLC will convert the data to value and store them in D1050 to
D1055 because the feedback (return) data are all ASCII characters. D1050 to D1055 will
be invalid if using RTU mode.
After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment
again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be
clear.
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off)
Program M1002 Setting communication
Example MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
1 Communication
SET M1120
protocol latched
X0 Setting communication command:
device address 01
MODRD K1 H2101 K6
data address H2101
X1 data length 6 words
SET M1122 Setting transmission flag
PLC will convert the receiving data stored

Process of receiving data in D1070~D1085 from ASCII character to
M1127 value and store the value in D1050~D1055.
receiving RST M1127 receiving completed and flag reset
completed

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: “01 03 2101 0006 D4”

VFD-S PLC , PLC receiving: “01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B”
PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)

Register DATA
D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive
D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 address
D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command
D1090 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 code
D1091 low ‘2’ 32 H
D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H
Starting data address
D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1092 high ‘1’ 31 H
D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1093 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1094 high ‘6’ 36 H
D1095 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error
D1095 high ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0 check code
PLC receiving data register (response messages)
Register DATA
D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H
Number of data (count by byte)
D1072 high ‘C’ 43 H
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H PLC automatically convert
D1073 high ‘1’ 31 H Content of ASCII codes to value and
D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H address 2101 H store the converted value in
D1074 high ‘0’ 30 H D1050 = 0100 H
D1076 high ‘6’ 36 H D1051 = 1766 H
D1078 high ‘0’ 30 H D1052 = 0000 H
D1080 high ‘0’ 30 H D1053 = 0000 H
D1082 high ‘6’ 36 H D1054 = 0136 H
D1084 high ‘0’ 30 H D1055 = 0000 H
D1085 low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1
D1085 high ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0

Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)
Program
M1002
Example Setting communication
MOV H83 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
2
protocol latched
SET M1143 Setting as RTU mode

device address 01
MODRD K1 H2102 K2
data address H2102
Process of receiving data The receiving data in HEX value

format is stored in D1070~D1085.
M1127
receiving completed
receiving RST M1127
and flag reset
completed
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2102 0002 6F F7

VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 03 04 1700 0000 FE 5C
Register DATA
D1089 low 01 H Address
D1090 low 03 H Function
D1091 low 21 H
D1092 low 02 H
D1093 low 00 H
D1094 low 02 H
D1095 low 6F H CRC CHK Low
D1096 low F7 H CRC CHK High
Register DATA
D1072 low 04 H Number of data (count by byte)
D1073 low 17 H
D1074 low 70 H
D1075 low 00 H
D1076 low 00 H
D1077 low FE H CRC CHK Low
D1078 low 5C H CRC CHK High
PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When

Program
Example communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending
3 address.
When X0=On, read data from address H2100 of device 01 (VFD-S) and save in
D1070~D1085 with ASCII format. PLC will auto convert its content to numeral to save in
D1050~D1055.

Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request
from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140
and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from
M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.
M1002
Setting communication protocol
MOV H87 D1120
to 9600, 8, E, 1
SET M1120 Communication protocol latched
MOV K100 D1129 time-out to 100ms
MODRW K1 H2100 K6 device address 01,
data address H2101
SET M1122 Setting transmission request
M1129
Communication time-out Retry
M1140
data receive error Retry
M1141
sending address error Retry
The receiving data in ASCII
receiving completed format stored in D1070-D1085.
M1127 PLC will convert to numeral
handle received data and save into D1050-D1055
automatically.
RST M1127 receiving completed and
flag reset
RST M1129 communication time-out and flag reset
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)
Footnote can’t be used before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION
CODE H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will
be incorrect.


MODWR MODBUS Data Write In ES EP EH
101

MODWR －－
n ¼ ¼ ¼
Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K255 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
command
: Communication address, K0~K255 : Address for writing data :

Command
Write data
Explanation
MODWR is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode
communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except
VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODWR command can
be used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to
the Delta VFD series manual for more details.
is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be
informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141
turn to be ON. For example, 4000H is an illegal address to VFD-S, then M1141 will turn
ON, D1130=2. For the information of error codes, please refer to VFD-S series user
manual.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1076. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all
feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.
After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment
again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be
clear.
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off)
Program M1002 Setting communication
Example MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
1
Communication
SET M1120
protocol latched
K1 device address 01
MODRW H0100 H1770
data address H0100
X1 data H1770
receiving
completed
The receiving data in ASCII character
format is stored in D1070~D1085
M1123
receiving completed
RST M1123
and flag reset

PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
Register DATA
D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 address
D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1090 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1091 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H
Data address
D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1092 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1093 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1093 high ‘7’ 37 H
Data contents
D1094 low ‘7’ 37 H
D1094 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1095 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error
D1095 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0 check code
Register DATA
D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1072 high ‘1’ 31 H
Data address
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1074 high ‘7’ 37 H
Data content
D1075 low ‘7’ 37 H
D1075 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1
D1076 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)
Program
M1002
Example MOV H87
D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
2
Communication
SET M1120
protocol latched
SET M1143 Setting as RTU mode

device address 01
MODRW K1 H2000 H12
data address H2000
X1 write in data H12

receiving
completed
The receiving data in HEX value
Process of receiving data format is stored in D1070~D1085.
M1123
receiving completed
RST M1123
and flag reset

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
Register DATA
D1091 low 20 H
Data address
D1092 low 00 H
D1093 low 00 H
Data content
D1094 low 12 H
D1095 low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D1096 low 07 H CRC CHK High
Register DATA
D1072 low 20 H
Data address
D1073 low 00 H
D1074 low 00 H
Data content
D1075 low 12 H
D1076 low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D1077 low 07 H CRC CHK High
PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When

Program
Example communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending
3 address.
When X0=On, PLC will write data H1770(K6000) into address H0100 of device 01
(VFD-S).
Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request
from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140
and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from
M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.

M1002
Setting communication protocol
MOV H87 D1120
to 9600, 8, E, 1
MOV K100 D1129 time-out to 100ms
MODRW K1 H0100 H1770 device address 01,
data address H0100
X0 data H1770
SET M1122 Setting transmission request
M1129
Communication time-out Retry
M1140
data receive error Retry
M1141
sending address error Retry
receiving completed
M1123
The receiving data in ASCII
handle received data
format stored in D1070-D1085.
RST M1123 receiving completed and

flag reset
RST M1129 communication time-out and flag reset
For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the
Footnote footnote of API 80 RS command.
If using rising-edge (LDP, ANDP, ORP)/falling-edge (LDF, ANDF, ORF) before API 101
MODWR and API 150 MODRW (Function Code H06 and H10), it needs to start
transmission request M1122 to act correct.
API VFD-A Series Drive Forward Applicable models

FWD ES EP EH
102 Command

FWD －－
n ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
－－－－
Operand n available range: n=K1or K2
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
command

API VFD-A Series Drive Reverse Applicable models

REV ES EP EH
103 Command

REV －－
n ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
command
API VFD-A Series Drive Stop Applicable models

STOP ES EP EH
104 Command

STOP －－
n ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
command.
: Communication address. : AC drive master frequency. :

Command
Command object.
Explanation
FWD/REV/STOP are communication commands for Delta A/H series drive, make sure
to use the communication overtime setting (D1129) when applying these commands.
indicates AC drive master frequency. AC drive master frequency setting for
VFD-A series, K0000 to K4000, represents 0.0Hz to 400.0Hz. For H series AC drive,
the setting of K0000 to K1500 represent 0Hz to 1500Hz.
command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives
connected.
The feedback (return) data from perpherial equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1080. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all
feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1142 will be ON. If n = 2,
PLC will not receive the data.

Communication between PLC and VFD-A series AC drives, retry for communication
Program
Example time-out and received data error.
M1002
MOV H0073 D1120 protocol 4800, 8, O, 1
MOV K100 D1129 time-out 100ms
device address 0
FWD K0 K500 K1
frequency setting is 500Hz
X0 K1 is the AC drive for
SET M1122 designated address
Setting transmission flag
M1129
communication time-out Retry
M1142 received data error Retry
M1123 receiving completed

The receiving data in ASCII character
format is stored in D1070~D1085
RST M1123 receiving completed and flag reset
PLC VFD-A, PLC transmitting: “C ♥ ☺ 0001 0500 ”

VFD-A PLC, PLC receiving: “C ♥ ♠ 0001 0500 ”
Register DATA
D1089 low ‘C’ 43 H Command starting word
D1090 low ‘♥’ 03 H Check sum
D1091 low ‘☺’ 01 H Command object
D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H
Communication address
D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1095 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1096 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1097 low ‘5’ 35 H
Operation command
D1098 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1099 low ‘0’ 30 H
Register DATA
D1070 low ‘C’ 43 H Command starting word
D1071 low ‘♥’ 03 H Check sum
Reply authorization (correct: 06H,
D1072 low ‘♠’ 06 H
error: 07 H)
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H
Communication address
D1075 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1077 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1078 low ‘5’ 35 H
Operation command
D1079 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1080 low ‘0’ 30 H


RDST VFD-A Series Drive Status Read ES EP EH
105

RDST －－
n ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
32-bit command
Operand n available range: n=K0~ K3 －－－－
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
command
: Communication address, K0~K31 : Status object

Command RDST is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC
Explanation drives and used to read the execution status of AC drive.
: Status object
n = 0 Frequency command n = 2 Output current
n = 1 Output frequency n = 3 Operation command
The feedback (return) data stored in the low byte of address D1070 to D1080 are total
11 words (please refer to VFD-A series manual).
”Q, S, B, Uu, Nn, ABCD”
feedback
Explanation Data storage
(return)
Q Starting word: ’Q’ (51H). D1070 low
S Checksum code: 03H. D0171 low
B Command authorization. correct: 06H, error: 07H. D1072 low
U Communication address (address: 00~31). ”Uu” = D1073 low
u (“00”~”31”) indicated by ASCII. D1074 low
N D1075 low
Status object (00~03).”Nn” = (“00~03”) indicated by ASCII.
n D1076 low
A Status data. The content of ”ABCD” will be different D1077 low
B according to the status objects (00~03). 00~03 indicate D1078 low
C frequency, current and operation mode respectively. D1079 low
D Please refer to the explanation shown below for details. D1080 low
Nn = “00” Frequency command = ABC.D（Hz）
Nn = “01” Output command = ABC.D（Hz）
Nn = “02” Output current = ABC.D（A）
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”ABCD” to value and store
the value in D1050. For example, if ”ABCD” = “0600”, PLC will
automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0600 (0258 H) and store
it in the special register in D1050.
Nn = “03” Operation command

‘A’ = ‘0’ Stop, ‘5’ JOG(FWD)

‘1’ FWD operation, ‘6’ JOG(REV)
‘2’ Stop, ‘7’ JOG(REV)
‘3’ REV operation, ‘8’ Abnormal
‘4’ JOG(FWD),
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”A” to value and
store the value in D1051. For example, if ”A” = “3”, PLC will
automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0003 (03 H)
and store it in the special register in D1051.
‘B’ = b7 b6 b5 b4 Operation command source
0 0 0 0 Digital keypad
0 0 0 1 1st Step Speed
0 0 1 0 2nd Step Speed
0 0 1 1 3rd Step Speed
0 1 0 0 4th Step Speed
1 0 0 0 JOG frequency
1 0 0 1 Analog signal frequency command
1 0 1 0 RS-485 communication interface
1 0 1 1 Up/Down control
b3 = 0 No DC braking stop 1 DC braking stop
b2 = 0 No braking startup 1 DC braking startup
b1 = 0 FWD, 1 REV
b0 = 0 Stop, 1 Operation
PLC will store the value of ”B” in special auxiliary relays
M1168(b0)~M1175(b7)
“CD” = “00” No abnormal record “10” OcA
“01” oc “11” Ocd
“02” ov “12” Ocn
“03” oH “13” GFF
“04” oL “14” Lv
“05” oL1 “15” Lv1
“06” EF “16” cF2
“07” cF1 “17” bb
“08” cF3 “18” oL2
“09” HPF “19”
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”CD” to value and
store the value in D1052. For example, if ”CD” = “06”, PLC will
automatically convert ASCII word to the value of 0006 H and
store it in the special register in D1052.
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)
before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE 03)
Footnote
these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect.


RSTEF VFD-A Series Drive Abnormal Reset ES EP EH
106

RSTEF －－
n ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
32-bit command
Operand n available range: n=K1 or K2 －－－－
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
command.
: Communication address. : Command object.

Command
RSTEF is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC
Explanation
drives and used to reset the AC drive after an abnormal execution.
: Command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives
connected.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1089. If n = 2, there is no feedback (return) data.
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF,
ORF)before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE
H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be
incorrect.
For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the
Footnote footnote of API 80 RS command.

LRC LRC Check Sum ES EP EH
107 P －

S ¼ Continuous Pulse
LRC LRCP
n ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
D ¼
32-bit command
－－－－
ES series models do not support this command (LRC,
LRCP) Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting

: Starting device for the operation of sum check (ASCII mode) : Operand
Command
numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. LRC check: please
Explanation
refer to the footnote.
: operand numbers should be even and range is from K1~K256. If it is out of
range, error will be occurred and commond won’t be executed. At this time, M1067 and
M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will be record in D1067.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source
devcie will be divided into upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit and perform the operation
of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into upper and lower 8-bit
of device .
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the
source devcie into upper 8-bit (invalid data) and lower 8-bit and perform the
operation of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into lower 8-bit
of device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)).
Communication between PLC and VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off),
Program
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On), writing transmitting data in advance to read six data from
Example
VFD-B parameter address H2101.
M1002
MOV H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication

transmission time out 100ms
request
in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K17 D120 K35
receiving
completed
M1123
receiving completed
RST M1123
and flag reset
PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF ”

Register DATA
D100 low ‘: ’ 3A H STX
D102 low ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 address
D103 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command
D104 low ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 code
D105 low ‘2’ 32 H
D106 low ‘1’ 31 H
D107 high ‘0’ 30 H
D108 low ‘1’ 31 H
D109 low ‘0’ 30 H
D110 low ‘0’ 30 H
D111 low ‘0’ 30 H
D112 low ‘6’ 36 H

Register DATA
D113 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error
D114 low ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0 check code
D115 low CR AH
END
D116 low LF DH
The LRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by LRC command
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On).
M1000
LRC D101 K12 D113
LRC check: 01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 01 H + 00 H + 06 H = 2C H, then take the complementary

of 2, D4H. At the time, ‘D’(44 H) is stored in the lower 8-bit of D113 and ‘4’ (34 H) is stored in
the lower 8-bit of D114.
ASCII mode of communication data, the format is listed below:

Footnote STX ‘: ’ Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH)
Address Hi ‘0’ Communication:
Address Lo ‘1’ 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCll codes
Function Hi ‘0’ Function code:
Function Lo ‘3’ 8-bit function consists of 2 ASCll codes
DATA (n-1) ‘2’ Data content:
……. ‘1’ n × 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll
DATA 0 ‘0’ codes
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
LRC CHK Hi ‘D’ LRC check:
LRC CHK Lo ‘7’ 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll codes
END Hi CR End word:
END Lo LF END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters.
LRC check is the added sum from “Address” to “Data contents”. For example, 01H +
03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H.

CRC CRC Check Sum ES EP EH
108 P －

CRC CRCP
n ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
D ¼
32-bit command
－－－－
ES series models do not support this command (CRC,
CRCP) Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting

: Starting device for the operation of sum check (RTU mode) : Operand
Command
numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. CRC check: please
Explanation
: range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond
won’t be executed. At this time, M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will
be record in D1067.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source
devcie will be divided into high byte and low byte. To perform the operation of
CRC command on numbers and store the result into upper and lower 8-bit of
device .
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the
source devcie into high byte (invalid data) and low byte. To perform the
operation of CRC command on numbers and store the result into low byte of
device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)).
When PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,
Program
M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-S parameter address
Example
H2000

MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
MOV K100 D1129
time out 100ms
SET M1143 RTU Mode
SET M1161 8-bit Mode

transmission
request
write transmitting data in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K8 D120 K8
receiving
completed
M1123
RST M1123 receiving completed and flag reset
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

Register DATA
D102 low 20 H
Data address
D103 low 00 H
D104 low 00 H
Data content
D105 low 12 H
D106 low 02 H CRC CHK 0
D107 low 07 H CRC CHK 1
The CRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by CRC command
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On).
M1000
CRC D100 K6 D106
CRC check: At the time, 02 H is stored in the lower 8-bit of D106 and 07 H is stored in the
lower 8-bit of D107.
RTU mode of communication data, the format is listed below:
Footnote START Please refer to the following explanation
Address Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function Function code: 8-bit binary
……. n × 8-bit data
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC check:
CRC CHK High 16-bit CRC check sum consists of 2 8-bit binary
END Please refer to the following explanation
CRC check:
CRC check starts from “Address” and ends in “Data content”. CRC check starts from
“Address” and ends in “Data content”. Its calculation is as follows:
Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC
register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from
step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC
register, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message
commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is
the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must
be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.


SWRD Digital Switch Read ES EP EH
109 P －

D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ SWRD Continuous SWRDP Pulse
execution execution
ES series models do not support this command (SWRD, 32-bit command
SWRDP)
－－－－
Flag: M1104~M1111 Digital switch
status
: Device for storing read value

Command
Store the value that read from digital switch function card into the low byte of .
Explanation
Every digital switch has an associated BIT.
If executing this command without digital switch function card, there is no result and no
error message.
There are total 8 DIP switchs on the digital switch function card. After using SWRD
Program
command to read value, these 8 switchs are in association with the contact M0 to M7.
Example
M1000
SWRD K2M0
M0
Y0
M1
MOV K2M0 D0
M2
CNT C0 K10
M3
RST C0
M4
TMR T0 K100
M0 to M7 can be executed by using each contact command.

When END command is executed, the process of input will complete. REF (I/O)
refresh）command will be invalid.
The min. read one time bits are 4 bits when SWRD command use the input data of
digital switch function card (i.e. K1Y* or K1M* or K1S*).
When digital switch function card is inserted, 8 DIP switches correspond to
Footnote M1104~M1111 individually.


ECMP Binary Floating Point Comparison ES EP EH
110 D P －－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
D ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Continuous Pulse
DECMP DECMPP
execution execution
Flag: None
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format,
only 32-bit command DECMP, DECMPP are available.
command (DECMPP)
: Comparison value 1 of binary floating point : Comparison value 2 of

Command
binary floating point : Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.
Explanation
The data of is compared to the data of and the result (＞, ＝, ＜) is
showed by three bit devices in .
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.
If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.
Program
Example When X0=On and execute DECMP command, one of M10~M12 will be On. When
X0=Off and not to execute DECMP command, M10~M12 will retain the state before X0=
Off.
Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result.
X0
DECMP D0 D100 M10
M10
It is On when (D1A D0)>(D101A D100)
M11
It is On when (D1A D0)=(D101A D100)
M12
It is On when (D1A D0)<(D101A D100)
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Footnote Values for detail.

API Binary Floating Point Zone

Applicable models
EZCP ES EP EH
111 D P Comparison
－－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
S ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
D ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
DEZCP DEZCPP
Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. execution execution
Operand S should be smaller than operand S . Flag: None
1 2
only 32-bit command DEZCP, DEZCPP are available.
command (DEZCPP).
: Lower limit of binary floating point zone comparison : Upper limit of binary
Command
floating point zone comparison : Comparison value of binary floating point
Explanation
: Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.
The data of is compared to the data range of ~ and the result (＞,
＝, ＜) is showed by three bit devices in .
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.
When ＞ , will be used as upper and lower limit for the comarison.
If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.
Program
When X1=On and execute DEZCP command, one of M0~M2 will be On. When X1=Off
Example
and not to execute EZCP command, M0~M2 will retain the state before X1= Off.
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result.
X0
DEZCP D0 D10 D20 M0
M10
M11
it is On when (D1A D0) < (D21A D20)<(D11A D10)
M12


RAD Degree Radian ES EP EH
116 D P －

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. 32 -bit command (9 STEPS)
Continuous Pulse
This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DRAD DRAD DRADP
execution execution
and DRADP.
Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag, M1022 Carry flag
: data source (degree) : Coverted result (radian).

Command
Using following function to convert degree to radian:
Explanation
Radian ＝ degree × (π/180)
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to
Program save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point.
Example X0
DRAD D0 D10
D1 D0 degree value
D 11 D 10 RAD value ( degree X π /180)


DEG Radian Degree ES EP EH
117 D P －

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DDEG DDEG DDEGP
execution execution
and DDEGP.
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag

Command : data source (radian). : Coverted result (degree).

Explanation Using following function to convert radian to degree:
degree ＝ radian × (180/π)
When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to
Program
Example save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point.
X0
DDEG D0 D10
D1 D0 radian value
D 11 D 10 degree value (radian X 180/ π )

API Convert Binary Floating Point to Applicable models

EBCD ES EP EH
118 D P Decimal Floating Point

S ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DEBCD DEBCDP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DEBCD, DEBCDP are available.
ES series models do not support pulse execution Flag: None
commands (DEBCDP)
: Data source : Coverted result

Command
Convert binary floating point value at the register specified by to decimal floating
Explanation
point value stored in the register specified by .
PLC floating point is operated by the binary floating point format. DEBCD command is
the specific command used to convert binary floating point to decimal floating point.

When X0=On, the binary floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to decimal
Program
floating point stored in D3, D2.
Example
X0
DEBCD D0 D2
Binary 32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent

Floating Point D1 D0 1 bit for symbol bit
Exponent Real number

Exponent
Decimal Real number [D3]
Floating Point D3 D2 [D2] * 10

Convert Decimal Floating Point to
EBIN ES EP EH
119 D P Binary Floating Point

S ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DEBIN DEBINP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DEBIN, DEBINP are available.
ES series models do not support pulse execution Flag: None
commands (DEBINP).
: Data source : Coverted result

Command
Convert decimal floating point value at the register specified by to binary floating
Explanation
point value stored in the register specified by .
For example, =1234, +1= 8 will become =1.2345 x 105
must be a binary floating point format. and +1 represent the real
number and exponent of the floating point number respectively.
DEBIN command is the specific command used to convert decimal floating point to
binary floating point.

When X1=On, the decimal floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to binary
Program
floating point stored in D3, D2.
Example
1 X1
DEBIN D0 D2

Decim al [D0]
Floating P oint D1 D0 [D1] * 10
Binary 23 bits for real num ber, 8 bits for exponent

Floating P oint D3 D2 1 bit for symbol bit
Before perform floating point operation, must use FLT (API 49) command to convert BIN
Program
integer to binary floating point. The source data (the value which will be converted)
Example
2 should be a BIN integer. However, DEBIN command can be used to convert floating
point value to binary floating point value.
When X0=On, move K314 to D0 and move K-2 to D1 to generate decimal floating point
format (3.14 = 314 × 10-2).
X0
MOVP K314 D0 K314 D0 [D1]
-2
314 x10
MOVP K-2 D1 K-2 D1 [D0]
(D1 , D0) (D3 , D2)

DEBIN D0 D2
Binary
314 x10 Floating Point

EADD Binary Floating Point Addition ES EP EH
120 D P

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
D ¼ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. Continuous Pulse
DEADD DEADDP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DEADD, DEADDP are available. Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
(Borrow flag) and M1022
(Carry flag)
(DEADDP).

: Augend : Addend : Addition result

Command
+ = . The floating point value in the register specified by and
Explanation
are added and the result is stored in the register specified by . All source
data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating
point format.
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition
operation.
and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used
as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEADD
command, the data in the register will be added one time in every scan program during
the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution command
(DEADDP) is generally used.
When X0=On, add binary floating point value of (D1, D0) and binary floating point
Program
Example value of (D3, D2) and store the result in (D11, D10).
1
X0
DEADD D0 D2 D10
When X2=On, add binary floating point value of (D11, D10) and K1234 (automatically
Program
Example converted to binary floating point) and store the result in (D21, D20).
2
X2
DEADD D10 K1234 D20

ESUB Binary Floating Point Subtraction ES EP EH
121 D P

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
DESUB DESUBP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DESUB, DESUBP are available. Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
(Borrow flag) and M1022
ES series models do not support pulse command
(Carry flag)
(DESUBP).

: Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result

Command
− = . The floating point value in the register specified by is
Explanation
subtracted from the floating point value in the register specified by and the result
is stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point
format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the subtraction
operation.
as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DESUB
command, the data in the register will be subtracted one time in every scan program
during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution
command (DESUBP) is generally used.
When X0=On, binary floating point value of (D3, D2) is subtracted from binary floating
Program
Example point value of (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
1 X0
DESUB D0 D2 D10
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is subtracted from K1234
Program
Example (automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
2 X2
DESUB K1234 D0 D10

EMUL Binary Floating Point Multiplication ES EP EH
122 D P

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
DEMUL DEMULP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DEMUL, DEMULP are available.
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry
ES series models do not support pulse execution command flag
(DEMULP).

: Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result

Command
× = . The floating point value in the register specified by is
Explanation
multiplied with the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is
stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format
and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the multiplication
operation.
as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEMUL
command, the data in the register will be multiplied one time in every scan program
during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution
command (DEMULP) is generally used.
When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with binary floating
Program
Example point (D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20).
1 X1
DEMUL D0 D10 D20
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with K1234
Program
Example (automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
2 X2
DEMUL K1234 D0 D10

EDIV Binary Floating Point Division ES EP EH
123 D P

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
DEDIV DEDIVP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DEDIV, DEDIVP are available. Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
flag
(DEDIVP).

: Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder

Command
÷ = . The floating point value in the register specified by is
Explanation
divided by the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is
stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format
and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the division operation.
If is 0 (zero), the operation will fail and will result in an “operand error”, then this
command will not be executed.
When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by binary floating point
Program
Example (D11, D10) and the remainder is stored in (D21, D20).
1
X1
DEDIV D0 D10 D20
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by K1234 (automatically
Program
Example converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
2
X2
DEDIV D0 K10 D10

Perform Exponent Operation of
EXP ES EP EH

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DEXP DEXPP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DEXP, DEXPP are available.
ES series models do not support pulse execution command Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
(DEXPP). Borrow flag and M1022 Carry
flag

Command : operand source device. : operand result device.

Explanation For example, the base e =2.71828 and exponent is :
EXP[ +1, ]=[ +1, ]
No matter positive or negative value are valid for S. Specific register D needs to use
32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating
point.
When operand D= e S, e=2.71828 and S is specific source data.
Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).
Program
Example When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be exponent to perform exponent operation. The
value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and
save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10)
M0
RST M1081
M1
DEXP D10 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30

Perform Natural Logarithm
LN ES EP EH
125 D P Operation of Binary Floating Point

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DLN DLNP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DLN, DLNP are available.
ES series models do not support pulse execution command Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
(DLNP). Borrow flag and M1022 Carry
flag

Command : operand source device. : operand result device.

Explanation For example, perform natural logarithm operation ln to operand :
LN[ +1, ]=[ +1, ]
Only positive number is valid for S. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and
floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating point.
When operand eD=S, operand D=lnS and S is specific source data.
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).
Program
Example When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be real number to perform natural logarithm operation.
The value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and
save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10)
M0
RST M1081
M1
DLN D10 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30

Perform Logarithm Operation of
LOG ES EP EH

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
DLOG DLOGP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DLOG, DLOGP are available. Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
flag
(DLOGP).

Command : operand base device. : operand source device. : operand result

Explanation device.
Perform logarithm operation to and and save the result to .
Only positive number is valid for S2 (positive and negative number are valid for S1).
Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore,
S1 and S2 need to convert to floating point.
Consider S1D=S2, D=? →Log S1S2=D
Consider S1=5,S2=125, D=log 5125=?
S1D=S2→5D=125→D=log 5125=3
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in
Program
Example register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to
perform logarithm operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal
floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the
power of 10)
M0
RST M1081
D2 D12
M1
D10 D12 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30
API Square Root of Binary Floating Applicable models

ESQR ES EP EH
127 D P Point

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Note: Essential condition: S only can be a positive value. (S≧0) 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
Continuous Pulse
Refer to each model specification for usage range. DESQR DESQRP
execution execution
Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1067
only 32-bit command DESQR, DESQRP are available.
(Program execution error)
(DESQRP).


Command
This command performs a square root operation on the floating point value of source
Explanation
device and stores the result at the destination device . All data will be
operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer
value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition
operation.
If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On.
only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a
negative value will result in an “operation error” and this command will not be executed.
M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code “0E1B” will be record in D1067.
When X0=On, the square root of binary floating point (D1, D0) is stored in the register
Program
Example specified by (D11, D10) after the operation of square root.
1 X0
DESQR D0 D10
(D1, D0) (D11 , D10)

binary floating point binary floating point
When X2=On, the square root of K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating
Program
Example point) is stored in (D11, D10).
2
X2
DESQR K1234 D10

Perform Power Operation of
POW ES EP EH

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼
DPOW DPOWP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DPOW, DPOWP are available. Flag: no.
(DPOWP).

Command : base device. : exponent device. : operand result device.

Explanation Perform power operation to binary floating point and and save the result
to .
POW [ +1, ]^[ +1, ]=
Only positive number is valid for S1 and S2. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit
format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S1 and S2 need to convert to floating
point.
When S1S2=D, D=?
If S1=5,S2=3, D=53=?
D=53=125
Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in
Program
Example register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to
perform power operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal
floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the
power of 10)
M0
RST M1081
D2 D12
M1
D10 D12 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30
API Convert Binary Floating Point to Applicable models

INT ES EP EH
129 D P BIN Integer

INT INTP
D ¼ execution execution
ES series models do not support this command (INTP, Continuous Pulse
DINTP). DINT DINTP
execution execution
Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
(Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag)


Command
The binary floating point value of the register specified by is converted to BIN
Explanation
integer and stored in the register specified . The decimal of Bin integer will be
discarded.
This command is the inverse of the API 49 (FLT) command.
If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On.
If there is any decimal discarded, the Borrow flag M1021=On.
If the result exceeds the following setting range (an overflow occurs), the Carry flag
M1022=On.
16-bit command : -32,768~32,767
32-bit command : -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
When X0=On, the binary floating point value of (D1, D0) will be converted to BIN
Program
Example integer and the result is stored in (D10). The decimal of BIN integer will be discarded.
When X1=On, the binary floating point value of (D21, D20) will be converted to BIN
integer and the result is stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of BIN integer will be
discarded.
X0
INT D0 D10
X1
DINT D20 D30
API Sine Operation of Binary Floating Applicable models

SIN ES EP EH
130 D P Point

S ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0° to 360°; 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
Continuous Pulse
i.e., 0°≦S＜360° DSIN DSINP
execution execution
Flag: M1018 flag for radian/angle.
only 32-bit command DSIN, DSINP are available.
(DSINP).

: Specified RAD value : Area where calculated result is stored.

Command
Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018.
Explanation
When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle ×π/180.
When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0°≦angle＜360°.
The SIN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated
result is stored in the register specified by .
Following shows the relation between radian and result:
R S: Radian
1 R: Result
S
-2 - 32 -2 -2 0
2
3
2
2
-1
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When X0=On, specify RAD value (D1, D0).
Program
Example Calculate SIN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in
1 (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002
RST M1018
X0
DSIN D0 D10
RAD value (degree x / 180)

D1 D0
D1 D10 COS value

When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. Select angle from inputs X0 and X1 and convert it
Program
Example to RAD value to calculate SIN value.
2 X0
MOVP K30 K6 (K30 D10)
X1
MOVP K60 K6 (K60 D10)
M1000
FLT D10 D1120 (D10 D15, D14) binary floating point
( /180) (D21, D20)

DEDIV K31415926 K1800000000 D20
binary binary
floating point floating point
DEMUL D14 D20 D40 (D15, D14) degree x /180
(D41, D40) RAD binary floating point
DSIN D40 D50 (D41 , D40) RAD (D51, D50) SIN
When M1018=On, it is anlge mode. When X0=On, it designates angle value of (D1,
Program
Example D0). Angle range is: 0°≦angle value＜360°. After converting to SIN value to save in
3 (D11, D10) with binary floating point number.

M1002
SET M1018
X0
DSIN D0 D10
D1 D0 angle value
SIN value
D 11 D 10 (binary floating point)
API Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Applicable models

COS ES EP EH
131 D P Point

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
i.e., 0°≦S＜360° DCOS DCOSP
execution execution
Flag: None
only 32-bit command DCOS, DCOSP are available.
ES/EP series models do not support this command (DCOS,
DCOSP).
: Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored.

Command
Explanation
The COS value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated
R S: Radian
R: Result
1
S
-2 - 32 -2 -2 0
2
3
2
2
-1
Flag M1018 radian/angle switch: when M1018=Off, is RAD value. When

M1018=On, is angle value (0-360).

Program
Example Calculate COS value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)
1 and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002
RST M1018
X0
DCOS D0 D10
RAD value (degree x / 180)

D1 D0
COS value
D1 D10 binary floating point
When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle
Program
Example range: 0°≦angle＜360°. After converting to COS value, save in (D11, D10) with binary
2 floating point.
M1002
SET M1018
X0
DCOS D0 D10
D1 D0 angle value
COS value
D1 D 10 (binary floating point)
API Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Applicable models

TAN ES EP EH
132 D P Point

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
i.e., 0°≦S＜360° DTAN DTANP
execution execution
Flag: None
only 32-bit command DTAN, DTANP are available.
(DTANP).

: Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored.

Command
Explanation
The TAN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated
R S: Radian
R: Result
-2 2
2
- S
-2 0 3
- 32 -1 1
2
Program
Example Calculate TAN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)
1 and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002
RST M1018
X0
DTAN D0 D10
D1 D0 RAD value (degree x / 180)

D11 D10 TAN value

When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle
Program
Example range: 0°≦angle＜360°. After converting to TAN value, save in (D11, D10) with binary
2 floating point.
M1002
SET M1018
X0
DTAN D0 D10
D1 D0 angle value
TAN value
D1 D 10 (binary floating point)

API Arc Sine Operation of Binary Floating Applicable models

ASIN ES EP EH
133 D P Point

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DASIN DASINP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DASIN, DASINP are available.
Flag: None
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is

Command
stored.
Explanation
ASIN value=SIN –1
R S: Radian
R: Result
2
S
-1,0 0 1,0
-2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
Program
result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
Example
X0
DASIN D0 D10
D11 D10 ASIN value


API Arc Cosine Operation of Binary

Applicable models
ACOS ES EP EH
－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DACOS DACOSP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DACOS, DACOSP are available.
Flag: None

Command
stored
Explanation
ACOS value=COS –1

R S: Radian
R: Result
S
-1,0 0 1,0
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ACOS value and save
Program
the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point
Example
format.
X0
DACOS D0 D10
D11 D10 ACOS value


API Arc Tangent Operation of Binary

Applicable models
ATAN ES EP EH
－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DATAN DATANP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DATAN, DATANP are available.
Flag: None

Command
stored.
Explanation
ATAN value=TAN –1
R
S: Radian
R: Result
2
S
0
-
2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ATAN value and save
Program
Example
format.
X0
DATAN D0 D10
D11 D10 ATAN value


API Hyperbolic Sine Operation of Binary

Applicable models
SINH ES EP EH
－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DSINH DSINHP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DSINH, DSINHP are available.
Flag: None

Command
stored
Explanation
SINH value=(es-e-s)/2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate SINH value and save the
Program
Example
X0
DSINH D0 D10
D11 D10 SINH value

API Hyperbolic Cosine Operation of Binary

Applicable models
COSH ES EP EH
－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DCOSH DCOSHP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DCOSH, DCOSHP are available.
Flag: None

Command
stored
Explanation
COSH value=(es+e-s)/2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate COSH value and save
Program
Example
format.

X0
DCOSH D0 D10
D11 D10 COSH value

API Hyperbolic Tangent Operation of

Applicable models
TANH ES EP EH
－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D ¼
Continuous Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DTANH DTANHP
execution execution
only 32-bit command DTANH, DTANHP are available.
Flag: None

Command
stored
Explanation
TANH value=(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
Program
Example
X0
DTANH D0 D10
D11 D10 TANH value



General Pulse Width Modulation
GPWM ES EP EH
144 D P Output
－

S1 ¼ －－－－
S2 ¼
D ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
Note: Please refer to command explanation for usage range of Continuous Pulse
DPOW DPOWP
operand S1, S2 and D. execution execution
Operand S2 occupies 3 devices. Flag: no.
Operand S1 should be less or equal to operand S2.
: Pulse output width. : Pulse output cycle. : pulse output device.

Command
Explanation is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.
is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms, ≦ .
+1 and +2 is for system, please don’t use them.
pulse output devices: Y, M and S.
When GPWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse
output cycle is output through pulse output device .
When ≦ 0, there is no pulse output from the pulse output device. When
≧ , the pulse output device will be always On.
and can be modified when executing PWM command.
When X0=On, Y10 will output following pulse. When X0=Off, Y10 output will also be
Program Off.
Example
t T
X0
GPWM K1000 K2000 Y10
t=1000ms
Output Y10
T=2000ms
This command counts by scan cycle so the maximum offset will be a PLC scan cycle.
Footnote The value of , and ( - ) should be larger than PLC scan cycle.
Otherwise, there will be error occurs for GPWM outputs.
Please notice that if using this command in subroutine or interruption, GPWM output
may not be accurate.


FTC Fuzzy Temperature Control ES EP EH
145 －

S1 ¼ Continuous
FTC －－
S2 ¼ execution
S3 ¼
D ¼ 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Refer to command explanation for operand S1, S2 and D
usage range. Flag: None
Operand S3 occupies continuous 6 devices.
Refer to footnote for PID usage times in program.
: Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter

Command : Output value (MV)
Explanation
Operand S1 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1°C ~300°C. The unit is 0.1°C. If (
+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1°C~300°C.
Operand S2 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1°C ~300°C. The unit is 0.1°C. If (
+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1°C~300°C.
Therefore, when user gets the result that analog converts to digital from temperature
sensor, it needs to convert to the value during 1~3000 by using the four fundamental
operations of arithmetic.
is sampling time setting. If setting is less than K1, command won’t act. If setting
exceeds K200, it will be regarded as K200.
The setting of ( +1) only can be K0 (means °C) and K1 (means °F). When setting
is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0.
Operand D usage range is 0~100 to show 0%~100%. User should use with other
commands by heater type when using this command. For example, it can use with
GPWM command to control pulse output as shown in footnote (example 1).
Finishing parameter setting before executing FTC command.

Program
Example When X0=On, command is executed and save result in D150. When X0=Off, command
is not executed and previous data is unchanged.
X0
FTC D0 D1 D100 D150

The setting of is in the following:

Footnote
Device Function Usage range Explanation
When TS is less than a scan time, PID
command will execute for a scan time.
When TS=0, it won’t act. Therefore, the
Sampling time (TS) 1~200
: minimum setting of TS should be larger
(unit: 10ms) (unit: 100ms)
than program scan time.
When setting exceeds 200, it will be
regarded as 200.
When setting is not these two settings
+1: Temperature unit K0=°C，K1=°F (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to
K0.
+2:
For system uses, please don’t use.
~
+5:
Control Diagram:
FTC
+ e Fuzzy
MV
Controller
PV
Temperature
Sensor
Attention and suggestion:

It is recommended to set sampling time to twice and above of sampling time of
temperature sensor to get better temperature control.
Example 1: control diagram
FTC
SV + e Fuzzy MV PWM
Program Y10
D0 Controller D10
PV D1
Temperature
Pt Module Sensor
Following time chart is using GPWM command to output Y10. (t is pulse output width
and T is pulse output cycle time)

T11
T10
The setting of FTC command is sampling time D2=K10 (unit: 10ms) and temperature
unit is D3=K0(℃). Other example for using with temperature control are shown in
following.
M3
FTC D0
<> D10 D11 MOV D10 D11
SET M4
<= D11 K0 RST Y10
CJ P0
> D11 K99 SET Y10
CJ P0
M4
> T10 K99 SET Y10
RST M4
M3
TMR T10
Y10
TMR T11
T11
RST Y10
T10
SET Y10
RST T10


SWAP Swap High/Low Byte ES EP EH
147 D P

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command (5 STEPS）
S ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
SWAP SWAPP
Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit execution execution
command.
Continuous Pulse
The continuous command (SWAP, DSWAP) are only DSWAP DSWAPP
execution execution
provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series
models and EP/EH series models. Flag: None
: Device for swapping high/low byte.

Command
When being 16-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.
Explanation
When being 32-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.of two registers
separately.
This command is usually pulse execution (SWAPP, DSWAPP).
When X0=ON, swapping the content of high/low byte of D0.

Program
Example X0
1 SWAPP D0
D0
High Byte Low Byte
When X0=ON, swapping upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of D11 and swapping upper 8-bit
Program
Example and lower 8-bit of D10.
2 X0
DSWAP D10
D11 D10
High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte


MEMR MEMORY Read ES EP EH
148 D P －

m ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
MEMR MEMRP
D ¼ execution execution
n ¼ ¼ ¼
Note: The setting range of m operand: EP series model:
Continuous Pulse
m=0~1,599; EH series models: m=0~9,999. DMEMR DMEMRP
execution execution
The setting range of D operand: EP series model:
D2000~D4999; EH series model: D2000~D9999 Flag: M1101 (Please refer the
following footnote for detail)
The setting range of n operand:
16-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K1,600; EH
series models: n=K1〜K8,000.
32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series
models: n=K1〜K4,000.
: Address (Constant) for reading data of file register. : Address (Constant)

Command
for storing read data. : Quantity of one time reading data.
Explanation
EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the
read data in the data register.
EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models
provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.
Operand and for EP series models don’t support register E and F.
If operands , and is out of range, operand error will be occurred.
M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.
16-bit command MEMR reads 100 items data from the 10th address of file register and
Program
Example store the read data in the data register started from D2000.
1 When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
executed and the content of previous read data has no change.
X0
MEMR K10 D2000 K100
32-bit command DMEMR reads 100 items data from the 20th address of file register
Program
Example and store the read data in the data register started from D3000.
2 When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
X0
DMEMR K20 D3000 K100


MEMW MEMORY Write In ES EP EH
149 D P －

MEMW MEMWP
m ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
n ¼ ¼ ¼
Note: The setting range of S operand: EP series model:
Continuous DMEMW Pulse
S=D2000~D4999; EH series model: S=D2000~D9999. DMEMW
execution P execution
The setting range of m operand:
Flag: M1101 (Please refer the
EP series model: m=K0~K1,599; EH series models: following footnote for detail)
m=K0~K9,999.
The setting range of n operand:
16-bit command: EP series model: n= K1~ K1,600; EH
series models: n=K1〜K8,000.
32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series
models: n=K1〜K4,000.
: Address (Constant) for data writing in, D2000~D9999 : Address

Command
(Constant) for file register writing in, K0~K9,999 : Quantity of one time reading
Explanation
data, K1~K8,000
EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the
read data in the data register.
EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models
provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.
Operand and for EP series models don’t support register E and F.
If operands , and is out of range, operand error will be occurred.
M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.
When X0=On, the double word command DMEMW is executed. Write 100 items 32-bit
Program
data started from D2001, D2000 in the file register address 0 to 199.
Example
When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
X0
DMEMW D2000 K0 K100
EH series models: when EH series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EH
File Register series PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file
register starts to give number, K0~K9,999), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being
read, K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,
specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K9,999) and decide if
automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.
EH series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0, or the value of D1103 is
less than 2,000 or more than 9,999, reading data from file register to data register is
disabled.

EP series models: when EP series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EP series
PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file register
starts to give number, K0~K1,600), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being read,
K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,
specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K4,999) and decide if
automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.
EP series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0 or more than 1,600, or the
value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 4,999, reading data from file register to
data register is disabled.
When file register read data to data register D, if the address of file register or data
register exceeds the limit range, PLC will stop reading.
As for the data read and write in of file register, in PLC program only can use API
command 147 MEMR to read and use API command 148 MEMW to write in. For
detailed information about file registers, please refer to CH2 section 2.8.3.
There are 32,768 file registers. The file registers don’t have real number, therefore the
read/write in function of file register should be performed by the API command 147
MEMR and 148 MEMW, or using a peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft software.
The destination device is not always continuous. One part is on the inner SRAM and
the other part is on the SRAM CARD. If user did not insert the SRAM CARD and the
read address exceeds 2,000 addresses, then the read value will be all 0(zero).
Related special relays and registers of file register:
M1101 If startup the function of file register, Latched, Default is Off
Special
Function Explanation
Register
D1101 File register starts to give number K0~K9,999, Latched, Default is 0
D1102 Numbers of file registers of being read K1~K8,000, Latched, Default is 0
D1103 Destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified
data register D start to give number K2,000~K9,999, Latched, Default is
2,000

API MODBUS Data Read/ Write Applicable models

MODRW ES EP EH
150 In

MODRW －－
S3 ¼ ¼ ¼
S ¼ 32-bit command
n ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
Note: The setting range of S1 operand: K0~K255 Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
The limit of S2 operand is specified as K3(H3), K6(H6), (Please refer the following footnote)
K16(H10)
The setting range of n operand: n=K1~K8
This command (MODRW) is only provided in V4.9(included)
or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series
models.
: Connection device address : Function code : Address of being

Command
read or write : Register of being read/write : Length of read/write data
Explanation
: Connection device address (UNIT ADDRESS). The setting range K0 to K255.
: FUNCTION CODE. For example: the command of AC drive or DVP-PLC to
read many items is H03. Write command of AC drive or DVP-PLC is H06 and the
command of write many items is H10. Only above three function codes are provided
and the other function codes are disabled. Please refer the following program
examples.
: Device address that being read/write data (DEVICE ADDRESS). This is an
inner device address of connection device. If the address is illegal to the specified
device, there will be fault code store in D1130 and at the same time, M1141 will be
ON. For example, 4000H is illegal to VFD-S, M1141 will be ON and D1130 = 2. Please
refer to VFD-S user manual for the details of fault codes.
: Source or destination of being read/write (SOURCE or DESTINATION). User
can set register to write data length in advance or store data after reading.
: Read/Write data length (DATA LENGTH). The specified range K1~K8
(WORD).
Function code K3(H3) : read many items data
Program
Example 1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF)
1 2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
Received data is stored in 16 continuous registers that start from D0 with ASCII format
when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content to Hexadecimal and store in
registers D1296~D1311 automatically. M1131=ON when it starts converting to
hexadecimal and M1131 will be OFF after completing converting.

User can use MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands to move D1296~D1311 that store
Program hexadecimal data to general register to use. For ES series, other command is invalid
Example to this area.
1
Received data is stored in 8 continuous registers that start from D0 and specified by
users in hexadecimal format in RTU mode. At the same time, D1296~D1311 is invalid.
In ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in D1256~D1295.
Users can move these register data to general register by using MOV, DMOV or
BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
Data received from AC drive is stored in registers specified by users. After complete
receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is
any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code.
Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal
to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault
code.
After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received
data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
M1002
setting communication
MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
SET M1120 communication protocol
X10
M1143 RTU mode setting
X0
MODRW K1 K3 H2100 D0 K8
connection function data address data stored read/write data
device code K3 H2100 register length (word)
address K1 read many
items data
X0
SET M1122 Setting sending request
M1127
handling received data
ASCII mode : received data is stored in 16 consecutive registers that start

from D0 with ASCII format when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content
to hexadecimal and store in registers D1296~D1311 automatically
RTU mode : received data is stored in 8 consecutive registers that start from
D0 and specified by users in hexadecimal type in RTU mode
RST M1127 receiving data completed and reset flag

ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive.
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
PLC transmits data register (transmit message)
Register DATA Explanation

D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive
D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 address
D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1258 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H
Data Address
D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1260 High ‘7’ 37 H The content of register D50
Data contents
D1261 Low ‘7’ 37 H (H1770=K6000)
D1261 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1262 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error
D1262 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0 check
PLC receives data register (response message)
D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H
Data Address
D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1074 High ‘7’ 37 H
Data content
D1075 Low ‘7’ 37 H
D1075 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1
D1076 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

D1256 Low 01 H Address
D1257 Low 06 H Function
D1258 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1259 Low 00 H


D1260 Low 00 H The content of register D50
Data content
D1261 Low 12 H (H12)
D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High

D1072 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1073 Low 00 H
D1074 Low 00 H
Data content
D1075 Low 12 H
Function code K6(H6) : write one WORD data into register

Program
2 2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII
format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers
D1070~D1076.
When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal
format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers
D1070~D1077.
When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers
D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV
or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is
correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
code.

M1002
MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
X10
M1143
X0
address K1 write one
data in
X0
SET M1122 setting transmit flag
M1127
ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command
D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 code
D1258 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H
Data Address
D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1260 High ‘7’ 37 H The content of register D50
Data contents
D1261 Low ‘7’ 37 H (H1770=K6000)
D1261 High ‘0’ 30 H


D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H
Data Address
D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1074 High ‘7’ 37 H
Data content
D1075 Low ‘7’ 37 H
D1075 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1
D1076 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

D1258 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1259 Low 00 H
D1260 Low 00 H The content of
Data content
D1261 Low 12 H register D50 (H12)

D1072 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1073 Low 00 H
D1074 Low 00 H
Data content
D1075 Low 12 H

Function code K16(H10) : write many items WORD data into register
Program
3
2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII
format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive
will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.
When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal
format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive
will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.
When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers
D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV
or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is
correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
code.

M1002
MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
X10
M1143
X0
address K1 write one
data in
X0
SET M1122 setting transmit flag
M1127
ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 30 ”

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 10 2000 0002 CD ”
PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)

D1257 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command
D1257 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0 code
D1258 Low ‘2’ 32 H
D1258 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 High ‘0’ 30 H
Number of Register
D1261 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1261 High ‘2’ 32 H
D1262 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Byte Count
D1262 High ‘4’ 34 H
D1263 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1263 High ‘0’ 30 H The content of register
Data contents 1
D1264 Low ‘1’ 31 H D50 (H12)
D1264 High ‘2’ 32 H
D1265 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1265 High ‘7’ 37 H The content of register
Data contents 2
D1266 Low ‘7’ 37 H D51 (H1770=K6000)
D1266 High ‘0’ 30 H
PLC receives data register (response messages)

D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1
D1071 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0
D1072 Low ‘2’ 32 H
D1072 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 High ‘0’ 30 H
Number of Register
D1075 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1075 High ‘2’ 32 H
D1076 Low ‘C’ 43 H LRC CHK 1
D1076 High ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drives
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 C4 7F
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 4A 08

PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)

D1258 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1259 Low 00 H
D1260 Low 00 H
Number of Register
D1261 Low 02 H
D1262 Low 04 H Byte Count
Data content 1
D1264 Low 12 H (H12)
Data content 2
D1266 Low 70 H (H1770=K6000)
D1262 Low C4 H CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low 7F H CRC CHK High
PLC receives data register (response messages)

D1072 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1073 Low 00 H
D1074 Low 00 H
Number of Register
D1075 Low 02 H
D1076 Low 4A H CRC CHK Low

The startup condition (the contact) before MODRD, RDST, MODRW these three
Footnote commands, cannot use rising-edge contact and falling-edge. Otherwise, the data
stored in received register will be incorrect.
Related flags and special registers of RS-485 communication MODRW command:
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command for more detail information.
Flag/Special
Function Description
Register
Communication setting latched. The change of D1120 will be
M1120
invalid after setting.
M1121 When it is Off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication data.
M1122 Delivery request
M1123 Receive completed
M1124 Receive waiting message
M1125 Receive status disable
M1126 STX/ETX system definition selection
M1127 MODRD / RDST / MODRW commands data receive completed
M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication
M1129 Receive time out
M1130 Users/system definition STX/ETX
M1131 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data convert to HEX, M1131=ON
M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data receive error
M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command parameter error
M1142 VFD-A convenience command data receive error
ASCII/RTU mode selection (use with commands
M1143 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW) (Off is ASCII mode, ON is RTU
mode)
It is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command.
This command will send messages during executing and if the
D1070~D1085 receiver receives, it will return messages and save it in
D1070~D1085. Users can view return data by this register
content.
D1120 RS-485 communication protocol
PLC communication address.(save PLC communication address,
D1121
has latched function)
D1122 Remainder characters of delivery data
D1123 Remainder characters of received data
D1124 Start text definition（STX）
D1125 Definition of the first end character（ETX1）
D1126 Definition of the second end character（ETX2）
D1129 Communication time out abnormal. Time unit:（ms）
D1130 Return fault code record of MODBUS
This is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience
command MODRW. The message that this command sends
D1256~D1295
during executing will be saved in D1256~D1295. User can check
according to this register content.
PLC will automatically convert ASCII data saved in the register
D1296~D1311
specified by users to hexadecimal format.


PWD Input Pulse Width Detection ES EP EH
151 －－

S ¼ Continuous
PWD －－
D ¼ execution
Note: The limit of S operand is specified as X10~X17
32-bit command
The setting range of D operand: D=D0~D999, two －－－－
continuous devices are used and only can be used one
time in the program. Flag: None
: Source device : Destenstation device which stores detection result

Command
This command is used to detect the On pulse width of X10~X17 inputs and time unit is
Explanation
100us.
occupy two continuous devices. The longest detectable time is 214,748.3647
seconds, about 3,579.139 minutes, about 59.652 hours.
If the On pulse width is less than 100us, the value of specified is equal to
0(zero).
When X0=On, record the On pulse width of input X10 and store in D1, D0.
Program X0
Example PWD X10 D0
API Start to Measure the Execution

Applicable models
RTMU ES EP EH
152 Time of I Interrupt
－－

PWD －－
D ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9
32-bit command
The limit of D operand is specified as K1~K1,000 －－－－
Flag: None
: Source device : Destination device which stores measure time (time

Command
unit is 1us)
Explanation
The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten
interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165
in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of
specified special D register is D1161.

After executing RTMU command, if the range of , inputted by user is

legal, this command will get the timer started to measure the execution time of I
interrupt and reset the content of special D register specified by to 0(zero)
simultaneously. When reaching RTMD command, the timer will be closed and
measuring the execution time of I interrupt will end. At the same time, specify the
measuring execution time to the special D register specified by RTMD command.
This RTMU command is used with the next introduced RTMD command and these
two commands are all be used to measure the execution time of I interrupt service
program for the user to deal with high speed response and restrict to providing the
execution time of ISR (Interrupt Service Routine) at the beginning of the program
development.
API End to Measure the Execution

Applicable models
RTMD ES EP EH
153 Time of I Interrupt
－－

PWD －－
execution
Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag: None
: Source device
Command
The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten
Explanation
interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165
in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of
specified special D register is D1161
Program When X0 is Off→On, enter into I001 interrupt subtoutine, the RTMU command will
Example
start a 8-bit timer (unit time is 10us). When reaching RTMD command K0 , close the
timer and store the measurin time in special D register (there are totally ten registers
D1156~D1165 and it is specified as K0~K9).
FEND
M1000
I 001 RTMU K0 D0
M1000
RTMD K0
IRET

After developing PLC program completed, we recommanded that user should remove
Footnote this command.
Additional Explanation:
1. Due to the time interrupt executed by RTMU command is a less priority (less
important than other interrupts), the timer may not be triggered and cannot count the
time when executing high-speed pulse input counting or specifying high-speed pulse
input during the execution period of RTMU command.
2. If user execute RTMU command but not execute RTMD command before the end of
program interrupt, then the interrupt will not be ended.
3. Please specially notice that RTMU command is executed by starting one inner timer
interrupt of PLC, therefore, the timer may be disordered if execute multiple RTMU or
RTMD commands simultaneously.
D1156~D1165: Special D registers specified by RTMU, RTMD command (numbers is

from K0 to K9).

RAND Random Number ES EP EH
154 P －

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
RAND RANDP －
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
Note: S1 operand ≦S2 operand －－ Pulse
－
The usage range of operands S1, S2 is: K0 ≦ S1 , S2 ≦ executioin
K32,767 Flag: No
: lower bound for producing random number. : upper bound for producing
Command
random number. : result for producing random number.
Explanation
When user inputs S1 > S2, PLC will occur operand error and won’t execute it, and
then M1067, M1068=On, and records error code 0E1A(HEX) in D1067.
When X10=On, the random number that produced during lower bound D0 and upper
Program
bound D10 will save in D20.
Example
X10
RAND D0 D10 D20


ABSR Absolute Current Value Read ES EP EH
155 D －－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
D1 ¼ ¼ ¼
D2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
Note: Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices Continuous
DABSR －－
execution
Operand D1 occupies 3 continuous devices
Flag: For the description of M1010,
Operand D2 occupies 2 continuous devices
M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335,
M1336, M1337, M1346, please
There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit
command, DABSR is available and it can only be used for
ONCE in program.
This command provides continuous absolute position data read function of mitsubishi
Command
servo drive MR-J2 (with absolute position check function).
Explanation
: Input signal from Servo : Control signal for controling Servo :
Absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo
is the input signal from Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices , +1,
+2. Device and +1 are connected to the ABS (bit0, bit1) of Servo for
data transmitting. Device +2 is connected to Servo for transmitting data ready flag.
Please see the wiring drawing below for details.
is the control signal for controling Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices ,
+1, +2. Device is connected to Servo On (SON) of Servo, device
+1 is connected to ABS data transmitting mode of Servo and +2 is connected
to ABS data request signal. Please see the wiring drawing below for details.
PLC SERVO AMP
DVP32EH00T MR-J2-A
CN1B
+24V VDD 3
S/S
ABS(bit 0)
X0 D01 4
ABS(bit 1)
X1 ZSP 19
transmission data is ready
X2 TLC 6
24G SG 10
SERVO ON
Y4 SON 5
ABS transmission mode
Y5 ABSM 8
ABS requirement
Y6 ABSR 9
C4

is the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo and it will use 2 continuous
devices , +1. is low word and +1 is high word. The absolute
position data should be stored in the current value registers (D1337, D1336)
corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339, D1338) corresponding
to CH1 pulse, so it is recommanded to specify these two registers. If specify other
devices, finally, the user still have to transmit the data into the current value registers
(D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339,
D1338) corresponding to CH1 pulse.
When DABSR command drvie contact turns ON and read starts, the command execution
completed flag M1029, M1030 will be energized. The flags must be reset by user.
When driving the DABSR command, please specify normally open contact. If the drive
contact of DABSR command turns Off when DABSR command read starts, the execution
of absolute current value read will be interrupted and result in incorrect data. Please be
careful and notice that.
If the drive contact of DABSR command turns Off after the read is completed, the Servo
On (SON) signal connected to will also turn Off and the operation will be disabled.
When X7= On, the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo should be stored in the
Program
current value register (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse. At the same time,
Example
drive a timer T10 to count 5 second. If over 5 second and the absolute position data (32
bit) read not complete, it will drvie M10=On and this means the absolute position data (32
bit) read is abnormal.
When connecting to system, please set the power of DVP-PLC and SERVO AMP to be
On at the same time or set the SERVO AMP to be ON earlier than the power of DVP-PLC.
X7
DABS X0 Y4 D1336
M11
TMR T0 K50
ABS read completed
T0 ABS absolute position

M10 data read is abnormal
Read overtime
M1029
ABS absolute position
SET M11 data read completed
execution completed
flag

Wiring PLC Controller SERVO AMP SERVO AMP

DVP-20EH MR-H-A MR-J2-A
CN1 CN1B
ABS(bit 0)
X0 PF 24 X0 D01 4
ABS(bit 1)
X1 ZSP 23 X1 ZSP 19
transmitting data ready flag
X2 TLC 25 X2 TLC 6
+ COM SG 16 COM SG 10
24V
SERVO ON
Y4 SON 12 Y4 SON 5
ABS data transmitting mode
Y5 D13 44 Y5 ABSM 8
ABS data request
Y6 D14 45 Y6 ABSR 9
COM4
Time chart explanation of DABSR command absolute position data read:

Footnote When DABSR command starts to execute, it will drive the signal of Servo On (SON)
and ABS data transmitting mode to output.
By the transmitting data ready flag and ABS request signal can confirm the
transmission and receipt of both sides and process the data transmission of current
value position data (32 bit) plus check data (6 bit).
Data is transmitted by ABS (bit0, bit1) two bits.
SERVO ON SON
ABS data
transmitting mode ABSM
Transmitting
TLC AMP output
data ready
ABS data ABSR Controller output
request
ABS(bit 1) ZSP AMP output
ABS(bit 0)
D01 AMP output
Current value position data 32-bit

+(plus) check data 6-bit

This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning
function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-J2-A Servo drive.
The Servo motor with absolute positioning function should be rotated more than one
revolution and given the reset signal before manufacturing equipments. Please use one of
the following methods to proceed the first time zero point return:
1. Complete zero point return by using reset signal function to execute API 156 ZRN
command.
2. After using JOG or manual operation to adjust the zero point position of the
equipment, input reset signal SERVO AMP. As for the reset signal input, please refer
to the external switches diagram below to see if using DVP-PLC controller to output.
For the detail of the wiring between DVP-PLC and Mitsubishi MR-J2-A, please
refer to the API 159 DRVA.
Use M itsubishi MR-J2- A

as example
CR 8
reset
SG 10
Flags description:
M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will
output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029=On after the first group pulse (Y0, Y1) pulse output
complete or other relative command complete execution.
M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after the second group pulse (Y2, Y3) pulse
output complete.
M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On.
M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag
M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command CLEAR output signal enable flag
Special registers description:
D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the
current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156
ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the
first output group Y0, Y1, the current value increases or decreases
in accordance with the direction of rotation.
2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY,
API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.
D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the
current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156
ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the
second output group Y2, Y3, the current value increases or
decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation.
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY,
API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.

D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and
last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 57
PLSY, API 59 PLSR) are executed.
Setting range: This speed can not less than 10Hz. If the speed is less
than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output by 10Hz.
Factory setting is 200Hz.
Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting
speed.
D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the
maximum speed setting when positioning control commands ((API
156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: it is 200KHz.
D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which
maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step
acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control
commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are
executed.
Setting range: This acceleration / deceleration time can’t be less than
50ms. If it less than 50ms or larger than 5000ms, it will output by
50ms.Facotry setting is 100ms.
Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting
speed.

ZRN Zero Point Return ES EP EH
156 D －－

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command(9 STEPS)
S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
ZRN －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
S3 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
Continuous
Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the DZRN －－
execution
information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2,, D.
M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335,
M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer
to the footnote of API 155 ABSR
command.
: Zero point return speed : Creep speed : Near point signal (DOG)
Command
: Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module)
Explanation
is specified as the zero point return speed as, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10
to 200,000Hz.
is specified as the creep speed, the lower speed after near point signal (DOG)
turns On and its available range is 10 to 32,767Hz.
is specified as the near point signal (DOG) input (A contact input). If any Y, M, S
device other than an input relay (X) is specified for the near point signal, it will be
affected by the scanning cycle of the PLC and the dispersion of zero point may be
large.

Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2.

When executing API 158 DRVI and API 159 DRVA command, the PLC store the
FWD/REV pulse which increase or decrease during operation in current vlaue
registers (Y0: D1337,D1336, Y2: D1339, D1338) so that it can always know the
machine position. However, the data may lost when the power of PLC is Off.
Therefore, the machine should execute zero point turn during initial operation to input
the zero point.
When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outpus from Y0 and zero point return will be
Program
energized. When it reaches the near point signal (DOG), X5= On and it will change to
Example
creep speed. Then, a frequency of 1KHz outpus from Y0 and the command will be
energized. Pulses output will stop until X5=Off.
M10
ZRN K20000 K1000 X5 Y0
Time chart explanation of reset signal output:

Footnote 1. When reset flag M1346= On, the reset signal is sent to the servo drive when zero
point trun is completed.
2. Output device of reset signal:
CH0(Y0, Y1) reset output device (Y4)
CH1(Y2, Y3) reset output device (Y5)
Initial
position
Zero return speed

program interrupt
Creep speed
scan in circle
ON
Output near point DOG ON
signal (DOG) OFF
reset signal
Reset signal Y4 or Y5
about 20ms
+ 1 scan time inside 1ms
ON
M1336, M1337
Pulse output monitor OFF
Explanation of zero point return operation:

1. When ZRN command is executed, accelerate to Zero point return speed
and start to move.
2. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from Off to On, it will decelerate to Creep
speed .
3. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from On to Off and the same time of pulse
output stop, the content value of current value register (D1337, D1336) of CH0
pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will be 0(zero). Also,
if the reset signal flag M1346= On, the reset signal Y4 or Y5 will output
simultaneously.

4. When the operation of pulse output is completed and flag M1029, M1030 is
activated, indication flag M1336 sent by CH0 pulse or indication flag M1337 sent
by CH1 pulse will be Off.
5. Hence, the command can not search the position of Near point signal (DOG) and
the operation of ZRN command only can be processed in unidirection. In the
operation of ZRN command, the content value of current value register (D1337,
D1336) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will
decrease.
Near point
LSR signal ON switch near LSF
(Backward limit) (DOG) zero point (Forward limit)
DOG
Motor
Back end Front end
Backward Forward
decelerate to initial position

Creep speed
Zero return speed
DOG back end detect DOG front end detect

( zero point position )
6. This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning
function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-H-A Servo drive, MR-J2-A Servo
drvie. It can record current position even the power is Off. Besides, because the
current position of the servo drive can be read by API 155 ABSR command of
DVP-EH series PLC, the ZRN command should only be executed for one time.
After the power is Off, it is unnecessary to execute the ZRN command again.
7. When CH0 and CH1 pulse execute the ZRN command, the current value of pulse
output frequency will display in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397). After the
operation of ZRN command is completed, the last output frequency value will be
stored in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397).
8. When the drive contact of ZRN command is On, CH0 and CH1 pulse will read the
content value set by D1343t as aeceleration time. After accelerating to zero point
return speed, wait for the entry of the near point signal (DOG) and output the creep
speed of low speed by decelerating. Immediately stop output pulse when the near
point signal (DOG) turns Off..


PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output ES EP EH
157 D －－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
PLSV －－
D1 ¼ execution
D2 ¼ ¼ ¼
Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information
Continuous
of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D. DPLSV
execution
M1029, M1030, M1334,
M1335, M1336, M1337, please
refer to the footnote of API 155
ABSR command.
: Pulse output frequency : Pulse output device (Please use transistor as

Command
output module) : Rotation direction signal
Explanation
is specified as pulse output frequemcy, 16-bit 1 to 32,767Hz and -1 to -32,768
Hz or 32-bit 1 to 200,000Hz, -1 to -200,000 Hz. The (+) and (-) symbol indicates the
positive and negative direction. The pulse output frequency can be changed even
when pulses are being output.
Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2.
is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of
. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is
Off.
PLSV command do not has acceleration/deceleration setting function. Therefore,
acceleration/deceleration are not performed at start and stop. If cushion start and stop
is desired, please increase or decrease the output pulse frequency by using API 67
RAMPcommand.
If the drive contact turns Off while PLSV command execute to output pulse, the
machine will stop without deceleration.
When the drive contact of PLSV command truns Off, it is impossible to drive PLSV
command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse
send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set.
When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outputs from Y0. Y5= On represents the
Program
positive direction.
Example
M10
PLSV K20000 Y0 Y5


DRVI Relative Positioning Control ES EP EH
158 D －－

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command(9 STEPS)
S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
DRVI －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
D1 ¼
D2 ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
Continuous
Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the DDRVI －－
execution
information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.
M1029, M1030, M1334,
M1335, M1336, M1337,
M1346, please refer to the
footnote.
: Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency :

Command
Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) :
Explanation
Rotation direction signal
is specified as the numbers of pulses (relative positioning). The available
numbers of are:
16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767
32-bit command: -999,999 to +999,999. The positive (+) and negative (-) symbol
indicates the forward and reverser direction.
is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are:
16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz
32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz
is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can
be specified as Y0, Y2.
Off.
The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336
low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of
CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value
register will decrease.
The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVI command is
executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.
If the drive contact turns off when the DRVI command is executed, the machine will
decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn
On.

When the drive contact of DRVI command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVI
When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0
Program
(relative positioning). Y5= On represents the positive direction.
Example
M10
DRVI K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5
Operation explanation of relative positioning control: Using a positive or a negative

Footnote symbol to specify travel distance from the current position is also a kind of drive method
of relative positioning control.
+3,000
Current
position -3,000
Settings of relative positioning and operation speed:

Initial value(default) : 200,000Hz
Maximum speed
Actual Actual
(D1342,D1341)
acceleration deceleration
time time
Output pulse
frequency
First step Last step

acceleration deceleration
(D1340) (D1340)
Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time
Current Initial value : 100ms Initial value: 100ms

position (D1343) (D1343) Output pulse
numbers
The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is deternined
by the following equation:
1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =
MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ÷ ( 2 × (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms ÷1000 ))

2. Even if the specified pulse output frequency is lower than the value of the
calculation value of the equation above, the calculation value of the equation above
will still be actually used while outputting the pulses.
3. The actual output pulse frequency of the first step acceleration and last step
deceleration also use the calculation value of the equation above as the minimum value.

See below for an example:

1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =
50000Hz ÷ ( 2 × (100ms ÷1000 )) = 500Hz .
2. Although the specified output pulse frequency is equal to 400 Hz (lower than
the calculation value, 500 Hz), the frequency of 500 Hz will be still be used when
output the pulses.
3. If specifying the output pulse frequency = 50,000 Hz, minimum value of

output pulse frequency for the first step acceleration and last step deceleration will
still be the calculation value, 500 Hz.
50000Hz
500Hz 500Hz
Flags description:
M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag

Special registers description:

D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the current
value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the
current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction
of rotation.
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API
59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.
D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current

value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3,
the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the
direction of rotation.
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API
59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.
D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last
step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN,
API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 1/10 or less of maximum speed (D1342, D1341)
If the current value exceeds the range, it is automatically set to 1/10 of
the maximum speed during operation.
3. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while
setting speed.
D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum
speed setting when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 10 to 200,000Hz, the factory setting (default) is 200,000Hz
Note: The output pulse frequency specified by operand S2 of API 158
DRVI command should be under this maximum speed.
D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which

maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step
acceleration and last step deceleration (D1340) when positioning control
commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 50 to 5,000 ms, the factory setting (default) is 100ms


DRVA Absolute Positioning Control ES EP EH
159 D －－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
DRVA －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
D1 ¼
D2 ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
Continuous
Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the DDRVA －－
execution
information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.
M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335,
M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer
to the footnote of API 158 DRVI
command.
: Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency :

Command
Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) :
Explanation
Rotation direction signal
is specified as the numbers of pulses (absolute positioning). The available
numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767
32-bit command: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647. The positive (+) and negative (-)
symbol indicates the forward and reverser direction.
is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are:
16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz. 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz
is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can
be specified as Y0, Y2.
Off
The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336
low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of
CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value
register will decrease.
The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVA command is
executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.
If the drive contact turns off when the DRVA command is executed, the machine will
decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn
On. D1343 is used to set acceleration / deceleration time.
When the drive contact of DRVA command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVA

When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0
Program
(absolute positioning), Y5= On represents the positive direction.
Example
M10
DRVA K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5
Operation explanation of absolute positioning control: Specifying travel distance from a

Footnote zero point is also a kind of drive method of absolute positioning control.
+3,000
F0 first step acceleration

last step deceleration
0 (D1340) min. speed: 10Hz Target position
Zero point
0
Settings of absolute positioning and operation speed:

Tg acceleration Initial value: 200,000Hz
sampling time F max. speed
(D1342,D1341)
Fa accelerated gradient
output pulse frequency

F0 first step
(acceleration) F0 last step (deceleration)
(D1340) (D1340)
min. speedG 10Hz min. speedG 10Hz
T Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time
output
Current Initial value: 50ms
Initial value: 50ms pulse
position (D1343) (D1343) number
The relation between actual frequency and acceleration / deceleration time is in the
following:
Tg: sampling time of acceleration / deceleration

T: acceleration / deceleration time
Fa: acceleration / deceleration gradient
F: Max. frequency
F0: first step acceleration, last step deceleration
P: total pulse number
1. Tg = T / ( 60 * 1000 )
2. Fa = (F – F0) / 60
3. P0 (output pulse number of first step (acceleration)/last step (deceleration)) = 1
4. Each segment frequency:
i. F(n) = F0 + Fa * n ( n = 1~60)
5. Output pulse number of each segment:
P(n) = Tg * F (n)
Restriction:
1. When each segment of output pulse number P(n)＜1, PLC won’t output pulse and
jump to next segment.
2. Speed of first step (acceleration) and last step (deceleration) F0 can’t less than
10Hz. If it is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output 10Hz.

3. If total pulse number P ≦3, acceleration/deceleration function will be invalid.

Wiring of DVP-EH series and Delta ASDA servo drive:
EH MPU Delta Servo Drive
ASDA series
R U
3-phase power
servo motor
L
220VAC S V
220VAC
single-phase T W
N
+24V CN1
S/S 7 DO1+ SRDY
24G DO_COM CN1 24V 6 DO1-
X0 start VDD 17 5 DO2+ ZSPD
X1 zero point reset COM+ 11 4 DO2-
X2 JOG(+) DI 1 9 3 DO3+ TPOS
X3 JOG(-) DI 5 33 2 DO3-
X4 stop DI 6 32 1 DO4+ ALARM
X5 error reset DI 7 31 26 DO4- DO_COM
X6 forward limit DI 8 30
X7 reverse limit COM- 50
DI 1 : servo start
DI 5 : servo reset
X10 SRDY
DI 6 : forward limit CN2 Encoder
X11 ZSPD DI 7 : reverse limit
X12 TPOS DI 8 : emergency stop
Error
X13 ALARM CN1
Counter
X14 /OZ 24
Z phase signal (zero point signal)
DO_COM COM- 45
Electric
Gear
pulse clear
Y2 DI 2 10 200KPPS
C2 COM- 45
pulse output
Y0 /PLS 43
C0 COM- 47
forward/reverse direction
Y1 /SIGN 36
C1 COM- 49
DVP32EH00T
Note:
Please connect forward/reverse limit switch to SERVO AMP.
Wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi
MR-J2-□A Servo drive:

EH MPU Mitsubishi servo drive

MR-J2 series
R U
3-phase power
servo motor
L
220VAC S V
220VAC
single power T W
N
+24V CN1A
S/S CN1B 14 RD Rc3
24G SON 5
X0 start RES 14 18 INP Rc2
X1 zero point reset LSP 16

X2 JOG(+) LSN 17
CN1B
X3 JOG(-) TL 9
18 ALM Rc1
X4 stop EMG 15
X5 error reset SG 10
X6 forward limit 24V
reverse limit SONG servo start 5 VDD
X7
RESG servo reset 13 COM
Rcal1 servo LSP G forward limit
X10 malfunctioin LSN G reverse limit
Rcal2 CN2 Encoder
X11 SV-END TL G emergency stop
Rcal3
X12 SV-READY
Z phase signal CN1A Error
X13
(zero point signal) Counter
X14 OP 14
LG 1
Electric
Gear
pulse clear
Y2 CR 8 200KPPS
C2 SG 20
pulse output
Y0 PP 3
C0 SG 10
forward/reverse direction
Y1 NP 2
C1 SG 10
DVP32EH00T
1. Connect to PLC when detecting absolute position.

2. Connect the forward/reverse limit switch to the SERVO AMP.
Cautions when designing position control program:

There are no using time limit for position control command API 156 ZRN, API 157
PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA. User can use these commands many times in a
program but be sure to follow the following cautions below:
1. Do not drive the position control commands which use the same output CH0(Y0,
Y1) or CH1(Y2, Y3) simultaneously. Otherwise, they will be treated as double coils
and can not function correctly.
2. It is recommended to use step ladder commands (STL) to design positioning
control program (please see the programming example shown below).
Notes when using position control commands API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158
DRVI, API 159 DRVA with pulse output commandsAPI 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59
PLSR:

The current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current
value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 will both be used in position
control commands and pulse output commands and this will result in complicated
operation. To avoid incorrect operation when pulse output commands are required while
position control commands are used, it is recommended to use position control
commands in place of pulse output commands.
Explanation of pulse output terminals Y0, Y1of CH0 pulse and Y2, Y3 of CH1 pulse:
1. Voltage range: DC5V to DC24V
2. Current range: 10 mA to 100 mA
3. Output pulse frequency: Y0, Y2 is 200KHz, Y1, Y3 is 10KHz.
Pulse output signal settings of positioning operation:
There are three kinds of pulse output signal of positioning operation for DVP-EH series
PLC:
1. 1-phase 1 output + direction (it is recommended to use this)
U/D
U/D FLAG
2. 1-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)
U
D
3. 2-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)
A
B
Please follow the PLC output settings above to set the pulse input type of parameters
on SERVO AMP or stepping motor.
Flags description:
M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will
output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse
output complete or other relative commands complete execution.
M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse
output complete.
M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag

Special registers description of EH series MPU:

D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two
1. K0: Y0 output
4. K3: Y1 output
D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two
1. K0: Y2 output
4. K3: Y3 output
When several high speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) and position
control commands (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) all use Y0 to output pulse in one
program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will
perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
Programming example for forward/reverse operation:
For wiring, please refer to the wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series
PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A Servo drive.
There is one operation positionng is performed by using the absolute position method
shown below:
500000
Output pulse frequency 500Hz
100 200,000Hz
Zero point
500Hz
Acceleration/
Deceleration time
200ms
In this example, the minimum output pulse frequency calculated by equation=
MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ÷ ( 2 × (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms ÷1000 ))
as the actual minimum output pulse frequency=
200,000Hz ÷ ( 2 × (100ms ÷1000 )) = 1,000Hz .

Programming example when using step ladder command (STL):

X0
Output to X-axis (Y0)
M1334 is stopped
Stop
M1000
Return to the zero point
M1346 with reset signal is valid
S0 S10 S11 S12 S13 S1334

M5 Operation is stopped
Zero point JOG(+) JOG(-) Positioning Positioning Y0
return in normal in reverse output stop
rotation rotation
M1002
1 Set the maximum speed
DMOV K10000 D1341
200,000Hz → D1342,D13
1 Set the acceleration/

MOV K200 D1343 deceleration time
200ms → D1343
※1. If the maximum speed (D1342,D1341), the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) can set
in their factory setting value (default), then the programming is not required. The
factory setting value (default) of the maximum speed (D1342,D1341) is 200,000Hz.
The factory setting value (default) of the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) is 100
ms.

X1 M5
Reset the zero point return
RST M10 completed flag
Zero point Operation
return being stopped
Reset the normal rotation
RST M12 positioning completed flag
Reset the reverse rotation

SET S0 Drive the zero point return

status (S0)
X2 M5
JOG(+) Operation
2 being stopped
SET S10 Drive the JOG(+) status (S11)
X3 M5
JOG(-) Operation
2 being stopped
SET S11 Drive the JOG(-) status (S11)
X4 M5 M10
Positioning Operation Zero point
in normal being stopped return
rotation completed Reset the reverse rotation
flag RST M13 positioning completed flag
Drive the normal rotation

SET S12 positioning status(S12)
X5 M5 M10
Positioning Operation Zero point
in reverse being stopped return
rotation completed Reset the reverse rotation
flag RST M13 positioning completed flag
Drive the reverse rotation

SET S13 positioning status(S13)
※2. The maximum size of a JOG command is ±999,999 pulses, as this is equal to the
maximum number of output pulses for API 158 DRVI command. If a greater distance is
required, please execute the JOG command again.

S0 M50
Zero point return command
DZRN K50000 K5000 X6 Y0 operate in the (-) direction
Zero point
return Zero point Creep Near point Pulse output
return speed signal (DOG) device
speed
M1029
SET M10 Reset the zero point return
Execution completed flag
completed
M1336 M50
Zero point return is completed
RST S0 (auto-reset)
Y0 being
output
M1000 3
M50
S10 X2 M51 Using relative positioning

DDRVI K999999 K30000 Y0 Y4 command execute the JOG
JOG(+) JOG(+) operation in the (+) direction
Output pulse Output Output Rotation
numbers pulse pulse direction
(Y4=On)
(maximum frequency device signal output
value in (+) device
direction)
M1336 M51
JOG(+) operation is completed
RST S10 (auto-reset)
Y0 being
output
M1000 3
M51
S11 X3 M52 Using relative positioning

DDRVI K-999999 K30000 Y0 Y4 command execute the JOG
JOG(-) JOG(-) operation in the (-) direction
Output pulse Output Output Rotation (Y4=Off)
numbers pulse pulse direction
(maximum frequency device signal output
value in (-) device
direction)
M1336 M52
JOG(-) operation is completed
RST S11 (auto-reset)
Y0 being
output
3
M1000
M52
RUN monitor
※3. In order to prevent position control commands being driven at the same time, the
command drive timing is delayed by one scanning cycle.

S12 M53 Using absolute positioning

DDRVA K500000 K100000 Y0 Y4 command move to the
Positioning absolute position “500000”
in normal (Y4=On)
rotation M1029
Normal rotation positioning
SET M12 completed flag
Execution
completed
M1336 M53
Normal rotation positioning
RST M12 is completed (auto-reset)
Y0 being
output
M1000
M53
S13 M54 Using absolute positioning

DDRVA K100 K100000 Y0 Y4 command move to the
Positioning absolute position “100”
in reverse M1029 (Y4=Off)
rotation Reverse rotation positioning
SET M13 completed flag
Execution
completed
M1336 M54
RST M13 Reverse rotation positioning
is completed (auto-reset)
Y0 being
output
M1000
M54
RET
END
API Perpetual Calendar Data

Applicable models
TCMP ES EP EH
160 P Comparison
－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
TCMP TCMPP
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
S3 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
S ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command
D ¼ ¼ ¼ －－－－
Note: The range of operand S1, S2, S3: S1=0~23, S2 =S3=S0~59 Flag: None
Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices.

: setting the hour of comparison time, setting range is K0~K23 : setting

Command
the minute of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : setting the second
Explanation
of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : Current time of perpetual
calendar : Comparison result
, , is compared to the current value of the head address and
save the comparsion result in .
is the hour of current time and the content is K0~K23. +1 is the minute of
current time and the content is K0~K59. +2 is the second of current time and the
content is K0~K59.
The current time of perpetual calendar specified by is read by using TRD
command previously and then compared by using TCMP command. If the content of
exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command
won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in
D1067.
When X10= On, the command is executed and the current time of perpetual calendar
Program
in (D20~D22) is compared to the set value 12:20:45 and the result is shown at
Example
M10~M12. When X10 goes from On→Off, the command is not executed but the
On/Off state before M10~M12 is kept.
Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.
X10
TCMP K12 K20 K45 D20 M10
M10
ON when 12:20:45 >
M11
ON when 12:20:45 =
M12
ON when 12:20:45 <
API Perpetual Calendar Data Zone

Applicable models
TZCP ES EP EH
161 P Comparison
－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
TZCP TZCPP
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
S ¼ ¼ ¼
D ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Operand S1, S2, S occupies 3 continuous devices.
S1 should be less than S2, i.e. S1 ≦ S2 Flag: None

: Lower limit time data : Upper limit time data : Current time of
Command
perpetual calendar : Comparison result
Explanation
is compared to the time period of ~ and the comparsion result is
stored in .
, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of
the lower limit time data.
the Upper limit time data。

the current time of perpetual calender.
The current time of perpetual calendar specified by is read by using TRD
command previously and then compared by using TZCP command. If the content of
S , , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time,
the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code
0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If < , is On. If > , +2 is On. Besides these two
situations, +1 is On. (Lower bound should be less than upper bound
.)
When X10= On, the command is executed and one of M10~M12 will be On. When
Program
X10=Off, the command is not executed but the state of M10~M12 before X10=Off is
Example
kept.
X10
TZCP D0 D10 D20 M10
M10
ON when
M11
ON when
M12
ON when

TADD Perpetual Calendar Data Addition ES EP EH
162 P －

TADD TADDP
D ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
－－－－
Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1022 (Carry flag)

: Time augend : Time addend : Addition result

Command
+ = . The time data in the register specified by is added to
Explanation
the time data in the register specified by and the addition result is stored in the
register specified by .
If the time data in , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At
this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On. The
value of the result shows in is the time remaining above 24 hours.
If the addition result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
When X10= On, the command is executed. Add the time data specified by D0~D2 and
Program
D10~D12 and store the result in the register specified by D20~D22.
Example
X10
TADD D0 D10 D20
8 6 14
10 40 50
20 6 26
08:10:20 06:40:06 14:50:26
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On.
X10
TADD D0 D10 D20
18 11 6
40 30 10
30 8 38
18:40:30 11:30:08 06:10:38
API Perpetual Calendar Data

Applicable models
TSUB ES EP EH
163 P Subtraction
－

TSUB TSUBP
D ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.
－－－－
ES series models do not support this command (TSUB,
TSUBP). M1021 (Borrow flag)

: Time Minuend : Time Subtrahend : Subtraction result

Command
− = . The time data in the register specified by is subtracted
Explanation
from the time data in the register specified by and the result is stored in the
register specified by .
If the time data in , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At
this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the Zero flag M1020= On.
The value of the result shows in is the time remaining below 0 (zero) hour.
If the subtraction result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
Except using API 166 TRD command, MOV command also can be used to move the
special register D1315 (Hours), D1314 (Minutes), D1313 (Seconds) to the three
registers specified to read the current time of perpetual calendar.
When X10= On, the command is executed. The time data specified by D10~D12 is
Program
subtracted from the time data specified by D0~D2 and the result is stored in the
Example
register specified by D20~D22.
X10
TSUB D0 D10 D20
20 14 5
20 30 49
5 8 57
20:20:05 14:30:08 05:49:57
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the borrow flag M1021= On.
X10
TSUB D0 D10 D20
5 19 10
20 11 9
30 15 15
05:20:30 19:11:15 10:09:15


TRD Perpetual Calendar Data Read ES EP EH
166 P －

D ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
TRD TRDP
execution execution
Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices.
－－－－
Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076
(Please refer the footnote for detail.)
: The device stored the reading current time of perpetual calender

Command
A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC and this clock
Explanation
provide year (A.D.), week, month, date, hours, minutes and seconds total 7 data
devices stored in D1319~D1313. The function of TRD command is for program
designer to read the current time of perpetual calender directly and store the reading
data in the 7 data registers specified by .
D1319 is read as a two digit number and this setting can be change to a four digit
number, please refer the footnote of API 167 TWR command for the detail.
When X0=On, read the current time of perpetual calender to the specified register
Program
D0~D6.
Example
The content of D1318: 1 is indicated Monday, 2 is indicated Tuesday,…, 7 is indicated
Sunday.
X0
TRD D0
Special D General D
Meaning Content Meaning
device device
D1319 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D0 Year (A.D.)
Day Day
D1318 1~7 D1
(Mon.~Sun.) (Mon.~Sun.)
D1317 Month 1~12 D2 Month
D1316 Date 1~31 D3 Date
D1315 Hours 0~23 D4 Hours
D1314 Minutes 0~59 D5 Minutes
D1313 Seconds 0~59 D6 Seconds

Error Flag of the perpetual calendar built in DVP-EH/EP series PLC:

Footnote Device Name Function
M1016 year display It displays 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319
of perpetual when it is Off.
calender It displays (2000+ 2 right-most digit number of year of
D1319) when it is On.
M1017 ±30 seconds It will correct when it is from Off → On. (if it is 0-29
correction seconds, it will reset to 0. If it is 30-59 seconds, add 1 to
minute and set 0 to second)
M1076 perpetual It will be On when setting is out of range or run out of
calender fault battery. (it only check when power is on)
Device Name Range

D1313 Second 0-59
D1314 Minue 0-59
D1315 Hour 0-23
D1316 Day 1-31
D1317 Month 1-12
D1318 Week 1-7
D1319 Year 0-99 (two right-most digit number of year)
The method to correct perpetual calender:
There are two methods to correct built-in API perpetual calender:
1. specified command to correct
please refer to command TWR (API 167) for reference.
2. setting by peripheral
using WPLSoft (software to edit ladder diagram) to set
Display four digit number of year:
1. It usually displays 2 digit number of year (for example: only display 03 for year
2003). If you want to display 4 digit number, please key in following program at the
start of program.
M1002
SET M1016 display 4 digit number for year
2. It will display 4 bits (two right-most digit number + 2000) to replace original 2 digit
number.
3. If you want to write new time setting in 4 digit number display mode, only 2 digit
number you can write in and its range is “00-99” which corresponds to year
“2000-2099”. For example, 00=year 2000, 50=year 2050 and 99=year 2099.


TWR Perpetual Calendar Data Write In ES EP EH
167 P －

S ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
TWR TWRP
execution execution
Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices.
－－－－
Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076
Please refer the footnote of API 166
TRD command.
: The device stored the new setting time of perpetual calender

Command
A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC. This command can
Explanation
be used to write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock when
adjusting the built in perpetual calender.
When executing this command, new setting time will be written in the internal
perpetual calender clock immediately. Therefore, please notice that the written-in new
setting time if match the current time then when executing this command.
If the time data in exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this
time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
When X0= On, write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock.
Program
Example X0
1 TWRP D20
General D Special D
Meaning Content Meaning
device device
D20 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D1319 Year (A.D.)
Perpetual Calendar Clock
Day Day
D21 1~7 D1318
(Mon.~Sun.) (Mon.~Sun.)
New setting time
D22 Month 1~12 D1317 Month

D23 Date 1~31 D1316 Date
D24 Hours 0~23 D1315 Hours
D25 Minutes 0~59 D1314 Minutes
D26 Seconds 0~59 D1313 Seconds

Set the current time of perpetual calender and adjust the time to 2002/03/23, Tuesday,
Program
Example 15:27:30 (please refer the following program example).
2 The content of D0~D6 is the new setting time of perpetual calender.
When X10= On, then can change the current time of perpetual calender clock to
setting time.
When X11=On every time, the perpetual calender clock will perform the ±30 seconds
correction. “Correction” means that if the second hand of perpetual calender colock is
located between 1~29, the second time will be automatically calculated as “0” (zreo)
second and the minute time won’t change. However, if the second hand of perpetual
calender colock is located between 30~59, the second time will also be automatically
calculated as “0” (zreo) second but the minute time will increase 1 minute.
X10
MOV K02 D0 Year (2002)
MOV K2 D1 Day (Tuesday)
MOV K3 D2 Month(March)
MOV K26 D3 Date
MOV K15 D4 Hours
MOV K27 D5 Minutes
MOV K30 D6 Seconds
TWR D0 Write the setting time in the perpetual calender

X11
M1017 30 seconds correction
Using WPLSoftsoftware also can set the time of perpetual calender.

Footnote The year (A.D.) display four digit number:
1. The year usually only dispaly two digit number (for example, year 1998 only
display 98). But this can be changed to a four digit number by setting the following
program during the first program scan.
M1002
MOV K2000 D1018 The year dispaly four digit number
2. The year display will switch from two digit number to four digit number after the first
scan program when PLC is running. K2,000 in the command is a fix value.
3. If the new setting time is desired to be written in under the four digit number mode,
also only two digit number can be written in. The range for the year of two digit
number is 0~99. Hence, the corresponding range for the year of four digit number
is 1980~2079.

For example:
80(a two digit number) is equal to 1980(a four digit number)
99(a two digit number) is equal to 1999(a four digit number)
00(a two digit number) is equal to 2000 (a four digit number)
79(a two digit number) is equal to 2079 (a four digit number)

HOUR Hour Meter ES EP EH
169 D －

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
HOUR －－
S2 ¼ execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼
32-bit command
Note: Operand S only can use 16-bit command when using F
Continuous
device. DHOUR －－
execution
Operand D1 occupies 2 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Flag: None
Command HOUR can be used for four times in program.
: setting time for turning on and unit is hour. Its setting range is
Command
K1~K32,767. : current time suring counting and unit is hour. Its setting range is
Explanation
K1~K32,767. : output device. +1 saves current time that less than one
hour and unit is second. Its setting range is K0~K3,599.
If using input contact to be timer, output device will be On when attaining setting time
(unit is hour). It can provide user a timer for managing machine operation or maintain.
After output device is On, timer will keep on counting.
When 16-bit timer counts up to max. value (32,767 hours and 3,599 seconds) of
16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, and +1 need to clear to 0.
- +3 need to clear to 0.
When 32-bit timer counts up to max. value (2,147,483,647 hours and 3,599 seconds)
of 16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, - +3 need to clear to 0.
For 16-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When
Program
Example the time reaches 100 hours, Y0 will turns On and D0 will record the current time (unit
1 is hour, but if D0 is less than one hour, unit will be second and its range is 0~3599).
X0
Y10
Y10
HOUR K100 D0 Y0
For 32-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When
Program
Example the time reaches 40000 hours, Y0 will turns On. D0 and D1 will record the current time
2 (unit is hour). If current time is less than one hour, D2 will record the current time (unit:
second).

X0
Y10
Y10
DHOUR K40000 D0 Y0

GRY BIN GRAY CODE ES EP EH
170 D P －

S ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
GRY GRYP
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
Note: Operands S and D only can use 16-bit command when
using F device.
Continuous Pulse
Refer to each model specification for usage range. DGRY DGRYP
execution execution
Flag: None
: Source device : Device which store Gray code

Command
The BIN value in the specified device by is converted to the GRAY CODE
Explanation
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by .
The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows:
16-bit command ：0~32,767
32-bit command ：0~2,147,483,647
If the BIN value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as “Operation Error”.
At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
When X0=On, constant K 6513 is converted to the GRAY CODE and stored in the
Program
K4Y20.
Example
X0
GRY K6513 K4Y20
b15 b0
K6513=H1971 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Y37 Y20
GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
K4Y20


GBIN GRAY CODE BIN ES EP EH
171 D P －

S ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
GBIN GBINP
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
Continuous Pulse
DGBIN DGBINP
execution execution
Flag: None
: Source device which store GRAY CODE : Device which store

Command
converted BIN value
Explanation
The GRAY CODE value in the specified device by is converted to the BIN value
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by .
This command can be used to read the value from an absolute position type encoder
(it is generally a gray code encoder) which is connected to PLC inputs. Convert the
value to the BIN value and store it in the specified register.
Program scan time plus input response time is equal to the output delay time specified
by .
If the source is set to inputs X0~X17, it can speed up the input response time by using
REFF command (API151) or D1020 (adjust input response time).
The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows:
16-bit command ：0~32,767
32-bit command ：0~2,147,483,647
If the GRAY CODE value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as
“Operation Error”.
When X20=On, the GRAY CODE value in the absolute position type encoder
Program
connected to X0~X17 inputs is converted to BIN value and stored in D10.
Example
X20
GBIN K4X0 D10
X17 K4X0 X0
GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1


MAND Matrix AND ES EP EH
180 P －－

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
MAND MANDP
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
－－－－
Note: specific range of operand n is 1~256.
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, Flag: None
KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where

Command
calculated result is stored : matrix length
Explanation
Do matix AND operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in .
The operation rule of matix AND is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are all 1 otherwise it is 0.
When X0=On, do MAND and matrix AND operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
Program
register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows
Example
(D20-D22) of 16-bit register.
X0
MAND D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Before MAND
Execution 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Execution 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Explanation for matrix command:

Footnote 1. A matix is made up of 1 and above continuous 16-bit registers. The register
number that made up matrix is called matrix length n. There are 16 X n bits (dots)
for a matix and a bit (dot) once for a oprand unit.
2. 16 X n bits (serial number b0 – b16n-1) will be regarded as a set of a serial single
point for matrix command. Thus, operate with a specific point in the set not value.
3. The matrix command is convenient and important application command for dealing
with single point to multi-points or multi-point to multi-point, such as move, copy,
compare, search, etc.

4. It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one point of 16 X n points during

marix operation. This regsiter calls Pr (pointer). The setting range is 0 – 16n-1 and
correspond to b0 – b16n-1 in matrix individually.
5. There are actions: shift left, shift right or rotate during operation. Large number is
defined to left and small number is defined to right as shown in the following.
Right
Left width is 16-bit
b15
D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0
D1
b31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b16
D2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b32
b47
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Dn-1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
b16n-1
6. Fixed width of matrix is 16-bit.

7. Pr: matrix pointer. If Pr is 15, it means designated point is b15.
8. Matrix length is n and n is 1-256.
Example: The matrix that is made up of D0 and n=3, D0=HAAAA, D1=H5555,
D2=HAAFF
C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

R0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0
R1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D1
R2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2
Example: The matrix that is made up of K2X0 and n=3, K2X0=H37, K2X10=H68,
K2X20=H45
C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
R0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X0~X7
R1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X10~X17
R2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X20~X27
It needs to fill 0 to R0(C15-C8), R1(C15-C8), R2(C15-C8) once the value is empty.


MOR Matrix OR ES EP EH
181 P －－

MOR MORP
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
－－－－
Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256.
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, Flag: None
KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.

Command
Explanation
Do matix OR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in .
The operation rule of matrix OR is: bit is 1 when one of 2 bits is 1 and only 2 bits are 0
bit will be 0.
When X0=On, do MOR and matrix OR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register
Program
and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of
Example
16-bit register.
X0
MOR D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before MOR
Execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
Execution 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1


MXOR Matrix XOR ES EP EH
182 P －－

MXOR MXORP
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
－－－－

Command
Explanation
Do matix XOR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in .
The operation rule of matrix XOR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are different otherwise it is 0.
When X0=On, do MXOR and matrix XOR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
Program
Example
X0
MXOR D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before MXOR
Execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 11 1 0 0 0 0
Execution
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0


MXNR Matrix XNR ES EP EH
183 P －－

MXNR MXNRP
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
－－－－

Command
Explanation
Do matix XNR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in .
The operation rule of matrix XNR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are the same otherwise it is 0.
When X0=On, do MXNR and matrix XNR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
Program
Example
X0
MXNR D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
MXNR
Execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Execution
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1


MINV Matrix Inverse ES EP EH
184 P －－

S ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous Pulse
MINV MINVP
execution execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼
Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. －－－－
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY,
KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Flag: None
: Matrix source device : result : matrix length

Command
Do matix inverse operation to matix source device 1 by length of and save the
Explanation
result in .
When X0=On, do MINV operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows
Program
(D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register.
Example
X0
MINV D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Execution 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
MINV
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
After
Execution 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

MCMP Matrix Compare ES EP EH
185 P －－

MCMP MCMPP
D ¼ ¼ ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
－－－－
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, Flag: Please refer to explanation for
KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. M1088-M1092.


Command
calculated result is stored : pointer Pr, save target address.
Explanation
For each comparison, it will compare each bit of with from address Pr.
To find the address of different value and save the address in to complete this
comparison.
You can find the result of comparison from comparison flag M1088. If the same,
M1088=1 and M1088=0 for difference. Once comparsion attains, it will stop
comparing immediately and set bit search flag M1091=1. When comparison attains
the last bit, matrix search end flag M1089 will be On and comparison attained number
is saved in . For next scan period, it will start comparing from the first bit and set
matrix search start flag M1090=1. When value exceeds the usage range, point
error flag M1092 =1.
It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one of 16n points in matrix to operate.
This register is called pointer, Pr. This is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1
that correspond to bit b0 – b16n-1 individually. You should avoid to change Pr in
operation to affect correct comparison search. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix
pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command won’t be executed.
Matrix search end flag M1089 and set bit search flag M1091 will be 1 at the same
time.
When X0 is from Off→On, matrix search start falg M1090=0 thus it will start comparing
Program
to find the different bit from the bit that present value +1. (M1088=0 means difference)
Example
When present value of pointer D20=2, it can get following four results ( , , , )
when X0 is executed from Off→On for four times.
D20=5, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0.
X0
MCMPP D0 D10 K3 D20
2
b0 D20
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 pointer
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
MCMP
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47

Explanation for flag signal

Footnote M1088: matrix comparison flag, if the result of comparison is the same, M1088=1,
otherwise M1088=0.
M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1090: matrix search start flag, start comparing from the first bit, M1090=1.
M1091: matrix bit search flag, it will stop comparing once comparison attained,
M1091=1.
M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1.

MBRD Matrix Bit Read ES EP EH
186 P －－

MBRD MBRDP
execution execution
D ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Flag: Please refer to explanation for
Refer to each model specification for usage range. M1089-M1095
: matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target

Command
address.
Explanation
When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.
If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and read from the 0 bit and read
On/Off state of each bit to M1095 (matrix rotate/shift/output/carry). It will see if M1093
(matrix pointer increase flag) is On after reading a bit. And increase 1 to if it is
On. When reading to the last bit, M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer
records the number of read bit and then end executing this command.
Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 –
b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will
be 1 and this command won’t be executed.
When X0 is from Off→On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag
Program
M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after reading a bit.
Example
When present value of pointer D20=45, it can get following three results ( , , )
when X0 is executed from Off→On for three times.
D20=46, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=0, matrix search end flag
M1089=0.
M1089=0.

M1089=1.
X0
MBRD D0 D10 K3 D20
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47 pointer
45
D20

Footnote M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.
M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag.

MBWR Matrix Bit Write ES EP EH
187 P －－

MBWR MBWRP
execution execution
D ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
: matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target

Command
address.
Explanation
When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.
If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and write M1096 (matrix shift/input
complement flag) in the 0 bit of . It will see if M1093 (matrix pointer increase flag)
is On after writing a bit. And increase 1 to if it is On. When writing to the last bit,
M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit
and then end executing this command. If exceeds range, M1092=1.
Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 –
b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will
be 1 and this command won’t be executed.

When X0 is from Off→On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag
Program
M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after writing a bit.
Example
When present pointer is D20=45, M1094 (matrix shift/input complement flag) =1.
When X0 is executed once from Off→On, it can get following result:
X0
MBWRP D0 K3 D20
b0
Before 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Execution 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47 M1096
1 (Matrix shift/input complement flag)
45 D20 pointer
After 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Execution
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
45 D20 pointer

Footnote M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.
M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.
M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag

MBS Matrix Bit Shift ES EP EH
188 P －－

MBS MBSP
execution execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼
: matrix source device. : matrix length : result.

Command
Explanation

This command is used to shift to left or right by matrix length. M1097=0 moves
to left and M1097=1 moves to right. It needs to use the state of M1096 (complement
flag) to fill the empty bit (shift to left is b0 and shift to right is b16n-1) due to shiftment
for each bit. If there is one more bit due to shiftment (shift to left is b16n-1 and shift to
right is b0), it needs to send the state to M1095 (carry flag) and save the result in
.
The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBSP).
When X0=On, M1097=Off means shift matrix to left. Setting complement flag
Program
Example M1096=0, shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to left and save the result in 16-bit register
1 D20-D22 and carry flag M1095 will be 1.
X0
RST M1097
MBSP D0 D20 K3
0 M1096
b15 b0
Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Execution
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBS
M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
After shifting 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
to left
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
When X1=On, M1097=On to shift matrix to right. Setting complement flag M1096=1,
Program
Example shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 and
2 carry flag M1095 will be 0.
X1
M1097
MBSP D0 D20 K3
0 M1096
b15 b0
Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Execution
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBS
M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1


Footnote M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag
M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag
M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag

MBR Matrix Bit Rotate ES EP EH
189 P －－

MBR MBRP
execution execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼
Refer to each model specification for usage range. M1095, M1097
: matrix source device. : matrix length : result.

Command
This command is used to rotate to right or left by matrix length. M1097=0
Explanation
moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. The empty bit (rotate to left is b0 and shift
to right is b16n-1) due to rotation will be filled by the bit (rotate to left is b16n-1 and
shift to right is b0) that rotated out and save the result in . The bit that is rotated
out is not only used to fill the empty bit but also send its state to carry flag M1095.
The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBRP).
When X0=On, M1097=Off means rotate matrix to left. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2
Program
Example to left and save the result in 16-bit register D20-D22. The carry flag M1095 will be 1.
1 X0
RST M1097
MBRP D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Execution 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBR
M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
After rotating 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
to left
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

When X1=On, M1097=On to rotate matrix to right. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2 to
Program
Example right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 . The carry flag M1095 will be 0.
2 X1
M1097
MBRP D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M1095
Execution
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBR
M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M1095
After rotating 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
to right 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Footnote M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag
M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag

MBC Matrix Bit State Count ES EP EH
190 P －－

MBC MBCP
execution execution
D ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼
n ¼ ¼ ¼
Note: usage range of operand n is K1~K256. －－－－
Refer to each model specification for usage range. M1098, M1099
: Matrix source device : result : matrix length

Command
To count number of bit 1 or bit 0 by matrix length and number in .
Explanation
When M1098=1, count the number of bit 1. And count the number of bit 0 when
M1098=0. If counting result is 0, M1099=1.
When X10=On, it counts bit 1 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. When
Program
M1098=0, it counts bit 0 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10.
Example
X10
MBC D0 K3 D10

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
12 M1098=0
36 M1098=1
Explanation for matrix command:
Footnote M1098: matrix count “bit 1” or “bit 0” flag
M1099: it is On when counted result is 0.

HST High Speed Counter ES EP EH
196 P －－

HST HSTP
execution execution
Note: usage range of operand S is K0 (H0), K1(H1).
－－－－
Flag: M1015 high speed connected
timer action
: the ondition to stop high speed timer start

Command
When =1, start high speed timer and set M1015=On, high speed timer starts and
Explanation
records present value in D1015. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.
The range for D1015 to count is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next
count will be 0.
When =0, stop high speed timer and set M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting
immediately.
When is not 1 or 0, command HSTMR won’t act.
When X10=On, M1015=On. It will start high speed timer and record present value in
Program
D1015.
Example
When X10=Off, M1015=Off. It will stop high speed timer.
X10
HST K1
X10
HST K0


Footnote M1015: high speed timer start flag
D1015: high speed timer
This command doesn’t support for EH models. Following is the explanation for using
special M and special D directly.
1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.
2. When M1015=On, only start high speed timer D1015 as PLC executes END
command of that scan period. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.
3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will
be 0.
4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting in command END or HST.
This command doesn’t support for EP models. Following is the explanation for using
special M and special D directly.
1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.
2. When D1015=On, start high speed timer D1015 immediately. The min. unit of
D1015 is 100us.
3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will
be 0.
4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.

API The Contact Type Logic Operation

Applicable models
215~ LD# ES EP EH
D LD#
217 －

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
LD# －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: ＃: &, |, ^
Refer to each model specification for usage range. Continuous
DLD# －－
execution
Flag: None
Command : Data source device 1 : Data source device 2

Explanation Compare the contents of and . To take “LD&” as an example, if the
comparison result is not 0 , the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0 , the contact is in
discontinuity.
Command LD# could connect directly with the BUS.
16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity Discontinuity
API No.
command command condition condition
215 LD& DLD& & ≠0 & =0
216 LD| DLD| | ≠0 | =0
217 LD^ DLD^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0
& : Logic “AND” operation
| : Logic “OR” operation
^ : Logic “XOR” operation
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to
use the 32-bit command (DLD#). If the 16-bit command (LD#) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will
be blinking.
When the result that using the LD& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the
Program
Example content of C0 and C10 is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.
When the result that using the LD| (Logic “OR” operation) command to compare the
content of D200 and D300 is not equal to 0 and X1=ON, Y10=ON and retain.
When the result that using the LD^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the
content of C201 and C200 is not equal to 0 or M3=ON, M50=ON.
LD & C0 C10 Y10

X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y011
DLD ^ C201 C200 M50

M3

API The Series Connection Contact

Applicable models
218~ AND# ES EP EH
D Type Logic Operation AND#
220 －

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
AND# －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: ＃: &, |, ^
DAND# －－
execution
Flag: None
Command : Data source device 1. : Data source device 2.

Explanation Compare the contents of and of . To take “AND&” as an example, if the
comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, the contact is in
discontinuity.
The AND# command is used to connect to contact in series.
API No.
218 AND& DAND& & ≠0 & =0
219 AND| DAND| | ≠0 | =0
220 AND^ DAND^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use
the 32-bit command (DAND#). Or if the 16-bit command (AND#) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will be
blinking.
When X0=ON, using the AND& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the content of
Program
Example C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.
When X1=OFF, using the AND| (Logic “OR” operation) command to compare the content of
D10 and D0. If the result is not equal to 0, Y11=ON and retain.
When X2=ON, using the AND^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the content of
32-bit registers D200(D201) and D100(D101). If the result is not equal to 0 or
M3=ON,M50=ON.

X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3
API The Parallel Connection Contact

Applicable models
221~ OR# ES EP EH
D Type Logic Operation OR#
223 －

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
OR# －－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: ＃: &, |, ^
DOR# －－
execution
Flag: None

Explanation Compare the contents of and of . Take ”OR&” as an example, if the
comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, he contact is in
discontinuity.
Command OR# is used to connect to contact in parallel.
API No.
221 OR& DOR& & ≠0 & =0

222 OR| DOR| | ≠0 | =0
223 OR^ DOR^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure
to use the 32-bit command (DOR#). Or if the 16-bit command (OR#) is utilized, CPU
will determine it as “Program Error” , and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel
will be blinking.

When X1=ON, using the OR& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the
Program
Example content of C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y0=ON.
If both X2 and M30 are “ON”, or when using the OR| (Logic “OR” operation) command
to compare the content of D10 and D20 and the result is not equal to 0, or when using
the OR^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the content of D100 and D200
and the result is not equal to 0, M60=ON.
X1
Y0
OR & C0 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR I D10 D20
DOR ^ D100 D200
API The Contact Type Comparison Applicable models

224~ LD＊ ES EP EH
D LD＊
230

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
LD＊－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: ＊: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧
DLD＊－－
execution
Flag: None

Explanation Compare the contents of and of . To take API 224 “LD=” as an example, if
the comparison result is “=” , the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠” , the contact is in
discontinuity.
Command LD＊can connect to BUS directly.
API No.
224 LD＝ DLD＝＝ ≠
225 LD＞ DLD＞＞ ≦
226 LD＜ DLD＜＜ ≧
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ ≠ ＝
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ ≦ ＞
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ ≧ ＜
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from
and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for
comparison.

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to
use the 32-bit command (DLD＊). If the 16-bit command (LD＊) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will
be blinking.
If the content of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y10=ON.
Program
Example When the content of D200 is smaller or equal to K–30, and that X1=ON, Y11=ON and
retain.
If the content of C200 is smaller than K678,493 or when M3=ON, M50=ON.
LD= K200 C10 Y10
X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11
DLD> K678493 C200 M50
M3
API The Series Connection Contact Applicable models

232~ AND＊ ES EP EH
D Type Comparison AND＊
238

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
AND＊－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: ＊: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧
DAND＊－－
execution
Flag: None

Explanation Compare the contents of and of . To take API 232 “AND=” as an
example, if the comparison result is “=” , the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠” , the
contact is in discontinuity.
Command AND＊is the comparison command that connect to contact in series.
API No.
232 AND＝ DAND＝＝ ≠
233 AND＞ DAND＞＞ ≦
234 AND＜ DAND＜＜ ≧
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ ≠ ＝
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ ≦ ＞
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ ≧ ＜

When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),
from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value
for comparison.
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be
sure to use the 32-bit command (DAND＊). Or if the 16-bit command (AND＊) is
utilized, CPU will determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on
the MPU panel will be blinking.
If X0=ON and that the current value of counter C10 equals K200, Y10=ON.
Program
Example If X1=OFF and that the content of register D0 not equal to K–10, Y11=ON and retain.
If X2=ON and that the contents of the 32-bit registers D11 and D0 are smaller than
K678,493, M50=ON.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3
API The Parallel Connection Contact Applicable models

240~ OR＊ ES EP EH
D Type Comparison OR＊
246

S1 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ Continuous
OR＊－－
S2 ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ ¼ execution
Note: ＊: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧
DOR＊－－
execution
Flag: None
Command : Data source device 1. : Data source device 2.

Explanation Compare the contents of and of . Take API 240 (OR=) as an example, if
the comparison result is “=”, the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠”, the contact is in
discontinuity.
Command OR＊is the comparison command that connect to contact in parallel.


API No.
240 OR＝ DOR＝＝ ≠
241 OR＞ DOR＞＞ ≦
242 OR＜ DOR＜＜ ≧
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ ≠ ＝
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S1 ＞
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S1 ＜
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),
from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value
for comparison.
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be
sure to use the 32-bit command (DOR＊). Or if the 16-bit command (OR＊) is utilized,
CPU will determine it as “Program Error” , and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU
panel will be blinking.
If X1=ON, or that the current value of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y0=ON.
Program
Example If both X2 and M30 are “ON”, or if the contents of the 32-bit registers D101 and D100
are greater or equal to K100,000, M60=ON.
X1
Y0
OR= K200 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR> D100 K100000

=

DVP Ss Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

DVP Ss Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

DVP-PLC Application Manual【Program】

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram........................................................ 1-1

1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-4

1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram .................................................................. 1-8

1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 1-14

1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program........................................................ 1-16

Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function

2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H] ................................................................................... 2-7

2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T] ......................................................... 2-13

2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]...................................................... 2-16

2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28

2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29

2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics .................................................. 2-30

2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register ................................................... 2-33

2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions.................................... 2-53

2.12 Fault Code Information ................................................................................... 2-83

Chapter 3 Basic Commands

3.2 Basic Commands Explanations ......................................................................... 3-3

Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands

4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation .................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program .............................................. 4-7

4.5 Categories of Procedures ................................................................................. 4-8

4.6 IST command .................................................................................................. 4-18

Chapter 5 Application Commands

5.2 Application Command Structure ........................................................................ 5-6

5.3 Handling of Numeric Values ............................................................................. 5-11

5.4 Index register E, F ........................................................................................... 5-14

5.5 Index for Commands ........................................................................................ 5-16

Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49........................................... 6-1

Preface----The Background and Functions of PLC

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1

N: is in OFF condition Y: is in ON condition

1-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual

Read input state from outside

Send the result to the output point

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-3

There is a fault in the 3rd row of ladder diagram.

1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram

1-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-5

Equipment indication: K0~K9,999. There is no equipment symbol and uses decimal

The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:

Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, S, T, C

Normally close, contact b LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, S, T, C

Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, S, T, C

Parallel normally close ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C

1-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual

Block in serial ANB none

Block in parallel ORB none

Basic command, Application Please refer chapter 3 basic command and

combinative line of block 1 combinative line of block 2

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-7

Independent network: Network1

1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram

1-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual

The explanation of command order:

The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram

1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.

AND Block OR Block

2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.